Lxe Mx3X Microsoft Windows Ce Net 4 2 5 0 Equipped E Eq Mx3Xrg H Users Manual Reference Guide
2015-02-09
: Lxe Lxe-Mx3X-Microsoft-Windows-Ce-Net-4-2-Ce-5-0-Equipped-E-Eq-Mx3Xrg-H-Users-Manual-576572 lxe-mx3x-microsoft-windows-ce-net-4-2-ce-5-0-equipped-e-eq-mx3xrg-h-users-manual-576572 lxe pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 316
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
MX3X Reference Guide (Microsoft® Windows® CE .NET 4.2 / CE 5.0 Equipped) Copyright © 2007 by LXE Inc. All Rights Reserved E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Notices LXE Inc. reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this guide at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, LXE assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Further, LXE Incorporated, reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes. Copyright: This manual is copyrighted. All rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent, in writing, from LXE Inc. Copyright © February, 2007 by LXE Inc. An EMS Technologies Company. 125 Technology Parkway, Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. (770) 447-4224 Trademarks: LXE® is a registered trademark of LXE Inc. RFTerm® is a registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Norcross, GA. Microsoft®, ActiveSync®, MSN, Outlook®, Windows®, the Windows logo, and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Summit Data Communications, Inc. Summit Data Communications, the Summit logo, and “The Pinnacle of Performance” are trademarks of Summit Data Communications, Inc. Odyssey Client © Copyright 2002-2006 Funk Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Odyssey® and Funk® are registered trademarks of Funk Software, Inc. RAM® and RAM Mount™ are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA 98108. Java® and Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. or other countries, and are used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by LXE, Inc. is under license. Wavelink®, the Wavelink logo and tagline, Wavelink Studio™, Avalanche Management Console™, Mobile Manager™, and Mobile Manager Enterprise™ are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation, Kirkland. RAM® and RAM Mount™ are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA 98108. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. When this manual is in PDF format: "Acrobat® Reader® Copyright © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe®, the Adobe logo, Acrobat®, and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.” applies. Li-Ion Battery When disposing of the main battery, the following precautions should be observed: The battery should be disposed of promptly. The battery should not be disassembled or crushed. The battery should not be heated above 212°F (100°C) or incinerated. Important: This symbol is placed on the product to remind users to dispose of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) appropriately, per Directive 2002-96-EC. In most areas, this product can be recycled, reclaimed and re-used when properly discarded. Do not discard labeled units with trash. For information about proper disposal, contact LXE through your local sales representative, or visit www lxe com. Revision Notice Entire Manual Added CE 5.0 information and instruction where applicable. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Updated information for EAP-FAST support, Summit tray icon, help feature, etc., included in latest version of the Summit Client Utility. Appendix A – Key Maps Added 3270 and 5250 key sequence charts. Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 1 Features/Options for the MX3X Family ............................................................................................... 2 Related Manuals.................................................................................................................................... 3 Components .............................................................................................................. 4 Front and Back Views........................................................................................................................... 4 Endcap Options ..................................................................................................................................... 5 MX3-RFID Module .............................................................................................................................. 5 Battery Well Vent Aperture .................................................................................................................. 6 When to Use This Guide........................................................................................... 7 Document Conventions......................................................................................................................... 7 Getting Started .......................................................................................................... 8 Insert Main Battery ............................................................................................................................... 9 Check Battery Status .......................................................................................................................... 9 About Lithium-Ion Batteries .............................................................................................................. 9 Optional Devices................................................................................................................................. 10 Attach Handstrap (Optional) ............................................................................................................ 10 Attach the Stylus Clip (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 10 Attach to Hip-Flip (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 11 Connect External Power Supply to MX3X or Cradle (Optional)..................................................... 12 Connect External Power Supply to the MX3P ................................................................................. 13 MX3P Specific Power Accessories ............................................................................................... 13 24/72 Maximum VDC MX3P Power Supply Input/Output Cable Connection ............................. 13 12V VDC MX3P Power Cable Connection................................................................................... 15 Connect MX3X Audio Jack (Optional)............................................................................................ 16 Power Button....................................................................................................................................... 16 Restart Sequence .............................................................................................................................. 16 Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus .............................................................................................. 17 Keypad Shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 17 Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key...................................................................................... 18 Touch................................................................................................................................................ 18 Hotkey .............................................................................................................................................. 18 Touchscreen Calibration ..................................................................................................................... 19 Set The Display Contrast .................................................................................................................... 20 Set the Display Backlight Timer ......................................................................................................... 20 Set The Display Brightness................................................................................................................. 20 Set the Power Schemes Timers ........................................................................................................... 21 Battery Power Scheme ..................................................................................................................... 21 AC Power Scheme............................................................................................................................ 21 Set The Audio Speaker Volume.......................................................................................................... 22 Using the Keypad ............................................................................................................................. 22 Using the Touchscreen ..................................................................................................................... 22 Setup the Client and Network ................................................................................ 23 Access the Terminal Emulation Parameters ........................................................ 23 Installing PCMCIA and CF Cards........................................................................... 24 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide ii Table of Contents Installing / Removing Cards................................................................................................................ 25 Preparation........................................................................................................................................ 25 Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 25 Removal............................................................................................................................................ 25 Enter Data ................................................................................................................ 26 Keypad Entry ...................................................................................................................................... 26 Stylus Entry......................................................................................................................................... 26 Input Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 26 Integrated Laser Scanner Data Entry .................................................................................................. 27 Using a Headset and Voice for Data Entry ......................................................................................... 28 Connecting the Audio Cable and a Headset ..................................................................................... 28 Adjust Microphone and Secure the Cable ........................................................................................ 28 Entering Data.................................................................................................................................... 29 Tethered Scanner................................................................................................................................. 29 MX3P and the MX3 Cradles............................................................................................................... 29 ActiveSync............................................................................................................... 30 Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 30 Initial Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 31 Serial Connection ............................................................................................................................. 31 USB Connection............................................................................................................................... 31 Network ............................................................................................................................................ 31 IrDA Connection .............................................................................................................................. 32 Synchronizing from the Mobile Device .............................................................................................. 32 Connect and Communicate ................................................................................................................. 33 Explore ................................................................................................................................................ 33 Copy the MX3X LXEbook to the MX3X (Optional) ......................................................................... 33 Backup Data Files using ActiveSync.................................................................................................. 34 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................... 34 Serial Port Transfer........................................................................................................................... 34 Infrared Port Transfer ....................................................................................................................... 34 USB Transfer.................................................................................................................................... 34 Connect............................................................................................................................................. 34 Disconnect ........................................................................................................................................ 34 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection ..................................................................................... 35 ActiveSync with a Cradle ................................................................................................................. 35 Troubleshooting ActiveSync............................................................................................................... 36 Docking Cradles...................................................................................................... 37 Status LED .......................................................................................................................................... 37 Desktop Cradle.................................................................................................................................... 38 Connectors........................................................................................................................................ 38 Vehicle Mount Cradle ......................................................................................................................... 38 Connectors........................................................................................................................................ 38 ActiveSync with a Cradle.................................................................................................................... 39 Tethered Scanner and a Cradle ........................................................................................................... 39 The Passive Vehicle Cradle ................................................................................................................ 39 Getting Help............................................................................................................. 40 Manuals............................................................................................................................................... 40 Accessories.......................................................................................................................................... 40 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Table of Contents CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT iii 43 Hardware Configuration ......................................................................................... 43 Central Processing Unit....................................................................................................................... 43 System Memory .................................................................................................................................. 43 Core Logic........................................................................................................................................... 44 Video Subsystem................................................................................................................................. 44 Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................... 44 Audio Interface ................................................................................................................................... 45 PCMCIA Slots .................................................................................................................................... 45 Slot 0 – Network or SRAM Cards.................................................................................................... 45 Slot 1 – Compact Flash Card............................................................................................................ 45 Power Modes........................................................................................................... 46 Primary Events Listing........................................................................................................................ 46 On Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 47 The Display ...................................................................................................................................... 47 The Mobile Device ........................................................................................................................... 47 User Idle Mode ................................................................................................................................. 47 System Idle Mode............................................................................................................................. 48 Suspend Mode..................................................................................................................................... 48 Critical Suspend Mode........................................................................................................................ 49 Off Mode............................................................................................................................................. 49 Physical Controls.................................................................................................... 50 Power Button....................................................................................................................................... 50 Restart Sequence .............................................................................................................................. 50 Endcaps and COM Ports ..................................................................................................................... 51 Endcap Combinations....................................................................................................................... 52 COM Port Switching ........................................................................................................................ 52 Integrated Scanner Port .................................................................................................................... 53 Serial Port ......................................................................................................................................... 53 LXE Connection Cable Technical Specification ........................................................................... 54 RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port ................................................................................... 54 USB Host / Client Port ..................................................................................................................... 55 USB Host Cable............................................................................................................................. 55 ActiveSync .................................................................................................................................. 55 USB Client Cable........................................................................................................................... 56 Tethered Scanners.......................................................................................................................... 56 Programmable Scan Buttons ............................................................................................................... 57 Field Exit Key Function (IBM 5250/TN5250 Only)........................................................................ 57 Scan Buttons and the SCNR LED .................................................................................................... 57 The Keypad.............................................................................................................. 58 Key Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 58 Caps Key and CapsLock Mode........................................................................................................... 59 Keypad Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................ 59 Keypress Sequences ............................................................................................................................ 59 Custom Key Maps............................................................................................................................... 60 LED Functions .................................................................................................................................... 61 Display ..................................................................................................................... 62 Display and Display Backlight Timer................................................................................................. 62 Touchscreen ........................................................................................................................................ 62 Cleaning the Glass Display/Scanner Aperture .................................................................................... 63 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide iv Table of Contents Applying the Protective Film to the Display....................................................................................... 63 Speaker .................................................................................................................... 64 Infrared (IR) Port ..................................................................................................... 64 Power Supply .......................................................................................................... 65 Check Battery Status ........................................................................................................................... 65 Handling Batteries Safely ................................................................................................................... 65 Main Battery ....................................................................................................................................... 66 Battery Hot-Swapping......................................................................................................................... 66 Low Battery Warning.......................................................................................................................... 66 Critical Suspend State ......................................................................................................................... 67 Backup Battery.................................................................................................................................... 67 Backup Battery Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 67 Battery Chargers..................................................................................................... 68 MX3 Multi-Charger Plus .................................................................................................................... 68 Important Battery Charger Version Information .............................................................................. 69 Battery Chargers Affected ............................................................................................................. 69 Battery Label Location .................................................................................................................. 69 External Power Supply (Optional) ...................................................................................................... 70 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 71 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 71 Windows Operating System................................................................................... 71 2.4 GHz Network Configuration ............................................................................. 71 Installed Software ................................................................................................... 71 Software Load ..................................................................................................................................... 72 Software Applications ...................................................................................................................... 72 Optional............................................................................................................................................... 72 JAVA (Option) ................................................................................................................................. 72 LXE RFTerm (Option) ..................................................................................................................... 73 AppLock (Option) ............................................................................................................................ 73 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Option) ............................................................................................ 73 Desktop.................................................................................................................... 74 My Computer Folders (CE .NET 4.2)................................................................................................. 75 Folders Copied at Startup ................................................................................................................. 75 My Device Folders (CE 5.0) ............................................................................................................... 75 Start Menu Program Options ................................................................................. 76 Communication ................................................................................................................................... 77 ActiveSync ....................................................................................................................................... 77 Connect............................................................................................................................................. 77 Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server.................................................................................................. 77 Command Prompt ............................................................................................................................... 78 Inbox ................................................................................................................................................... 78 Internet Explorer ................................................................................................................................. 78 Media Player ....................................................................................................................................... 78 Remote Desktop Connection............................................................................................................... 79 Transcriber .......................................................................................................................................... 79 Windows Explorer .............................................................................................................................. 79 Taskbar................................................................................................................................................ 80 Advanced Tab................................................................................................................................... 80 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Table of Contents v Settings | Control Panel Options ........................................................................... 81 About................................................................................................................................................... 82 Language and Fonts.......................................................................................................................... 83 Identifying Software Versions.......................................................................................................... 83 MAC Address................................................................................................................................... 83 Accessibility........................................................................................................................................ 84 Administration – for AppLock............................................................................................................ 84 Battery................................................................................................................................................. 85 Bluetooth Manager.............................................................................................................................. 85 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................... 86 Date/Time............................................................................................................................................ 87 Dialing................................................................................................................................................. 88 Display ................................................................................................................................................ 89 Background....................................................................................................................................... 89 Appearance ....................................................................................................................................... 89 Backlight .......................................................................................................................................... 89 Input Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 90 Internet Options................................................................................................................................... 90 Windows CE .NET 4.2..................................................................................................................... 90 Windows CE 5.0............................................................................................................................... 91 Keyboard............................................................................................................................................. 92 Mixer................................................................................................................................................... 92 Mouse.................................................................................................................................................. 93 Network and Dialup Connections ....................................................................................................... 93 Create a Connection Option ............................................................................................................. 93 Owner.................................................................................................................................................. 94 Password ............................................................................................................................................. 95 PC Connection .................................................................................................................................... 96 PCMCIA ............................................................................................................................................. 97 Power .................................................................................................................................................. 98 Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 98 Schemes............................................................................................................................................ 99 Battery Power Scheme................................................................................................................... 99 AC Power Scheme ......................................................................................................................... 99 Device Status .................................................................................................................................... 99 Regional Settings .............................................................................................................................. 100 CE . NET 4.2 Default Settings ....................................................................................................... 100 CE 5.0 Default Settings .................................................................................................................. 100 Remove Programs ............................................................................................................................. 100 Scanner.............................................................................................................................................. 101 Determine Your Scanner Software Version ................................................................................... 101 Factory Default Settings ................................................................................................................. 102 Main................................................................................................................................................ 103 Keys................................................................................................................................................ 104 Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value................................................................................... 105 COM Ports...................................................................................................................................... 105 Storage Manager ............................................................................................................................... 106 Stylus................................................................................................................................................. 107 Double Tap ..................................................................................................................................... 107 Calibration ...................................................................................................................................... 107 System............................................................................................................................................... 108 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide vi Table of Contents General ........................................................................................................................................... 109 Memory .......................................................................................................................................... 109 Device Name .................................................................................................................................. 110 Copyrights ...................................................................................................................................... 110 Terminal Server Client Licenses ....................................................................................................... 110 Volume and Sounds .......................................................................................................................... 111 Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds................................................................................................... 111 Utilities ................................................................................................................... 112 LAUNCH.EXE ................................................................................................................................. 112 REGEDIT.EXE................................................................................................................................. 115 REGLOAD.EXE............................................................................................................................... 115 WARMBOOT.EXE .......................................................................................................................... 115 WAVPLAY.EXE .............................................................................................................................. 115 Enabling GrabTime........................................................................................................................... 115 Disabling the Touchscreen................................................................................................................ 116 Configuring CapsLock Behavior ...................................................................................................... 116 Configuring IPv6............................................................................................................................... 116 Command-line Utility ....................................................................................................................... 117 COLDBOOT.EXE.......................................................................................................................... 117 PrtScrn.EXE ................................................................................................................................... 117 API Calls ................................................................................................................ 117 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration ....................................................... 118 Briefly . . . ......................................................................................................................................... 118 Enabler Install Process ...................................................................................................................... 118 Enabler Uninstall Process ................................................................................................................. 118 Stop the Enabler Service ................................................................................................................... 119 Update Monitoring Overview ........................................................................................................... 119 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings ................................................................................ 120 Enabler Configuration....................................................................................................................... 121 File Menu Options.......................................................................................................................... 122 Avalanche Update Settings............................................................................................................. 123 Menu Options .............................................................................................................................. 123 Connection ................................................................................................................................... 124 Execution ..................................................................................................................................... 125 Server Contact.............................................................................................................................. 126 Startup/Shutdown......................................................................................................................... 127 Scan Config.................................................................................................................................. 128 Display ......................................................................................................................................... 128 Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................... 129 Adapters ....................................................................................................................................... 130 Status............................................................................................................................................ 132 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 132 Reflash the Mobile Device.................................................................................... 133 Preparation ........................................................................................................................................ 133 How To : Reflash using Keypress Method ....................................................................................... 133 How To: Reflash using TAG file Method........................................................................................ 134 Clearing Persistent Storage ................................................................................. 134 CHAPTER 4 SCANNER 135 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 135 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Table of Contents vii Determine Your Scanner Software Version ................................................................................... 135 Barcode Processing Overview........................................................................................................ 136 Barcode Manipulation........................................................................................... 136 Main Tab ........................................................................................................................................ 138 Keys Tab......................................................................................................................................... 139 Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value................................................................................... 139 COM Port Tabs............................................................................................................................... 140 Barcode Tab.................................................................................................................................... 141 Buttons ......................................................................................................................................... 141 Enable Code ID............................................................................................................................ 142 Barcode – Symbology Settings.................................................................................................... 143 Strip Leading/Trailing Control.................................................................................................. 145 Barcode Data Match List........................................................................................................... 146 Barcode Data Edit Buttons ..................................................................................................... 146 Match List Rules..................................................................................................................... 147 Add Prefix/Suffix Control ......................................................................................................... 148 Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping...................................................................................................... 149 Translate All.............................................................................................................................. 149 Barcode – Custom Identifiers ...................................................................................................... 150 Control Code Replacement Examples ......................................................................................... 152 Barcode Processing Examples ..................................................................................................... 153 Advanced............................................................................................................... 154 Main Tab ........................................................................................................................................ 155 Keys Tab......................................................................................................................................... 156 Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value................................................................................... 156 COM1, COM2, COM3 Tabs .......................................................................................................... 157 Advanced Tab................................................................................................................................. 158 Translate Control Codes .............................................................................................................. 158 Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters..................................................................................... 158 Prefix / Suffix............................................................................................................................... 159 Barcode Tab.................................................................................................................................... 160 Prefix / Suffix............................................................................................................................... 160 Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters .................................................................................. 160 Prefix / Suffix ............................................................................................................................ 161 Interaction between Strip Leading/Trailing and Prefix/Suffix Settings .................................... 162 Ctrl Char Mapping ....................................................................................................................... 163 Translate All.............................................................................................................................. 163 Scancode Enable .......................................................................................................................... 164 Advanced Processing ................................................................................................................... 165 Strip Code ID ............................................................................................................................ 166 Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes .................................................................................. 166 Adding Codes to the Match List for EAN128 Barcodes........................................................... 167 CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION 169 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 169 Summit Client Configuration ............................................................................... 170 Summit Client Utility........................................................................................................................ 170 Help ................................................................................................................................................ 170 Summit Tray Icon........................................................................................................................... 171 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client ..................................................................... 171 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide viii Table of Contents Main Tab ........................................................................................................................................ 172 Administrator Login..................................................................................................................... 173 Config Tab...................................................................................................................................... 174 Buttons ......................................................................................................................................... 174 Config Parameters........................................................................................................................ 175 Status Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 177 Diags Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 178 Buttons ......................................................................................................................................... 178 Global Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 179 Global Parameters........................................................................................................................ 179 Summit Wireless Security................................................................................................................. 182 Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP and PEAP/GTC ................................. 182 No Security..................................................................................................................................... 183 WEP Keys ...................................................................................................................................... 184 LEAP w/o WPA Authentication..................................................................................................... 185 EAP-FAST Authentication............................................................................................................. 186 PEAP/MSCHAP Authentication .................................................................................................... 187 WPA/LEAP Authentication ........................................................................................................... 189 WPA PSK Authentication .............................................................................................................. 190 PEAP/GTC Authentication ............................................................................................................ 191 Cisco Client Configuration................................................................................... 192 Aironet Client Utility (ACU) ............................................................................................................ 192 Profile Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 193 Cisco Wireless Security .................................................................................................................... 194 System Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 194 Installing Client Device Drivers ..................................................................................................... 194 Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant ...................................................................................... 195 Cisco WPA Configuration.............................................................................................................. 196 PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration ........................................................................... 199 Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant ............................................................................ 199 Server Authentication .................................................................................................................. 200 PEAP/GTC Authentication Configuration ..................................................................................... 202 Configuring the PEAP/GTC Supplicant ...................................................................................... 202 Server Authentication .................................................................................................................. 204 WPA/LEAP .................................................................................................................................... 205 Cisco ACU ................................................................................................................................... 205 EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration ........................................................................................ 208 User Certificate ............................................................................................................................ 208 Setting EAP/TLS Parameters....................................................................................................... 209 Validating the Server Certificate ................................................................................................. 211 WPA PSK Configuration ............................................................................................................... 212 Symbol Client Configuration................................................................................ 213 Profile Parameters Menu................................................................................................................... 213 Wireless Information Tab ................................................................................................................. 214 View Log ........................................................................................................................................ 214 Add a new connection .................................................................................................................... 214 Disable WEP................................................................................................................................ 215 Enable WEP................................................................................................................................. 215 Continue....................................................................................................................................... 215 Select a User Certificate ................................................................................................................. 216 Certificates ............................................................................................................ 217 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Table of Contents ix Root Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 217 Generating a Root CA Certificate .................................................................................................. 217 Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device ................................................................. 219 User Certificates................................................................................................................................ 221 Generating a User Certificate for the MX3X ................................................................................. 221 Installing a User Certificate on the MX3X (WPA-TLS Only)....................................................... 226 CHAPTER 6 APPLOCK 229 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 229 Setup a New Device .............................................................................................. 229 Multi-Application Version ................................................................................................................ 230 Single Application Version ............................................................................................................... 231 Administration Mode ............................................................................................ 232 End User Mode...................................................................................................... 232 Passwords ............................................................................................................. 233 Multi-Application Configuration .......................................................................... 234 Application Panel .............................................................................................................................. 234 End User Internet Explorer (EUIE) ................................................................................................ 235 Security Panel ................................................................................................................................... 236 Password......................................................................................................................................... 237 Status Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 237 End-User Switching Technique ........................................................................................................ 239 Using a Stylus Tap.......................................................................................................................... 239 Using a Hotkey Sequence............................................................................................................... 239 Troubleshooting Multi-Application AppLock .................................................................................. 240 Single Application Configuration ........................................................................ 241 Control Panel..................................................................................................................................... 241 End User Internet Explorer............................................................................................................. 242 Security Panel ................................................................................................................................... 242 Status Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 244 Error Messages ..................................................................................................... 245 AppLock Registry Settings .................................................................................. 254 APPENDIX A KEY MAPS 255 Keypad ................................................................................................................... 255 Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies ..................................................................................................... 255 3270 Key Sequences ......................................................................................................................... 259 5250 Key Sequences ......................................................................................................................... 259 Creating Custom Key Maps ................................................................................. 260 Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 260 Programmable Scan Buttons and Custom Key Mapping.................................................................. 261 Keymap Source Format..................................................................................................................... 261 COLxROWx Format ...................................................................................................................... 261 GENERAL Section ........................................................................................................................ 262 SPECIAL Section........................................................................................................................... 262 MAP Section .................................................................................................................................. 263 Keycomp Error Messages ................................................................................................................. 265 Sample Input File .............................................................................................................................. 269 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide x Table of Contents Sample Output File ........................................................................................................................... 276 List of Valid VK Codes for CE .NET and CE .................................................................................. 278 APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 279 Physical Specifications ........................................................................................ 279 Display Specifications .......................................................................................... 280 Cable Specifications............................................................................................. 281 Cable Ends ........................................................................................................................................ 281 Cable Pinouts and Diagrams ............................................................................................................. 281 Environmental Specifications.............................................................................. 283 Mobile Device and Endcaps.............................................................................................................. 283 Power Supplies.................................................................................................................................. 283 US AC Wall Adapter...................................................................................................................... 283 International AC Adapter ............................................................................................................... 284 Network Device Specifications ............................................................................ 285 Summit Client in PCMCIA Adapter 2.4GHz.................................................................................... 285 PCMCIA Cisco Client 2.4GHz Type II ............................................................................................ 285 PCMCIA Symbol Client 11Mb 2.4GHz Type II .............................................................................. 285 Hat Encoding......................................................................................................... 286 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart............................................................................... 288 Revision History.................................................................................................... 290 INDEX MX3X Reference Guide 293 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Table of Contents xi Illustrations Figure 1-1 Front ...................................................................................................................................................4 Figure 1-2 Back....................................................................................................................................................4 Figure 1-3 Endcaps ..............................................................................................................................................5 Figure 1-4 Side View ...........................................................................................................................................5 Figure 1-5 Vent Aperture in Battery Well – Do Not Cover .................................................................................6 Figure 1-6 Battery Contacts and Main Battery ....................................................................................................9 Figure 1-7 MX3X With Handstrap Installed......................................................................................................10 Figure 1-8 Hip-Flip Accessory...........................................................................................................................11 Figure 1-9 US AC/DC 12V Power Supply and Automotive Power Adapter.....................................................12 Figure 1-10 International AC/DC 12V Power Supply .......................................................................................12 Figure 1-11 Connect External Power Supply.....................................................................................................12 Figure 1-12 Connect External Power Supply.....................................................................................................13 Figure 1-13 Vehicle Power Supply, 24 – 72 Maximum VDC (Fuse Not Shown) .............................................13 Figure 1-14 Connecting the Power Supply to the MX3P Endcap Power Jack...................................................14 Figure 1-15 Vehicle Power Supply Footprint ....................................................................................................14 Figure 1-16 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes .......................................................................................15 Figure 1-17 Connect Audio Jack........................................................................................................................16 Figure 1-18 Power Button..................................................................................................................................16 Figure 1-19 End-User Multi Applock Touch Panel ...........................................................................................18 Figure 1-20 Touchscreen Recalibration .............................................................................................................19 Figure 1-21 PCMCIA and CF Card Location ....................................................................................................24 Figure 1-22 Scan Beam......................................................................................................................................27 Figure 1-23 Scanner LED Location ...................................................................................................................27 Figure 1-24 Audio Cable and Headset ...............................................................................................................28 Figure 1-25 ActiveSync Cable Connected to Serial port on Cradle...................................................................35 Figure 2-1 Hardware ..........................................................................................................................................43 Figure 2-2 Power Modes – On, Suspend, Critical Suspend and Off ..................................................................46 Figure 2-3 Location of the Power (PWR) Button ..............................................................................................50 Figure 2-4 Endcap and COM Ports ....................................................................................................................51 Figure 2-5 Serial Ports and Cables.....................................................................................................................51 Figure 2-6 Endcap Combinations.......................................................................................................................52 Figure 2-7 RS-232 Port ......................................................................................................................................53 Figure 2-8 9-Pin RS-232 Pinout.........................................................................................................................53 Figure 2-9 Pinout – Serial Cable for Synchronization .......................................................................................54 Figure 2-10 Endcap Ports...................................................................................................................................55 Figure 2-11 USB Type A to Serial Port Cable Pinout........................................................................................55 Figure 2-12 USB Type B to Serial Port Cable Pinout........................................................................................56 Figure 2-13 Programmable Buttons ...................................................................................................................57 Figure 2-14 The QWERTY Keypad ..................................................................................................................58 Figure 2-15 LED Functions ...............................................................................................................................61 Figure 2-16 Infrared Port – COM2 Port.............................................................................................................64 Figure 2-17 Main Battery...................................................................................................................................65 Figure 2-18 MX3 Multi-Charger Plus................................................................................................................68 Figure 2-19 Insert Main Battery in Charge Pocket ............................................................................................68 Figure 2-20 US AC/DC 12V Power Supply and Cigarette Lighter Adapter......................................................70 Figure 2-21 International AC/DC 12V Power Supply .......................................................................................70 Figure 3-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen ............................................................................................................78 Figure 3-2 Taskbar Properties............................................................................................................................80 Figure 3-3 Battery ..............................................................................................................................................85 Figure 3-4 Date/Time Properties........................................................................................................................87 Figure 3-5 Dialing..............................................................................................................................................88 Figure 3-6 Display Properties / Backlight Tab...................................................................................................89 Figure 3-7 Mixer ................................................................................................................................................92 Figure 3-8 Owner Properties..............................................................................................................................94 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide xii Table of Contents Figure 3-9 Password Properties .........................................................................................................................95 Figure 3-10 Communication / PC Connection Tab............................................................................................96 Figure 3-11 Power Schemes...............................................................................................................................99 Figure 3-12 Determine Your Scanner Software Version .................................................................................101 Figure 3-13 Scanner Properties / Main Tab .....................................................................................................103 Figure 3-14 Scanner Properties / Keys Tab .....................................................................................................104 Figure 3-15 Scanner Properties / COM Port Settings ......................................................................................105 Figure 3-16 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start..........................................................................................107 Figure 3-17 Stylus Properties / Recalibration ..................................................................................................107 Figure 3-18 System / General tab.....................................................................................................................109 Figure 3-19 System / Memory .........................................................................................................................109 Figure 3-20 System / Device Name .................................................................................................................110 Figure 3-21 Volume and Sounds......................................................................................................................111 Figure 3-22 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen .............................................................................................121 Figure 3-23 Connection Options......................................................................................................................124 Figure 3-24 Execution Options (Dimmed).......................................................................................................125 Figure 3-25 Server Contact Options.................................................................................................................126 Figure 3-26 Startup / Shutdown Options..........................................................................................................127 Figure 3-27 Scan Config Option ......................................................................................................................128 Figure 3-28 Window Display Options .............................................................................................................128 Figure 3-29 Application Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................129 Figure 3-30 Adapters Options – Network ........................................................................................................130 Figure 3-31 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed .........................................................................................131 Figure 3-32 Manual Settings Properties Panels ...............................................................................................131 Figure 3-33 Status Display...............................................................................................................................132 Figure 4-1 Determine Your Scanner Software Version ...................................................................................135 Figure 4-2 Scanner Control / Main Tab ...........................................................................................................138 Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / Keys Tab ...........................................................................................................139 Figure 4-4 Scanner Control / COM Port Tab ...................................................................................................140 Figure 4-5 Scanner Control / Barcode tab........................................................................................................141 Figure 4-6 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings ...............................................................................................143 Figure 4-7 Strip Leading/Trailing Controls .....................................................................................................145 Figure 4-8 Barcode Data Match List................................................................................................................146 Figure 4-9 Add Prefix/Suffix Controls.............................................................................................................148 Figure 4-10 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping ...............................................................................................149 Figure 4-11 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers................................................................................................151 Figure 4-12 Advanced – Main Tab ..................................................................................................................155 Figure 4-13 Advanced – Translate Control Codes...........................................................................................158 Figure 4-14 Advanced – Strip Leading/Trailing Characters ............................................................................158 Figure 4-15 Advanced – Prefix/Suffix .............................................................................................................159 Figure 4-16 Barcode Tab .................................................................................................................................160 Figure 4-17 Barcode – Prefix / Suffix..............................................................................................................160 Figure 4-18 Barcode – Ctrl Translation ...........................................................................................................163 Figure 4-19 Barcode – Scancode Enable/Disable ............................................................................................164 Figure 4-20 Barcode – Advanced Processing ..................................................................................................165 Figure 4-21 Barcode – Advanced Processing – Strip Code ID ........................................................................166 Figure 4-22 Barcode – Advanced Processing – EAN128 Barcodes ................................................................166 Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility .....................................................................................................................170 Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab.............................................................................................................................172 Figure 5-3 Admin Password Entry...................................................................................................................173 Figure 5-4 SCU – Config Tab..........................................................................................................................174 Figure 5-5 SCU – Status Tab ...........................................................................................................................177 Figure 5-6 SCU – Diags Tab............................................................................................................................178 Figure 5-7 SCU – Global Settings Tab ............................................................................................................179 Figure 5-8 Credential Sign-on Screen...............................................................................................................182 Figure 5-9 Summit Profile with No Security ...................................................................................................183 Figure 5-10 Summit WEP Keys.......................................................................................................................184 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Table of Contents Figure 5-11 Figure 5-12 Figure 5-13 Figure 5-14 Figure 5-15 Figure 5-16 Figure 5-17 Figure 5-18 Figure 5-19 Figure 5-20 Figure 5-21 Figure 5-22 Figure 5-23 Figure 5-24 Figure 5-25 Figure 5-26 Figure 5-27 Figure 5-28 Figure 5-29 Figure 5-30 Figure 5-31 Figure 5-32 Figure 5-33 Figure 5-34 Figure 5-35 Figure 5-36 Figure 5-37 Figure 5-38 Figure 5-39 Figure 5-40 Figure 5-41 Figure 5-42 Figure 5-43 Figure 5-44 Figure 5-45 Figure 5-46 Figure 5-47 Figure 5-48 Figure 5-49 Figure 5-50 Figure 5-51 Figure 5-52 Figure 5-53 Figure 5-54 Figure 5-55 Figure 5-56 Figure 5-57 Figure 5-58 Figure 5-59 Figure 5-60 Figure 5-61 Figure 5-62 Figure 5-63 Figure 5-64 Figure 5-65 Figure 5-66 Figure 5-67 xiii Summit Profile for LEAP w/o WPA ............................................................................................185 Summit LEAP Credentials ...........................................................................................................185 Summit Profile for EAP-FAST ....................................................................................................186 Summit EAP-FAST Credentials...................................................................................................186 Summit Profile for PEAP/MSCHAP............................................................................................187 Summit PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials ..........................................................................................188 Summit Profile with LEAP for WPA TKIP .................................................................................189 Summit WPA/LEAP Credentials .................................................................................................189 Summit Profile with WPA/PSK Encryption.................................................................................190 Summit PSK Entry .......................................................................................................................190 Configure a Summit Profile with PEAP/GTC..............................................................................191 PEAP/GTC Credentials ................................................................................................................191 Cisco Aironet Client Utility..........................................................................................................192 Cisco Profile Properties Screen ....................................................................................................193 No Cisco PEAP ............................................................................................................................195 Cisco PEAP Installed ...................................................................................................................195 Cisco ACU Profile Selection........................................................................................................196 Cisco ACU Reboot Message ........................................................................................................196 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon............................................................................................196 Wireless Information Screen ........................................................................................................197 Advanced Wireless Settings .........................................................................................................197 Wireless Network Properties ........................................................................................................198 PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties............................................................................199 Authentication Settings ................................................................................................................199 Wireless Network Login...............................................................................................................200 IP Information Tab .......................................................................................................................200 Authentication Settings, Validate Server......................................................................................200 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID .......................................................................201 PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties ....................................................................................202 PEAP Properties ...........................................................................................................................202 Login Screen.................................................................................................................................203 IP Information Tab .......................................................................................................................203 Authentication Settings, Validate Server......................................................................................204 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID .......................................................................204 WPA/LEAP using ACU Profile Tab ............................................................................................205 Renaming Profile..........................................................................................................................205 Profile Properties Screen ..............................................................................................................206 Select Profile ................................................................................................................................206 Login Screen.................................................................................................................................207 ACU Status Tab............................................................................................................................207 Certificate Stores ..........................................................................................................................208 View Certificate Details ...............................................................................................................208 EAP/TLS Configuration...............................................................................................................209 Authentication Settings ................................................................................................................209 Select Certificate ..........................................................................................................................210 Authentication Settings, Certificate Details .................................................................................210 Validate Server .............................................................................................................................211 SSID Authenticated ......................................................................................................................211 WPA PSK Configuration .............................................................................................................212 Symbol NETWLAN Screen .........................................................................................................213 Symbol Wireless Information Tab ...............................................................................................214 Symbol Wireless Network Properties...........................................................................................214 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings............................................................................................215 Logon to Certificate Authority .....................................................................................................217 Certificate Services Welcome Screen...........................................................................................217 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................218 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................218 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide xiv Table of Contents Figure 5-68 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................219 Figure 5-69 Import Certificate .........................................................................................................................219 Figure 5-70 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................220 Figure 5-71 Certificate Import Confirmation...................................................................................................220 Figure 5-72 Logon to Certificate Authority .....................................................................................................221 Figure 5-73 Certificate Services Welcome Screen...........................................................................................221 Figure 5-74 Request a Certificate Screen.........................................................................................................222 Figure 5-75 Advanced Certificate Request Screen ..........................................................................................222 Figure 5-76 Advanced Certificate Details........................................................................................................223 Figure 5-77 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................224 Figure 5-78 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................224 Figure 5-79 Certificate Issued..........................................................................................................................224 Figure 5-80 Download Security Warning ........................................................................................................225 Figure 5-81 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................226 Figure 5-82 Import Certificate .........................................................................................................................226 Figure 5-83 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................227 Figure 5-84 Certificate Listing.........................................................................................................................227 Figure 5-85 Private Key Not Present ...............................................................................................................227 Figure 5-86 Browsing to Private Key Location ...............................................................................................228 Figure 5-87 Private Key Present ......................................................................................................................228 Figure 6-1 Administrator Control Panels – Multi-Application ........................................................................230 Figure 6-2 Administrator Control Panels – Single Application .......................................................................231 Figure 6-3 Application Panel – Multi-Application ..........................................................................................234 Figure 6-4 Security Panel – Multi-Application................................................................................................236 Figure 6-5 Status Panel – Multi-Application ...................................................................................................237 Figure 6-6 End-User Multi-Application Touch Panel......................................................................................239 Figure 6-7 Administrator Control Panel...........................................................................................................241 Figure 6-8 Administrator Security Panel .........................................................................................................242 Figure 6-9 Administrator Status Panel .............................................................................................................244 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Chapter 1 Introduction Overview The LXE® MX3X is a rugged, portable, hand-held Microsoft® Windows® CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0 equipped mobile computer capable of wireless data communications. The mobile device can transmit information using a 2.4 GHz wireless device (with an internally mounted antenna) and it can store information for later transmission through an RS-232, InfraRed, or USB port. The device can be scaled from a limited function batch computer to an integrated wireless scanning computer. The mobile device is horizontally oriented and features backlighting for the display. The touchscreen display supports graphic features and Windows icons that the installed Windows operating system supports. The keys on the keypad are constructed of a phosphorescent material that can easily be seen in dimly lighted areas. The MX3-RFID version of the MX3X has an RFID module permanently attached to the back of the device. The module protects the RFID antenna and tag reader. A passive vehicle cradle is available that has been designed specifically for the MX3-RFID device deeper back cover. The MX3P is another version of the MX3X with a deeper back cover. The deeper back cover allows it to use the MX3-RFID passive vehicle mount cradle. The MX3P does not have an integrated laser scanner nor does it have an RFID tag reader. Device-specific cables are available for all versions. The stylus in the Stylus Kit (shipped with each unit) is used to assist in entering data and configuring the unit. Protective film for the touchscreen is available as an accessory. Note: Until the main battery and backup battery are completely depleted, the mobile device is always drawing power from the main and backup batteries (On). Note: A mobile device functioning as a Summit client can run Microsoft Windows CE .NET 4.2 or CE 5.0. Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 is available on a Summit client mobile device only. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 2 Overview Features/Options for the MX3X Family Feature MX3X MX3-RFID MX3P VX3X Operating System - CE .NET 4.2 X X X X Operating System - CE 5.0 X - X X MX3X Main Battery X X X - AC/DC Power Supply X X X X Color and Touch Panel X X X X SE 923 Laser Scanner X X - - SE 955 Laser Scanner X X - X RFID Module Enclosure - X X - RFID Tag Reader - X - - Power/Communication Cradles X - - X Passive Vehicle Cradle - X X X Summit Client Utility X - X X Cisco Client Utility X X - - Symbol Client X - - - RFTerm® X X X X Voice Compatible X - - X Wavelink Avalanche Enabler X - X X ActiveSync specific cables X X X X Hip-Flip Accessory X - - - IP 66 Compliant X - - - IP 65 Compliant - X X - MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Overview 3 Related Manuals MX3X The “MX3X User’s Guide” contains MX3X and MX3P user information and instruction. An abbreviated user’s guide (LXEbook – MX3X User’s Guide) is available for download to the MX3X device from the LXE Manuals CD or the LXE ServicePass website. MX3-RFID The “MX3-RFID User’s Guide” and “MX3-RFID Reference Guide” contain user and technical information and instruction for the MX3-RFID mobile device. Cradle Please refer to the “MX3 Cradle Reference Guide” for technical information relating to the MX3X-compatible Desk Top and Vehicle Mount cradles. Charger Please refer to the “MX3 Multi-Charger Plus User’s Guide” for instruction and technical information relating to charging/analyzing MX3X batteries in a multicharging station. Scanner To set up the integrated SE923 or SE955 scanner barcode parameters with barcodes, please refer to the “Integrated Scanner Programming Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD or the LXE website. The SE923 scanner was replaced with the SE955 scanner in July 2006. Note: The MX3P does not contain an integrated laser scanner nor an RFID tag reader. Note: Always store unused mobile devices with a fully charged main battery installed. LXE recommends an in-use mobile device be frequently connected to an external power source to retain optimum power levels in the main battery and the backup battery. When the backup battery and main battery are dead, the mobile device reverts to it’s default values when a fully charged main battery is installed and the device is powered On again. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 4 Components Components Front and Back Views Figure 1-1 Front 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Endcap Display Scan, Enter or Field Exit (programmable) Beeper On/Off Button 2nd LED Alt LED Ctrl LED 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Shift LED Caps LED Scanner LED Backup Battery LED Status LED Main Battery LED Charger LED Scan or Enter (programmable) Figure 1-2 Back 1 2 3 4 MX3X Reference Guide Endcap Leather Handstrap Connector IR Port (Com 2 Port) Cradle Input Contacts 5 6 7 Main Battery Stylus Back Cover (MX3P only) E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Components 5 Endcap Options Figure 1-3 Endcaps 1 2 DC Power Jack Serial Com 3 or USB Host or Scanner Port 3 4 Serial Com 1 or USB Client Port Audio Jack MX3X / MX3P* MX3-RFID Left Port Right Port Left Port Right Port Serial COM3 Serial COM1 Scanner USB Client Serial COM3 USB Client USB Host Serial COM1 USB Host USB Client Scanner* Serial COM1 Scanner* USB Client * The MX3P does not have an integrated scanner nor an RFID tag reader. See “Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout”, section titled “Endcaps” for further information. MX3-RFID Module 1 Endcap w/Laser Scanner 2 Touchscreen 3 Keypad 4 RFID Module or MX3P Back Cover MX3X MX3-RFID Figure 1-4 Side View E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 6 Components Battery Well Vent Aperture Caution The vent aperture in the battery well should never be blocked with any device other than an approved LXE main battery. The vent aperture functions to relieve any heat or pressure that may build up in the mobile device during everyday use. Figure 1-5 Vent Aperture in Battery Well – Do Not Cover If the vent hole is covered by an object, e.g. a tracking label, other than an approved LXE main battery, the touch screen may be damaged. If damage occurs to the touch screen, please contact your LXE representative for the process to follow when returning the device to LXE for repair. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H When to Use This Guide 7 When to Use This Guide As the reference for LXE’s MX3X / MX3-RFID computer, this guide provides detailed information on its features and functionality. Use this reference guide as you would any other source book – reading portions to learn about the device and it’s capabillities, and then referring to it when you need more information about a particular subject. This guide takes you through all aspects of installation and configuration. Instruction and safety information for the general user are contained in the “MX3X User’s Guide.” This chapter, “Introduction”, describes this reference guide’s structure, contains setup and installation instruction, briefly describes data entry processes, and explains how to get help. Chapter 2 “Physical Description and Layout”, describes the function and layout of the configuration, controls and connectors. Power sources and battery charging stations are included in this chapter. Chapter 3 “System Configuration” takes you through the system setup and file structure. Chapter 4 “Scanner” describes the function, layout and setup for the LXE Wedge. Chapter 5 “Wireless Network Configuration” details 2.4GHz wireless device setup. Configuration for WEP and WPA is included. Chapter 6 “AppLock” is a self-contained chapter covering all aspects of the LXE AppLock program. A mobile device running AppLock becomes a dedicated, single or multiple application device. Appendix A “Key Maps” describes the keypress sequences for the QWERTY keypad. Appendix B “Technical Specifications” lists technical and environmental specifications for the mobile device. Document Conventions ALL CAPS Menu | Choice “Quotes” < > ATTENTION Note: CAUTION All caps are used to represent disk directories, file names, and application names. Rather than use the phrase “choose the Save command from the File menu”, this guide uses the convention “choose File | Save”. Indicates the title of a book, chapter or a section within a chapter (for example, “Document Conventions”). Indicates a key on the keypad (for example,). Indicates a reference to other documentation. Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow. Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow. Also, when marked on product, means to refer to the manual or user’s guide. International fuse replacement symbol. When marked on the product, the label includes fuse ratings in volts (v) and amperes (a) for the product. Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information. Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. WARNING Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. DANGER Keyword that indicates a imminent hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 8 Getting Started Getting Started Important If the mobile device has AppLock installed, please refer to “Chapter 6 – AppLock” for setup and processing information before continuing with “Getting Started.” Note: When your mobile device is pre-configured, the client, PCMCIA card and endcaps are assembled by LXE to your specifications. This section’s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre-configured and requires only accessory installation (e.g. handstrap, stylus) and a power source. LXE recommends that installation or removal of accessories be performed on a clean, well-lit surface. When necessary, protect the work surface, the mobile device, and components from electrostatic discharge. Use this guide as you would any other source book – reading portions to learn about the device, and then referring to it when you need more information about a particular subject. This guide takes you through an introduction to and operation of the MX3X. In general, the sequence of events is: 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert a fully charged battery and press the Power button. Connect an external power source to the unit (if required). If the screen does not automatically display, press the Power button. Adjust screen display, audio volume and other parameters if desired. Troubleshooting Can’t align the screen, change the date/time or adjust the volume. AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device. AppLock restricts access to the control panels. Contact your System Administrator. See Chapter 6 AppLock. Touchscreen is not accepting stylus taps or need recalibration. Press + to force the Start Menu to appear. Use the tab, backtab and cursor keys to move the cursor from element to element. Note: Do not connect a tethered scanner cable to a USB-C or USB-H labeled endcap port. These ports cannot power a tethered scanner. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 9 Insert Main Battery Press the Power button after the battery is inserted into the battery compartment. Note: New batteries must be charged prior to first use. This process takes up to four hours in an LXE Multi-Charger Plus and eight hours with an external power source connected to the power jack on the endcap of the mobile device. Figure 1-6 Battery Contacts and Main Battery The Main Battery compartment is located at the bottom of the back of the computer. The arrows in the figure titled “Battery Contacts” point to the battery contacts in the computer. The figure titled “Main Battery” show the cradle and charger contacts on the back of the main battery. Place the battery in the compartment, making sure the side of the battery with six contacts matches up with the battery contacts in the battery well. Do not slide the battery sideways into the battery well. Firmly press the battery into the well until the Retaining Clip on the battery clicks. The battery is now securely fastened to the computer. The computer draws power from the battery immediately upon successful connection. Note: Do not cover the vent aperture in the battery well (located in the left side of the battery well) with anything other than the main battery. Check Battery Status Tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power icon. Main and backup battery level, status and Power Scheme timeout setting options are displayed. About Lithium-Ion Batteries Li-Ion batteries (like all batteries) gradually lose their capacity over time (in a linear fashion) and never just stop working. This is important to remember – the mobile device is always ‘on’ even when in the Suspend state and draws battery power at all times. Use the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Battery tab to check the battery status and power reading. Always replace the used main battery with a fully charged main battery. The Battery Low Warning LED illuminates red at approximately 35% of power left in the main battery. You need to determine the point at which battery life becomes unacceptable for your business practices and replace the main battery before that point. Refer to the documentation received with the battery charger for complete information. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 10 Getting Started Optional Devices Attach Handstrap (Optional) Note: These instructions are not to be used for the MX3P. See “Accessories” for MX3P holding accessories e.g. holster mounted, shoulder straps, etc. Once installed, the elastic handstrap provides a means for the user to secure the computer to their hand. It is adjustable to fit practically any size hand and does not interfere with battery charging when the MX3X is in a cradle. Figure 1-7 MX3X With Handstrap Installed Tool Required: #1 Phillips Screwdriver Installation 1. Place the MX3X, with the screen facing down, on a flat stable surface. 2. Attach the handstrap to the MX3X with the screws and washers provided. 3. Test the strap’s connection making sure the MX3X is securely connected to each end of the strap connectors. Attach the Stylus Clip (Optional) Carefully remove the paper backing from the Stylus Clip sticky. Firmly press the sticky side of the clip onto the mobile device and hold in place for 15 seconds. Thread the tether through the end of the stylus and tie the ends firmly to the Stylus Clip so that the ends don’t interfere with placing the stylus in the Stylus Clip. Place the stylus in the Stylus Clip when not in use. An extra or replacement stylus can be ordered from LXE. See the section titled “Accessories” for the stylus part number. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 11 Attach to Hip-Flip (Optional) Note: The MX3P does not fit the Hip-Flip accessory. The Hip-Flip is not to be used with the MX3P device. See “Accessories” for MX3P holding accessories e.g. holster mounted, shoulder straps, etc. Figure 1-8 Hip-Flip Accessory Note: #1 flat head screwdriver is not supplied by LXE. A waist belt accessory can be ordered from LXE. Once the MX3X is attached to the hip-flip and the hip-flip securely fastened to the user by a belt around their waist, the MX3X can be operated at a convenient height, leaving the user’s hands free. The hip-flip adjusts downward to allow removing and replacing the main battery without removing the unit from the hip-flip or the user’s body. The MX3X must be removed from the hip-flip before being placed in a docking station. Caution: Never use the MX3X in the hip-flip without first securing the device to the hip-flip with the screws. Installation 1. If the MX3X has a handstrap, remove the handstrap and set it aside along with the handstrap screws and washers. 2. Slide the MX3X into the pocket in the hip-flip, making sure the keypad is up and the endcap ports are visible in the openings at the base of the hip-flip. 3. Place the MX3X (in the hip-flip) on a flat stable surface with the keypad down. 4. Tighten the assembly with the black screws provided, using the holes used for the handstrap (if used) on the back of the MX3X. 5. Test the hip-flip’s connection making sure the MX3X is securely attached. 6. Slide the waist-belt through the loop in the hip-flip and secure the belt around your body. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 12 Getting Started Connect External Power Supply to MX3X or Cradle (Optional) There are three external power supplies available for the mobile device and the MX3 desktop cradle: • US AC/DC 12V Power Supply • Cigarette Lighter Adapter • International AC/DC 12V Power Supply Figure 1-9 US AC/DC 12V Power Supply and Automotive Power Adapter Figure 1-10 International AC/DC 12V Power Supply The DC power jack is located on the endcap. The standard MX3 cradle power jack is located on the back of the cradle (the passive vehicle cradle does not have a power jack). Figure 1-11 Connect External Power Supply 1. Insert the barrel connector into the power jack on the endcap and push in firmly. 2. The CHGR LED above the keypad illuminates when the mobile device is receiving external power through the power jack. Note: When the mobile device is receiving external power through a powered cradle, the cradle’s Status LED and the mobile device’s CHGR LED are illuminated. See section titled “LED Functions” for explanations of the LEDs for the BATT B and BATT M illuminations. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 13 Connect External Power Supply to the MX3P The DC power jack is located on the endcap. The passive cradle does not have a power jack. Figure 1-12 Connect External Power Supply 1. Insert the barrel connector into the power jack on the mobile device endcap and push in firmly. 2. The CHGR LED above the keypad illuminates when the MX3P is receiving external power through the power jack. See section titled “LED Functions” for explanations of the LEDs for the BATT B and BATT M illuminations. MX3P Specific Power Accessories Part Number Description 9000A060CBL12V POWER CABLE, BARE WIRE, 12 FT, 12V, DC JACK 9000A316PS24V72VMX3P PS, 24V-72V, BARE WIRE INPUT, MX3P OUTPUT 24/72 Maximum VDC MX3P Power Supply Input/Output Cable Connection Caution For proper and safe installation, the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle. This fused circuit requires a 5 Amp maximum time delay (slow blow) fuse. If the supply connection is made directly to the battery, the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery positive (+) terminal. Recommended for vehicle electrical systems that use between 2 and 5 twelve volt batteries in series. 1. Power Switch 2. Power On Indicator 3. Output to MX3P 4. Input from Vehicle Battery LXE Part Number: 9000A316PS24V72VMX3P Figure 1-13 Vehicle Power Supply, 24 – 72 Maximum VDC (Fuse Not Shown) E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 14 Getting Started Figure 1-14 Connecting the Power Supply to the MX3P Endcap Power Jack Power Supply Dimensions Length 9.25” Height 2.5” Width 4.7” Mounting hole center Width: 3.5” Mounting hole center Length: 8.75” DIAGRAM IS NOT TO SCALE Figure 1-15 Vehicle Power Supply Footprint 1. If the mobile device is in the cradle, it can be either On or in Suspend Mode during this process. 2. Turn the Power Supply toggle switch to the Off position. 3. While observing the fuse requirements specified above, connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle. When available, always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel, after providing proper fusing. IMPORTANT: For uninterrupted power, electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle. 4. Route the cable the shortest way possible. The input cable from the connection to the battery is rated for a maximum temperature of 60°C (140°F). When routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces which might exceed this temperature. Additionally do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate. Note: If the vehicle is equipped with a panel containing Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR's), avoid routing the power cable in close proximity to these devices. Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with the operator's safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 15 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable. Properly sized "crimp" type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination. Wiring color codes for LXE supplied DC input power cabling: Vehicle Supply Wire Color +24-72 Max VDC (DC +) Brown or White Return (DC -) Blue or Black Vehicle Chassis (GND) Green Figure 1-16 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes Note: The input power cord for the DC-DC Power Supply uses white, black and green wires. Some LXE products have DC input power cords with brown, blue and green wires. The previous table shows the correct electrical connection for either type of cable. 5. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. 6. Connect the Power Supply to the MX3P by plugging the computer end into the Power Jack on the endcap. 7. Turn the Power Supply on. The ON LED on the Power Supply illuminates when it is receiving power from the vehicle. 8. The mobile device CHGR LED illuminates. 12V VDC MX3P Power Cable Connection 9000A060CBL12V POWER CABLE, BARE WIRE, 12 FT, 12V, DC JACK If the mobile device is in the cradle, it can be either On or in Suspend Mode during this process. Connect the two-wire end of the power cable to the 12V power source battery terminals. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals, taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket. Connect the 12V power source to the MX3P by plugging the computer end into the Power Jack on the endcap. The mobile device CHGR LED illuminates. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 16 Getting Started Connect MX3X Audio Jack (Optional) The audio jack is located on the endcap. Figure 1-17 Connect Audio Jack Insert the 2.5mm barrel end of the connector into the audio jack on the endcap and push the connector in firmly. See section titled “Set the Audio Speaker Volume”. Note: The audio option draws power from the battery. Power Button Note: Refer to the section titled “Power Modes” later in this chapter for information relating to the power states of the mobile device. Figure 1-18 Power Button The power button is located above the ESC key on the keypad. When a battery is inserted in the mobile device press the Power button. Quickly tapping the Power button places the device immediately in Suspend mode. Quickly tapping the Power button again, or touching the screen, immediately returns the device from Suspend. When the Windows desktop is displayed or an application begins, the power up (or reboot) sequence is complete. Please refer to the section titled “Power Modes” later in this guide for a list of the kinds of activities (Primary Events) that will return the device from Suspend Mode. Restart Sequence Tap Start | Run, then type warmboot in the textbox and press Enter. If the touchscreen is not accepting taps or needs recalibration, press + to force the Start Menu to appear. When the Windows CE desktop is displayed or an application begins, the power up (or restart) sequence is complete. If you have previously saved your settings, they will be restored on reboot. Any RFID tag data retrieved and not saved is lost during a reboot or reset. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 17 Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus Note: Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the touchscreen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, abrasive or sharp object to write on the touchscreen. Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. Firmly press the stylus into the stylus holder when the stylus is not in use. Like using a mouse to left-click icons on a desktop computer screen, using the stylus to tap icons on the touchscreen is the basic action that can: • • • • • • Open applications Choose menu commands Select options in dialog boxes or drop-down boxes Drag the slider in a scroll bar Select text by dragging the stylus across the text Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data or retrieving data using the integrated barcode scanner or an input/output device connected to the serial port. An extra or replacement stylus can be ordered from LXE. See the section titled “Accessories” for the stylus part number. Keypad Shortcuts Use keyboard shortcuts instead of the stylus: • • • • • E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Press Tab and an Arrow key to select a file. Press Shift and an Arrow key to select several files. Once you’ve selected a file, press Alt then press Enter to open its Properties dialog. Press 2nd then press numeric dot to delete a file. To force the Start menu to display, press Ctrl then press Esc. MX3X Reference Guide 18 Getting Started Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key The appearance of taskbar icons are different on various mobile device platforms and may differ from the example shown below. This example is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus. If RFTerm® and Microsoft® Word® were the two applications locked, and the user tapped the taskbar icon to place the popup menu on screen, a switching menu showing both application icons is displayed on the screen. Figure 1-19 End-User Multi Applock Touch Panel Touch Tap the taskbar icon to place the popup menu on screen. Tap one of the application icons in the popup menu. The selected application is brought to the foreground while the other application continues to run in the background. Stylus taps affect the application running in the foreground only. Alternatively you can use the Tab, BackTab and/or cursor keys to move the on-screen cursor. Then press the Enter key to activate the highlighted choice. Hotkey If the mobile device uses LXE’s Multi AppLock to allow the user to switch between two applications, the default Activation key is Ctrl+Spc. The key sequence switches the focus between one application and another. Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only. Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching applications. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 19 Touchscreen Calibration If the touchscreen is not responding properly to pen touch taps, you may need to recalibrate the touchscreen. Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target. If you miss the center, keep the stylus on the screen, slide it over the target’s center, and then lift the stylus. If the touchscreen is not accepting taps or needs recalibration, press + to force the Start Menu to appear. To recalibrate the screen, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus | Calibration tab. To begin, tap the Recalibrate button on the screen with the stylus. Figure 1-20 Touchscreen Recalibration Follow the instructions on the screen and press the Enter key to save the new calibration settings or press Esc to cancel or quit. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 20 Getting Started Set The Display Contrast Adjusting screen contrast lightens or darkens the characters to make them visible at a comfortable level. The contrast is incremented or decremented one step each time the contrast key is pressed. To adjust screen contrast, locate the key at the top of the keypad. Adjust the display contrast by pressing the: • 2nd key then the key • Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust contrast until the display lightens or darkens to your satisfaction. • Press the Enter key to exit this mode. The LED for the 2nd key blinks until the special editing mode (set contrast) is complete. Set the Display Backlight Timer Note: Refer to the section titled “Power Modes” later in this guide for information relating to the power states of the mobile device. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display | Backlight tab. Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes. The first option affects the mobile device when it is running on battery power only. The second option affects the device when it is running on external power (e.g. AC adapter, cigarette adapter, powered cradle). The default value for the battery power timer is 3 seconds. The default value for the external power timer is 2 minutes. The backlight will remain on all the time when both checkboxes are blank. The transmissive color display backlight timer dims the backlight at the end of the specified time. The transflective monochrome display backlight timer turns the backlight off at the end of the specified time. Set The Display Brightness The brightness adjustment feature depends on the display type, color versus monochrome. Adjusting screen brightness lightens or darkens the background to make characters visible at a comfortable level. The brightness on a color display is incremented or decremented one step each time the arrow key is pressed until either the maximum or minimum brightness is achieved (8 steps). The brightness setting is recalled at power up. Color – To adjust color screen brightness, locate the key at the top of the keypad. Adjust the display brightness by pressing the: • 2nd key then the key • Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust brightness until the display lightens or darkens to your satisfaction. • Press the Enter key to exit this mode. Monochrome – MX3X only. The 2nd key + F10 key sequence toggles the backlight from it’s brightest (On) to it’s dimmest (Off) readable settings. The LED for the 2nd key blinks until the special editing mode (set display brightness) is complete. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Started 21 Set the Power Schemes Timers Note: Refer to the section titled “Power Modes” later in this guide for information relating to the power states of the mobile device. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Schemes tab. Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes. Battery Power Scheme Use this option when the device will be running on battery power only. Switch state to User Idle: Default is After 3 seconds Switch state to System Idle: Default is After 15 seconds Switch state to Suspend: Default is After 5 minutes AC Power Scheme Use this option when the device will be running on external power (e.g. AC adapter, cigarette adapter, powered cradle). Switch state to User Idle: Default is After 2 minute Switch state to System Idle: Default is After 2 minutes Switch state to Suspend: Default is After 5 minutes These mode timers are cumulative. The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired. When the User Idle timer is set to “Never”, the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle, System Idle or Suspend modes (even when the device is idle). Because of the cumulative effect, and using the Battery Power Scheme Defaults listed above: • The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity, • The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity (15sec + 3sec), • And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 22 Getting Started Set The Audio Speaker Volume Note: An application may override the control of the speaker volume. Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life. The speaker is located on the front of the device above the Power button. The audio volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the user. The volume is increased or decreased one step each time the volume key is pressed. The device has an internal speaker and a jack for an external headset. Operational “beeps” are emitted from the speaker. Using the Keypad Note: Volume & Sounds (in Control Panel) must be enabled before the following key sequences will adjust the volume. To adjust speaker volume, locate the key at the top of the keypad. Adjust the speaker volume by pressing the: • 2nd key then the key to enter Volume change mode. • Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust volume until the speaker volume is satisfactory. • Press the Enter key to exit this mode. The LED for the 2nd key blinks until the special editing mode (set audio speaker volume) is complete. Using the Touchscreen Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Volume & Sounds | Volume tab. Change the volume setting and tap OK to save the change. You can also select / deselect sounds for key clicks and screen taps and whether each is loud or soft. As the volume scrollbar is moved between Loud and Soft, the computer will emit a tone each time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Setup the Client and Network 23 Setup the Client and Network Prerequisites • Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point • WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys See “Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration” for complete information. Access the Terminal Emulation Parameters Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know: • the alias name or IP address (Host Address) and • the port number (Telnet Port) of the host system to properly set up your host session. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional. If you are connecting over wireless LAN (802.11B), make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point. From the Start | Programs, run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop. Select Session | Configure from the application menu and select the “host type” that you require. This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to; i.e. 3270 mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host. Enter the “Host Address” of the host system that you wish to connect to. This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system. Update the telnet port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port. If not, just use the default telnet port. Select OK Select Session | Connect from the application menu or tap the “Connect” button on the Command Bar. Upon a successful connection, you should see the host application screen displayed. To change options such as Display, Colors, Cursor, Barcode, etc., please refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 24 Installing PCMCIA and CF Cards Installing PCMCIA and CF Cards Figure 1-21 PCMCIA and CF Card Location There is one PC card slot (Slot 0) and one Compact Flash card slot (Slot 1) located under the endcap. Slot 0 powers a wireless client PC card, PC SRAM card, ATA Flash card or a linear Flash card. The slots hold only one card at a time. Slot 0 supplies .75 of an amp at 5V or 3.3V. The second slot (Slot 1) is designed to support a Type I or II Compact Flash disk. See “Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout”, section titled “PCMCIA Cards” for further information. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Installing PCMCIA and CF Cards 25 Installing / Removing Cards Preparation Requirement: A screwdriver (not supplied by LXE) • LXE recommends that installation or removal of the card be performed on a clean, well-lit surface. • Using a screwdriver, remove or loosen the screws on the endcap. • Carefully slide the endcap to the side, taking care not to dislodge or disconnect any cables. • Remove or loosen all cables to the card(s) to be removed/replaced. If a wireless device PC card, disconnect the radio antenna from the PC card. Installation 1. Slide the card, connector side first, into the slot until it seats. Use caution not to pull or snag the antenna connector. 2. If the card is difficult to seat in the slot, remove the card, turn it around and re-install. • The antenna connector must be positioned up and toward the front of the device (near the display). • Gently snap the antenna cables into the connectors on the wireless client card. Use caution not to damage either the antenna cable connectors or the connectors on the wireless client card. Connect all antenna cables to the PCMCIA wireless client card. 3. Replace the endcap, making sure all connections are secure and ribbons/antennas are not crimped between the endcap and the body of the mobile device. 1. Grasp the top of the card and pull it straight upward to remove. 2. Use caution not to pull or snag the antenna connector on the wireless client card, if installed. Removal If you anticipate keeping the PCMCIA or CF card out of the mobile device for a long period of time place it in an enclosed electrostatic-protected storage container. Store in an area that is protected from dirt, moisture, and electrostatic contact. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 26 Enter Data Enter Data You can enter data into the mobile device through several different methods. The Scanner window accepts barcode data entry, the RS-232 and the IR port are used to input/output data, and the keypad and stylus provide manual entry. Keypad Entry The keypad is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise. Almost any function that a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the mobile device’s keypad but it may take a few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task. Almost every key has two or three different functions. The primary alpha or numeric character is printed on the key. For example, when the 2nd key is pressed, the 2nd key LED illuminates. By then pressing the desired second-function key the device will then produce the 2nd character. The specific 2nd character is printed above the corresponding key. The 2nd key LED turns off when key sequence finishes (unless when setting volume or contrast – the 2nd key LED will flash at those times). Please refer to “Appendix A – Key Maps” for instruction on the specific keypresses to access all keypad functions. Stylus Entry The stylus performs the same function as a mouse that is used to point to and click elements on a desktop computer. The stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse – single tap or double tap to select menu options, drag the stylus across text to select, hold the stylus down to activate slider bars, etcetera. Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use an actual pen, pencil or sharp or abrasive object to write on the touchscreen. Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. The touchscreen responds to an actuation force (touch) of 4 oz. (or greater) of pressure. The stylus can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input/output device connected to one of the serial ports. • Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed. • The cursor begins to flash in the field. • The unit is ready to accept data from either the keyboard, integrated scanner or a scanner connected to the serial port, if the scanner applet is configured correctly. Input Panel The Input Panel icon looks like a keyboard and is shown in the System tray. To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel icon. Use the input panel to enter information in any program. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Enter Data 27 Integrated Laser Scanner Data Entry Read all cautions, warnings and labels before using the laser scanner. To scan with the integrated laser barcode reader, point the laser window towards a barcode and press the Scan button. You will see a red laser beam strike the barcode. The laser scanner has an SE923 scan engine. Correct Scan Incorrect Scan Incorrect Scan Figure 1-22 Scan Beam Align the red beam so that the barcode is centered within the beam. The laser beam must cross the entire barcode. Move the mobile device towards or away from the barcode so that the barcode takes up approximately two-thirds the width of the beam. Figure 1-23 Scanner LED Location The SCNR LED turns red when the laser beam is on. Following a barcode scan and read the SCNR LED turns green and the mobile device beeps, indicating a successful scan. The laser and SCNR LED automatically turn off after a successful or unsuccessful read. The scanner is ready to scan again when the Scan key is pressed. Large barcodes can be scanned at the maximum distance. Hold the scanner closer to small barcodes (or with bars that are very close together). When the scan is successful, the Scan LED turns green, then switches off, and the mobile device emits a distinctive audible tone. When the scan is unsuccessful, the SCNR LED remains red until the 3 second timeout (default) occurs or the Scan key is released. The mobile device emits distinctive audible tones. Check the following: • Check the barcode for marks or physical damage e.g. ripped label, missing section, etc. • Try scanning test symbols of the same code type at different distances and angles. • Is the scan aperture unscratched and unsoiled? See the “Integrated Scanner Programming Guide” for barcode samples, default scanning ranges, barcode reading instruction and troubleshooting. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 28 Enter Data Using a Headset and Voice for Data Entry Connecting the Audio Cable and a Headset Note: The audio option draws power from the main battery. The Headset and Voice option is not available for an MX3-RFID configuration. The speaker is disabled when a headset is plugged into the audio jack The headset consists of an earpiece, a microphone and an attached cable. The headset attaches to an audio cable which attaches to the MX3X. The audio jack is located on the MX3X endcap. 9000A076CBLHEADSET1 Figure 1-24 Audio Cable and Headset Insert the 2.5mm barrel end of the connector into the audio jack on the endcap and push the connector in firmly. Align the audio cable quick disconnect end and the headset quick connect cable end. Firmly push the cable ends together until they click and lock in place. Adjust Microphone and Secure the Cable Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone. The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth. Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth. Note the small “Talk” label near the mouthpiece. Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth. The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing. Under Clothing • Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar. • Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head. Over Clothing • Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body. • Tuck the cable under the belt, but leave a small loop where it goes under the belt. • Do not wear the cable on the front of your body. It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Enter Data 29 Entering Data Data is entered into the mobile device by speaking into the headset’s microphone when prompted. Please contact your System Administrator if assistance is needed with the voice software installed on the mobile device. Tethered Scanner Do not connect a tethered scanner cable to a USB-C or USB-H labeled endcap port. The USB ports cannot power a tethered scanner. Tethered scanners connect to RS232-labeled ports on the endcap and, for the MX3X only, can connect to the RS232 port on a powered cradle. The Scan buttons have no effect on tethered barcode scanners (connected to the RS232 labelled serial port). Tethered scanners read barcode scans only when the trigger on the tethered scanner is pressed. The tethered scanner requires power on pin 9 of the RS232 serial port. To set the mobile device to use a tethered scanner, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM1 (or 2 or 3). Tap the “Power on Pin 9 (+5V)” checkbox for the COM port selected. The COM port that accepts the scanner data can be configured for data rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. See Also: Section titled “Tethered Scanner and Cradles” when using a tethered scanner with a cradle. MX3P and the MX3 Cradles The MX3P does not fit in the standard MX3 powered cradles. There is a passive vehicle cradle available for the MX3P that secures the device to the cradle only. See section titled “Accessories”. Main battery charging and host communication is not available directly through the passive vehicle cradle. The passive vehicle cradle does not have LEDs or indicators. It does not accept DC power connection. The MX3P can be directly connected to external power through the power jack located on the mobile device’s endcap. Host communication is available wirelessly while the mobile device is secured in the passive vehicle cradle. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 30 ActiveSync ActiveSync Introduction Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect (on a desktop computer), ActiveSync will synchronize using the wireless link, serial port, USB or the infrared port on the mobile device. Note: ActiveSync does not transmit through the IR port in MX3 vehicle cradles. It will through the IR port of specific MX3X desktop cradles. Please refer to section titled “Accessories” for the part identified as the Desktop Cradle for the MX3X. Requirement: ActiveSync version 3.7 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop) computer. ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website. Follow their instructions to locate, download and install ActiveSync on your desktop computer. Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.7 or higher, you can synchronize information on your desktop computer with the mobile device and vice versa. Synchronization compares the data on your mobile device with your desktop computer and updates both with the most recent data. For example, you can: • Back up and restore your device data. • Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your device and desktop computer. • Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize command. By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize. The synchronization process makes the data (in the information types you select) identical on both your desktop computer and your device. When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your desktop computer, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins and starts the following processes: • connect your device to your desktop computer, • set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your device and your desktop computer, and • customize your synchronization settings. Because ActiveSync is already installed on your device, your first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your desktop computer in the ActiveSync wizard. For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then open ActiveSync Help. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H ActiveSync 31 Initial Setup The following instructions relate to the initial setup of ActiveSync. When there is a Connect icon on the desktop, this section can be bypassed. The partnerships can only be created using direct serial or USB cable connection. After the partnerships are established, ActiveSync communication can be initiated using serial, USB, IrDa and wireless device. See section titled “Connect and Communicate” for cable/port compatibility. Serial Connection Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection. Tap the Change button. From the popup list, choose Serial 1 @ 57600 Note: The default is 57600 baud. This will set up the mobile device to use COM 1. If the device has a dual-serial port endcap, the Serial 3 @ 57600 can also be selected. Tap OK and ensure the check box for “Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached” is checked. Tap OK to return to the Control Panel. Select Scanner and ensure the integrated scanner is set to a port that is NOT the same as the ActiveSync port. USB Connection Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection. Tap the Change button. From the popup list, choose USB “Client” This will set up the mobile device to use the USB port. Tap OK and ensure the check box for “Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached” is checked. Tap OK to return to the Control Panel. IMPORTANT – DO NOT PUT THE MOBILE DEVICE INTO SUSPEND WHILE CONNECTED VIA USB. The device will be unable to connect to the host PC when it resumes operation. The MX3P requires USB connection for ActiveSync. There is no ActiveSync connection through the passive cradle. Cable connection occurs only on the endcap. Network Note: You must establish a partnership with a desktop computer prior to running ActiveSync on the mobile device. The initial partnership must be done using direct serial / USB cable connection. Once the relationship is established using the serial port, the ActiveSync link in the Start Menu gives a choice of connections, one of which is Network. Select Start | Settings | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync. From the popup list, choose Network and then tap the Connect button. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 32 ActiveSync IrDA Connection Note: The ActiveSync connection does true IrDA, not serial over IR, or TCP/IP (Winsock) over IR, like many infrared connections. Therefore, it is important to use a PC infrared interface which supports the handshaking needed for ActiveSync. This, unfortunately, precludes using many brands of laptops, which only use a simple infrared interface, even though they may call it IrDA. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection. Tap the Change button. From the popup list, choose IR @ 115200 This will set up the mobile device to use the Infrared port. Tap OK and ensure the check box for “Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached” is checked. Tap OK to return to the Control Panel. Select Scanner and ensure the integrated scanner is set to a port that is NOT the same as the ActiveSync port. Synchronizing from the Mobile Device To synchronize using a wireless LAN card, you must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. To initiate synchronization from your device, tap Start | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync to begin the process. Tap Sync to connect and synchronize. View synchronization status. Tap Tools to synchronize or change synchronization settings. View connection status. Tap Stop to stop synchronization. Tap Start | Help for context-sensitive help. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H ActiveSync 33 Connect and Communicate Connect the correct** cable to the PC (the host) and the mobile device (the client). Select “Connect” from the Start Menu on the client (Start | Programs | Communications | Connect). Note: Run “Connect” when the “Get Connected” wizard on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time. Note: USB will start automatically when the USB cable is connected, not requiring you to select “Connect” from the start menu. ** Cables for initial ActiveSync Configuration: USB Client to PC/Laptop USB-Client cable MX3XA069CBLD9USBCLNT Serial Client to PC/Laptop RS-232 9 Pin to 9 Pin 9000A054CBL6D9D9 Explore From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC, tap the Explore button, which allows you to explore the mobile device from the PC side, with some limitations. You can copy files to or from the mobile device by drag-and-drop. You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the \Windows folder on the mobile device. (Technically, the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Windows image. This, however, includes most of the files in the \Windows folder). Copy the MX3X LXEbook to the MX3X (Optional) Note: The LXEbook user guides do not contain the illustrations and regulatory information contained in the full user guides on the LXE Manuals CD and on the LXE ServicePass website. See the full format User Guide”MX3X User’s Guide” on LXE Manuals CD. Mobile Device Required Adobe Acrobat Reader Version MX3X Windows PDF Viewer (pre-installed by LXE). First, using your desktop computer download “LXEbook – MX3X Users Guide” from the LXE Manuals CD to your desktop computer. Next, connect the mobile device to your desktop computer and run ActiveSync. When the mobile device and the desktop ActiveSync applications are synchronized, click Explore on the ActiveSync menu on your desktop to display the contents of the mobile device folders. Then, open the folder on your desktop computer containing the downloaded LXEbook User’s Guide. Click and drag the LXEbook User Guide to the My Documents folder on the mobile device. When the file copy process is finished, disconnect the mobile device from the synchronization equipment and close ActiveSync. To view the LXEbook on the mobile device, select Start / Programs / Adobe Reader / File / Open. Locate the LXEbook on the mobile device and “open” the file. See Also: “Install LXEbooks” on the LXE Manuals CD. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 34 ActiveSync Backup Data Files using ActiveSync Use the following information to backup data files from the mobile device to a desktop or laptop PC using the appropriate cables and Microsoft’s ActiveSync. Prerequisites A partnership between the mobile device and ActiveSync has been established. See section “ActiveSync – Initial Setup”. Serial Port Transfer • A desktop or laptop PC with an available serial port and a mobile device with a serial port. The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows NT or greater. • Null modem cable with all control lines connected. LXE recommends using the null modem cable part number listed in “Accessories”. Infrared Port Transfer • A desktop or laptop PC with an infrared port and a mobile device with an infrared port. The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2 or greater. USB Transfer • A desktop or laptop PC with an available USB port and a mobile device with a USB port. The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2 or greater. • Use the LXE-specific USB cable as listed in “Accessories”. Connect Connect the modem cable to the PC (the host) and the mobile device (the client). Select “Connect” from the Start Menu on the mobile device (Start | Programs | Communications | Connect). Note: Run “Connect” when the “Get Connected” wizard on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time. Note: USB synchronization will start automatically when the cable is connected, not requiring you to select “Connect” from the Start menu. Disconnect Serial Connection • Disconnect the cable from the mobile device. • Put the mobile device into suspend by tapping the red Suspend button. • Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then tap the Disconnect button. IRDA Connection • Move the mobile device so the infrared beam is broken. • Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then tap the Disconnect button. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H ActiveSync 35 USB Connection • Disconnect the cable from the mobile device. • Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then tap the Disconnect button. IMPORTANT – Do not put the mobile device into suspend while connected via USB. The device will be unable to connect to the host PC when it resumes operation. Network Connection • Put the mobile device into suspend by tapping the red Suspend button. • Tap the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then tap the Disconnect button. Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a client and a host computer. A partnership is defined by two objects – a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created. An ActiveSync partnership between a unique client can be established to two hosts. When the mobile device is cold booted, the random number is deleted – and the partnership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted. The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partnership with it. Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name. (Control Panel | System | Device Name) If the cold booted mobile device tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC, a new random number is generated for the mobile device and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the mobile device be changed. If the mobile device is associated with a second host, changing the name will destroy that partnership as well. This can cause some confusion when re-establishing partnerships with hosts. ActiveSync with a Cradle To ActiveSync, the cradle must be powered off, the ActiveSync cradle cable attached to the desktop PC and the cradle, then the cradle connected to external AC/DC power. Note: ActiveSync transfers files to the MX3X (only) over the RS-232 connector on the cradle using the MX3X070CBLD9RS232AS cable. Figure 1-25 ActiveSync Cable Connected to Serial port on Cradle E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 36 ActiveSync Troubleshooting ActiveSync ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect, but it cannot identify it One or more control lines are not connected. This is usually a cable problem, but on a laptop or other device, it may indicate a bad serial port. If the MX3X is already in a powered docking cradle cabled to a PC, remove and reinsert the MX3X into the powered cradle. If the MX3X is connected to a PC by a cable, disconnect the cable from the MX3X and reconnect it again. Check that the correct connection is selected (Serial or USB “Client” if this is the initial ActiveSync installation). See Also: “Cold Boot and Loss of Host Reconnection”. ActiveSync indicator on the host (disc in the toolbar tray) turns green and spins as soon as you connect the cable, before tapping the Connect icon (or REPLLOG.EXE in the Windows directory). One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly. This is usually a cable problem, but on a laptop or other device, it may indicate a bad serial port. ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins, but connection never occurs Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host. Check that the correct connection is selected (Serial or USB “Client” if this is the initial ActiveSync installation). -orIncorrect or broken data lines in cable. ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray The host doesn’t know you are trying to connect. May mean a bad cable, with no control lines connected, or an incompatible baud rate. Try the connection again, with a known good cable. Testing connection with a terminal emulator program, or a serial port monitor You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of ActiveSync. Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bits, and the same baud rate as the connection on the CE device. After double-tapping REPLLOG.EXE on the CE device, the word “CLIENT” appears on the display in ASCII format. When using a serial port monitor, you see the host echo “CLIENT”, followed by “SERVER”. After this point, the data stream becomes straight (binary) PPP. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Docking Cradles 37 Docking Cradles Note: The “MX3 Cradle Reference Guide” contains cradle installation and technical information. There are two types of cradles for the MX3X: a desktop cradle for table top charging/communication applications and a vehicle mount cradle for vehicle mounted charging/communication applications. The powered cradles give the MX3X the ability to communicate with a host computer and other equipment. In addition, using wall AC adapters or DC/DC converters, the cradle transfers power to the internal charging circuitry of the MX3X and, in turn, the operating system recharges the main battery. The MX3X can be either on or in Suspend mode while in the cradle. The MX3X can be inserted and removed from the cradle with one hand. Cables are available from LXE for connecting the cradle to a printer, a personal computer or a barcode printer. Tethered scanners (for RS-232 cradle connection) are also available from LXE. A passive vehicle cradle is available for the MX3-RFID and MX3P devices. Power and communication is cabled through the endcaps, only, for these devices. Status LED An LED indicator on the front of the standard MX3 cradle shows the status of the cradle. When the indicator is not illuminated, there is no power applied to the cradle. Cradle Power Amber External power applied to the cradle. Docked Green Power applied to the cradle and charging connection made with the MX3X. IR Active Red IR communication is active. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 38 Docking Cradles Desktop Cradle Note: LXE recommends the correct Desktop Cradle always be used to store / charge / communicate with the MX3X. The MX3X Desktop Cradle label is located on the bottom of the device. The MX3X Desktop cradle Product Number is MX3RA002DESKCRADLE. Lower the mobile device straight into the cradle, tilt it forward and then let it rest backward in the cradle. Ensure that the mobile device is properly seated on the charging contacts. The CHGR LED will illuminate green when the MX3X is correctly seated in the cradle. The CHGR LED will illuminate red when the MX3X main battery is being charged (in a cradle connected to an external power source). To remove the MX3X, tilt the MX3X forward and lift it straight up out of the cradle. Note: Do not “slam” or slide the mobile device sideways into the cradle. Damage may result. The MX3-RFID and MX3P devices do not fit in the MX3 desktop cradle. Connectors The Power connector is located on the back of the cradle in the top left hand corner. The cradle can be powered, if required, by an LXE US AC Adapter or an LXE International AC Adapter. When powered, the cradle transfers power to the internal charging circuitry of the MX3X allowing it to recharge the main battery. A powered cradle supports RS-232 and IR communications. The RS-232 connector is located in the back center of the cradle. When the MX3X is properly docked, the bi-directional half-duplex transceivers in the MX3X and cradle are aligned through their IR windows. The half-duplex IR signals from the MX3X are converted to RS-232 signals in the cradle and available at this connector. Vehicle Mount Cradle This cradle is specifically designed for vehicle mount applications. The cradle restrains the MX3X and isolates the mobile device from shock and vibration. The MX3X is inserted into the cradle by placing the base of the unit in the pocket and then firmly pressing the unit backwards until the release mechanisms latch and hold the unit in the cradle. The MX3X is removed from the cradle by pressing the release mechanisms and pulling the MX3X up and away from the cradle. Connectors The Power connector is located on the back of the cradle below and to the left of the RS232 port. The cradle is powered by either a vehicle’s 12V battery or from an approved accessory for vehicles with higher voltage (24 to 60 VDC) batteries. When powered, the cradle transfers external power to the MX3X, which in turn, recharges the main battery. A powered cradle allows RS-232 and IR communication. The RS-232 connector is located on the back of the cradle below and to the right of the power connector. When the MX3X is properly docked, the bi-directional half-duplex transceivers in the MX3X and cradle are aligned through their IR windows. The half-duplex IR signals from the MX3X are converted to RS-232 signals in the cradle and available at this connector. Note: ActiveSync will transfer files over the RS-232 connector on the vehicle cradle. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Docking Cradles 39 ActiveSync with a Cradle To ActiveSync, the cradle must be powered off, the ActiveSync cradle cable attached to the desktop PC and the cradle, then the cradle powered up. Note: ActiveSync transfers files to the MX3X over the RS-232 connector on the cradle using the MX3X070CBLD9RS232AS cable. Note: The MX3-RFID and the MX3P use a passive, non-powered cradle (refer to “The Passive Vehicle Cradle”). ActiveSync connects only through the endcap on these devices. Tethered Scanner and a Cradle To use a tethered scanner connected to the RS-232 port on the cradle, the cradle must be powered off, the ActiveSync cable removed and the cradle powered up. Then, the scanner can be attached to the cradle’s serial port. The Passive Vehicle Cradle The MX3P cannot fit in standard MX3 charging cradles. There is a passive vehicle cradle available (as well as a RAM bracket installation kit) for the MX3P that secures the mobile device to the cradle. See “Accessories”. Mobile device main battery charging and RF communication is not available in the passive vehicle cradle unless the mobile device is receiving external power through the power jack in the endcap. The passive vehicle cradle does not have LEDs or indicators. The passive vehicle cradle does not require an external power source. The mobile device in the passive cradle requires a power source, either from the main battery or from power applied via the power jack on the endcap. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 40 Getting Help Getting Help All LXE user guides are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed/downloaded from the LXE ServicePass website. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD. You can also check the LXE ServicePass website for the latest manual releases. You can get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD, in the file titled “Contacting LXE”. This information is also available on the LXE ServicePass website. Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this guide are located in the file titled “LXE Technical Glossary” on the LXE Manuals CD. Manuals MX3X User’s Guide LXEbook – MX3X User’s Guide (download to MX3X) MX3 Cradle Reference Guide MX3 Multi-Charger Plus User’s Guide CE API Programming Guide RFTerm Reference Guide Integrated Scanner Reference Guide Accessories Note: Items with a Green letter R in the first column are ROHS-compliant. Please contact your LXE representative when ordering ROHS-compliant items as the part number may have changed. Items without the letter R may have received ROHS-compliance after this guide was published. R 1 Cable, USB Host D9F to USB, 6’ (Endcap only) MX3XA069CBL09USBCLNT R 2 Cable, D9F to D9F for ActiveSync only, 6’ (Cradle use only) MX3XA070CBLD9RS232AS / Cradle MX3RA002DESKCRADLE R 3 Cable, USB Client D9F to USB, 6’ (Endcap only) MX3XA071CBLD9USBTYPB R Cable, 12 in., D9F / USB Type A Receptacle MX3XA068CBLD9USBHOST MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Getting Help R R R R R R R R R R R R R * R R R R R R R R R R R R R * R R R R R R R R Tethered Scanners Scanner, Powerscan SR, 8’ Cbl, WW Scanner, Powerscan SR, 12’ Cbl, US Scanner, Powerscan LR, 8’ Cbl, WW Scanner, Powerscan LR, 12’ Cbl, US Scanner, Powerscan XLR, 8’ Cbl, WW Scanner, Powerscan XLR, 12’ Cbl, US Scanner, LS3408ER, 9’ Cbl, US See Note Scanner, LS3408FZ, Fuzzy Logic, 9’ Cbl, US See Note Holding Accessories Strap, Hand, Nylon MX3X Nylon Holster for use with Belt MX3X Nylon Hip Flip Adjustable Belt for Hip Flip – Velcro ends Belt Strap with plastic scanner clip MX3-RFID Nylon Case with Shoulder Strap 1 MX3X Nylon Case with Shoulder Strap Scanner Clip Strap (85XX scanners only) Bracket, Mounting LS300 Scanner, Tethered Holster, Hood, Nylon, 5300IP Series Scanner, Tethered *** Voice Recognition and Headsets *** MX3X Voice Case optional shoulder strap MX3X Nylon Case, Voice Recognition w/Belt MX3X to Headset adapter cable, 2.5mm Single ear and headband, headset with microphone, 5 windscreens Single ear, dual headband, headset with microphone, 5 windscreens Dual ear, behind head, headset with microphone, 5 windscreens Replacement foam block for dual headband Replacement head yoke for dual headband Replacement head yoke for single headband Replacement windscreen for all microphones, 10 pack Replacement windscreen for all microphones, 50 pack Replacement foam ear piece cover for single/dual headsets, 10 pack Replacement foam ear piece cover for single/dual headsets, 50 pack *** Contact your LXE representative for availability. *** Miscellaneous Stylus Kit includes stick-on clip, stylus and tether, 5 pack MX3X SDK, CD (Windows CE .NET 4.2 only) Windows CE 5.0 Pro SDK with English Font Cover Plate, RS-232 Port, MX3/MX3-CE Touchscreen Protective Film, Monochrome Display Touchscreen Protective Film, Color Display Battery Chargers and Battery Battery Charger/Analyzer, US V1.01 Battery Charger/Analyzer, WW Battery, Replacement, RFID Device 1 41 8300A326SCNRPWRSR8DA9F 8300A327SCNRPWRSR12DA9F 8310A326SCNRPWRLR8DA9F 8310A327SCNRPWRLR12DA9F 8320A326SCNRPWRXLR8DA9F 8320A327SCNRPWRXLR12DA9F 8520A326SCNRERDA9F 8510A326SCNRFZYDA9F MX3RA497HANDSTRAP MX3RA401HOLSTER 9000A408HIPFLIP 9200L67 9200L57 MX3XA411RFIDCASE 9000A409CASE 9000A411SCNRSTRAP 8010A001BRKT 8100A401HLSTRHOOD 9000A410SHOULDERSTRP MX3XA410VOICECASE 9000A076CBLHEADSET1 HX1A501SNGBHEADSET HX1A502DUALBHEADSET HX1A503BTHHEADSET HX1A504AHSBLOCKFOAM HX1A505DUALYOKE HX1A506SINGLEYOKE HX1A508WINDSCREEN10 HX1A509WINDSCREEN50 HX1A510FOAMEAR10 HX1A511FOAMEAR50 9000A507STYLUS MX3XA504CENET42SDK Call LXE MX3RA351RS232CVR MX3XA502PROTFILMMONO MX3XA503PROTFILMCOLR 9000A377CHGR5US 9000A377CHGR5WW MX3A380RFIDBATT Accessories designed specifically for the MX3-RFID device are compatible with the MX3P device. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 42 Getting Help R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Battery, Li-Ion Cradles and Power Supplies MX3-RFID \ MX3P Passive Mounting Cradle MX3-RFID \ MX3P RAM Mounting Kit for Passive Cradle MX3X Desktop Cradle 2 MX3X Vehicle Mount Cradle 2 MX3X Vehicle Mount Cradle, 19.2K baud rate Power Supply, Vehicle Cradle, 9-30VDC Power Supply, Vehicle Cradle, 30-80VDC AC Power Supply, External, US AC Power Supply, External, AC, International Power Cord, AC, US P/S, External, Cigarette Lighter Adapter Power Adapter, Bare Wire 12 VDC Power Adapter, 24-72 VDC, Bare Wire (Vehicle) Power Adapter, 110-240 VAC MX3P Power Cable, Bare Wire, 12 Ft, 12V, DC Jack MX3P Power Supply, Bare Wire input, MX3P output Cables for Cradle and Endcap Serial Ports Cable, Null Modem, PC, D9F to D9F, 6’ Cable, Null Modem, Printer/PC, D9F to D25F, 6’ Cable, USB D9F to USB Type A Receptacle Cable, USB D9F to USB Type A Plug Cable, USB D9F to USB Type B Plug Cable, D9F to D9F for ActiveSync only, 6’ See Note MX3XA001RFIDCRADLE 9000A019RAMKIT MX3RA002DESKCRADLE MX3RA003VMCRADLE 9000A005VMCRADLE19KB 2381A054CRDLDCPWR30V 2381A055CRDLDCPWR80V 9000A301PSACUS 9000A302PSACWW 9000A066CBLPWRAC 9000A303PSCIGLTADPT 9000A079CBL12ML3 9000A316PS24V72VMX13 1300A303PSACWW 9000A060CBL12V 9000A316PS24V72VMX3P 9000A054CBL6D9D9 9000A053CBL6D9D25 MX3XA068CBLD9USBHOST MX3XA069CBLD9USBCLNT MX3XA071CBLD9USBTYPEB MX3XA070CBLD9RS232AS Note: The MX3X Desktop Cradle supports MX3XA070CBLD9RS232AS cable. Note: When using the 8500 Series tethered scanners (LS3408), the tethered scanner Power Mode must be set to “Reduced Power Mode” to conserve the device’s main battery life. The reduced power mode setting will not impact performance of the 8500 series scanner. The default mode is “Continuous On”. Please refer to the tethered scanner manufacturer’s user guide for instruction. Note: There may be different SDK kits for Windows CE .NET 4.2 and CE 5.0. Contact your LXE representative to order an LXE SDK CD. 2 RS-232 MX3A378BATT ActiveSync communication via the Power Adapter Required. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Hardware Configuration The MX3X and MX3P hardware configuration is shown in the following figure. Figure 2-1 Hardware Central Processing Unit The CPU is an Intel Xscale PXA255 running at 400 MHz. System Memory A CF Card FLASH is used for ROM, Flash for Windows operating system and Flash memory for bundled applications. The Flash is configured as the primary boot device and contains the Windows operating system image, boot loader, OAL, applications, utilities and device drivers. Any flash remaining beyond the Windows operating system image is formatted for use as a persistent memory drive (which appears in My Computer as the folder “System”). Any programs or data stored in this folder will not be lost if the memory backup battery fails. The computer has one Type II CF+ slot. The computer supports and auto detects up to 256MB of Type I compact flash memory. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 44 Hardware Configuration Core Logic The mobile device supports the following I/O components of the core logic: • One PCMCIA slot (supports Type I or II PCMCIA cards). • One compact Flash card port (supports Type I and II cards). • One InfraRed port. • One Digitizer Input port (see section titled “Touchscreen”). • Two I/O ports in six configurations (see section titled “Endcaps and COM Ports.”). Video Subsystem The display has a 640 pixel (horizontal) by 240 pixel (vertical) format. The display contrast is adjustable with key sequences. Backlighting is available and can be adjusted with key sequences. The turn-off timing is configured through the Control Panel. The display controller supports Windows CE graphics modes. Touchscreen allows mouse functions (pointing and taping on the display or Signature Capture) using an LXE approved stylus. There are two types of displays available: transflective greyscale monochrome; and transmissive color. The transmissive color display is optimized for indoor lighting. It cannot be used without the backlight. The transflective monochrome is optimized for outdoor use but may also be used indoors. The monochrome display has an electroluminescent backlight. The color displays have a CCFL (Cold-Cathode Fluorescent Lighting) backlight. The transflective display appears to have a greenish hue when the display is off or suspended. The transmissive display appears black when the display is off or suspended. See Section “Display” . Power Supply The mobile device uses two batteries for operation. • An 1900 mAh replaceable Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery pack. The battery pack recharges while the computer is in a powered cradle or when connected to the optional external power sources. The main battery can be removed and inserted in the MX3 Multi-Charger which simultaneously charges up to six battery packs in four hours. • An internal 50 mAh Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) backup battery. The backup battery is recharged directly by the main battery when it is in the mobile device. Full charging of the backup battery may take several hours. The recharging of the backup battery is automatically controlled by the operating system. The backup battery must be replaced by qualified service personnel. See “Power Supply”. Optional AC adapters are available – external AC power supplies (US and International) and a cigarette lighter adapter. See “External Power Supply”. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Hardware Configuration 45 Audio Interface An interface is available for headset operation. When a headset is plugged into the audio jack on the endcap, the main speaker is disabled. PCMCIA Slots Use and operation of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) device (e.g. PC card) is dependent upon both the type of device installed and the application(s) running on the computer. Make sure the proper software is pre-loaded and PC cards are properly configured. Slot 0 – Network or SRAM Cards Note: When removing or installing the network card, protect the internal components and the network card from electrostatic discharge. The mobile device has one internal PCMCIA slot that conforms electrically to PCMCIA 2.1 specifications. The PC Slot supplies 0.75 of an amp at 5Volts or 3.3Volts. Battery voltage is supplied through unused pin 35 to support a WAN client device in the slot. The PC slot is accessible by the use of a Phillips screwdriver to first loosen the endcap. It accepts Type I or II cards only. Slot 0 accepts PCMCIA 2.4GHz network cards or SRAM/Flash memory cards. Slot 1 – Compact Flash Card The mobile device has one internal Compact Flash card port that supports Type I and II CF+ cards. The slot is accessible when the endcap has been loosened. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 46 Power Modes Power Modes 1 – On 2 – Suspend 3 – Critical Suspend 4 – Off 5 – Power Button or Power Off Timer expires 6 – Primary Event 7 – Power fail. Also from Suspend (2) or On (1). 8 – Restoration of power. 9 – Backup battery and main battery dead 10 – Power applied. New main battery installed or external power applied. Tap the Power button. Note: After event 8, the only primary event (6) which functions is a power button tap. Figure 2-2 Power Modes – On, Suspend, Critical Suspend and Off Primary Events Listing Any key on the keypad Stylus touch on the touchscreen Power button tap PC card activity External power connection MX3X Reference Guide COM1 activity COM2 activity (prior to July 2006 only) COM3 activity USB client connection Scanner activity E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Power Modes 47 On Mode The Display When the display is On: • the keyboard, touchscreen and all peripherals function normally • the display backlight is on until the Backlight timer expires (default is 3 seconds) 15 seconds afterwards, the display turns off. • when the main battery is hot-swapped, the display is turned Off. The Mobile Device After a new mobile device has been received, a charged main battery inserted, and the Power button tapped, the computer is always On until both batteries are drained completely of power. When the main battery and backup battery are drained completely, the unit is in the Off mode. The unit transitions from the Off mode to the On mode when a charged main battery is inserted or external power is applied. Press the Power button to turn the device on. User Idle Mode Note: When the display backlight is Off, the unit is still On. The unit functions normally – a tethered scanner trigger press or an integrated scanner Scan key press will cause scans. Communications through the network or serial ports continue. User Idle timers are set using Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Schemes tab. The display backlight is turned off when one of the following occurs: • the user idle timer expires before a wakeup event takes place • the Power button is tapped which immediately places the unit into Suspend Mode. Display Backlight Suspend timers are set using Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display | Backlight tab. Any of the following primary events will wake the display and display backlight: Any key on the keypad Stylus touch on the touchscreen Power button tap When the display backlight wakes up, the User Idle Timer begins the countdown again. When any of the above events occur prior to the timer expiring, the timer begins the countdown again. The first display backlight wakeup key press or touch is sent to the operating system or running application. Once the display is On, the keyboard and touchscreen function normally. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 48 Power Modes System Idle Mode Note: When the display is Off, the unit is still On. The unit functions normally – tethered scanner trigger press or integrated scanner Scan key press will cause scans. Communications through the network or serial ports continue. System Idle timers are set using Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Schemes tab. The display is turned off when the System Idle timer expires before a wakeup event takes place. The Power button is tapped which immediately wakes the unit up. The Status LED blinks green when the Display enters Off mode. Any of the following primary events will wake the display and display backlight: Any key on the keypad Stylus touch on the touchscreen Power button tap When the display wakes up, the System Idle Timer begins the countdown again. When any of the above events occur prior to the timer expiring, the timer begins the countdown again. The first display wakeup key press or touch is sent to the operating system or running application. Once the display is On, the keyboard and touchscreen function normally. Suspend Mode The Suspend mode is entered when the device is either inactive for a predetermined period of time, the user taps the Power button or the user selects Start | Suspend. Suspend timers are set using Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power | Schemes tab. Any of the following can be configured to wake the unit and reset both the display and display backlight timers: Any key on the keypad Power button tap COM1 CTS COM3 CTS PC card activity Stylus touch on the touchscreen External power connection USB client connection When the device wakes up, the User Idle, System Idle and the Suspend timers begin the countdown again. When any one of the above events occurs prior to the Suspend timer expiring, the timer starts the countdown again. The first wakeup key press or touch is not sent to the operating system or running application – the first keypress or touch is only used to wake up the unit and reset the timers. Once the unit has transitioned from the Suspend mode to the On mode, the unit, keyboard and touchscreen function normally. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Power Modes 49 Critical Suspend Mode The purpose of the Critical Suspend mode is to reduce power consumption to a lower level that still retains the contents of SDRAM. The device enters Critical Suspend Mode only when the main battery has failed or is removed/hot-swapped. The backup battery is supplying power to the unit during Critical Suspend Mode. When hot-swapping (the main battery is removed and replaced), the display turns off, the BATT M LED begins to flash red, all peripherals are shut down, the CPU clock is stopped, and power is removed from the PCMCIA card. When the device is in the Critical Suspend state (the main battery is in place and the device is being powered by the backup battery), the display turns off, the BATT M LED begins to flash red, all peripherals are shut down, the CPU clock is stopped, and power is removed from the PCMCIA card. The operating system is saving the state prior to the main battery failing and cannot be used. If a fully charged main battery is installed before the backup battery is depleted (approximately 5 minutes) the device transitions to the Suspend state. To resume operation tap the Power key. If the backup battery is depleted before a fully charged main battery is inserted, the device immediately turns itself Off and all unsaved information is lost. Insert a fully charged main battery and press the Power button to turn the device On. Off Mode The unit is in Off Mode when the main battery and the backup battery are depleted. Insert a fully charged main battery and press the Power button to turn the device On. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 50 Physical Controls Physical Controls Power Button Note: Refer to the section titled “Power Modes” for information relating to the power states of the mobile device. The power button is located above the ESC key on the keypad. When a battery is inserted for the first time, the Power button must be pressed. Figure 2-3 Location of the Power (PWR) Button Quickly tapping the Power button places the device immediately in Suspend mode. Quickly tapping the Power button again, or touching the screen, immediately returns the device from Suspend. Restart Sequence Tap Start | Run, then type warmboot in the textbox and press Enter. If the touchscreen is not accepting taps or needs recalibration, press + to force the Start Menu to appear. When the Windows desktop is displayed or an application begins, the power on (or reboot) sequence is complete. If any changes to the settings had been saved previously, they are restored on reboot. Note: To reset to factory default values, please refer to Chapter 3 “System Configuration” section titled “Utilities”. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Physical Controls 51 Endcaps and COM Ports The computer supports three COM port options. Two external serial ports are dependent on the end cap chosen. A third serial port is used to support an infrared transciever (barcode reader). An additional endcap configuration supports serial and USB “slave” input/output at 1.5 MBps. Standard Range Scanner Port RS-232 Port (Serial Port) USB Client / USB Host Audio Jack DC Power Jack MX3P Enclosure Figure 2-4 Endcap and COM Ports The COM 2 port is always the IR port on the back of the mobile device, regardless of the type of endcap installed. COM 2 can only be accessed when a tethered scanner is connected to the RS-232 port on the cradle, and the MX3X is in the cradle. The cradle does not need to be powered by an alternate AC or DC power source. Tethered scanners receive power from the mobile device’s main battery. On the Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port endcap COM 3 is the Integrated Scanner port. The integrated barcode scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed. To edit Scanner Com Port parameters, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner. Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes. On the Dual Serial Port endcap the COM1 port is the serial port on the right side of the endcap when the display is facing you. Caution – Do Not Use the RS-232 Labelled Endcap Port for Cables with USB Plugs/Receptacles: Caution – Do Not Use the USB Labelled Endcap Ports for Serial Tethered Scanners: Figure 2-5 Serial Ports and Cables E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 52 Physical Controls Endcap Combinations Left Port Right Port Serial COM3 Serial COM1 Serial COM3 USB Client USB Host Serial COM1 USB Host USB Client Scanner* Serial COM1 Scanner* USB Client Rear IR Port is COM2 Barcode scanners, tethered to the serial port on a cradle, send ASCII data to the MX3X in the cradle through the COM2 Port. Figure 2-6 Endcap Combinations * The MX3P does not have an integrated scanner nor an RFID tag reader and antenna. COM Port Switching The COM 2 port is always the IR port on the back of the computer, regardless of the type of endcap installed. On the Standard Range Scanner / Serial Port endcap COM 3 is the Integrated Scanner port. On the Dual Serial Port endcap the COM1 port is the serial port on the right side of the endcap when the display is facing you. The process used to enable the MX3X COM1 serial port for use with a tethered scanner is as follows: Note: Use the scanner control panel to setup using both the integrated laser scanner and a tethered scanner. To switch active scanner Com ports select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main tab. Note: If there is an integrated laser scanner, COM3 is greyed out – if there is no integrated laser scanner, Internal is greyed out. To assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits to Com 1, Com 2 or Com3, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM .. tab. See Also: Section titled “Tethered Scanners”. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Physical Controls 53 Integrated Scanner Port The integrated laser barcode scanner is used to collect barcode data from any nearby compatible barcode label. Depending on the size of the barcode, size of bars and spacing and quality of the barcode, the scanner is used to read barcodes between 3” and 30”. The barcode scanner reads UPC/EAN, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Code 128, Codabar and MSI symbologies. The integrated laser scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed. Scan buttons have no effect on tethered barcode scanners connected to a serial port on the endcap or to the serial port on a cradle holding an MX3X. The SCNR LED illuminates during any mobile device integrated scanner activation. The mobile device has an SE923 or SE955 scanner engine. If you need to set up the integrated scanner barcode reading parameters, please refer to the “Integrated Scanner Programming Guide” and the “MX3” barcode scanner type. The guide is on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website. After scanning the barcodes that change Baud Rate, Parity, or Stop Bits go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM 3, make the same changes, and save the changes by tapping OK. Serial Port RS-232 connection is made through a labelled RS-232 Serial Port if installed. The connector is an industry-standard RS-232. The connector is a PC/AT standard 9-pin “D” male connector. Figure 2-7 RS-232 Port Pin Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI or +5V DC Description Carrier Detect Receive Data – Input Transmit Data – Output Data Terminal Ready Signal/Power Ground Data Set Ready Ready To Send Clear To Send Ring Indicator – Input Figure 2-8 9-Pin RS-232 Pinout E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 54 Physical Controls LXE Connection Cable Technical Specification The exact serial cable is crucial. Many commercial null modem cables will not work. LXE recommends the following cable: Serial cable: 9000A054CBL6D9D9 Pinout: D9 female 1 2 3 4 5 6, 8 7 9 D9 female 7 3 2 6, 8 5 4 1 no connection Figure 2-9 Pinout – Serial Cable for Synchronization Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port – the laptop connection will not work. RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port RTS Ready to Send CTS Clear to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready DSR Data Set Ready Remote Side The device sending data to and receiving data from the MX3X through the LXE serial cable connected to the RS-232 ports on both devices. LXE Serial Cable 9000A054CBLD9D9 The MX3X serial port supports four types of handshaking via the LXE serial cable: None, standard Xon/Xoff, standard DTR/DSR, and a form of RTS/CTS. To use RTS/CTS, the remote side computer must clear the DTR line which sets the MX3X CTS line and allows the MX3X to send data to the remote side. And then signals and data travel smoothly between both devices. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Physical Controls 55 USB Host / Client Port USB Host / Client connection is made through an optional USB Port if installed. The connector is an industry-standard 9-pin “D” male connector. The optional LXE USB cable is required to adapt the connection to a standard USB connector. Please refer to section titled “Accessories” for the USB part number when ordering. Caution – Do Not Use the RS-232 Labelled Port for Cables with USB Plugs/Receptacles: Caution – Do Not Use the USB Labelled Endcap Ports for Tethered Scanners: Figure 2-10 Endcap Ports USB Host Cable Port Label on Endcap Mobile Device End 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Host Detect Not Used D + (Green Wire) Not Used Ground (Black Wire) Not Used D – (White Wire) Not Used Not Used Goes To USB Type A Plug End 1 3 4 2 Figure 2-11 USB Type A to Serial Port Cable Pinout ActiveSync Connect from USB-C port to USB Type A Host – a laptop/desktop, etc. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 56 Physical Controls USB Client Cable Port Label on Endcap Mobile Device End 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not Used Not Used D + (Green Wire) Not Used Ground (Black Wire) Not Used D – (White Wire) Not Used Power Goes To USB Type B Plug End 3 4 2 1 Figure 2-12 USB Type B to Serial Port Cable Pinout Connect from USB-H serial port to USB Type B Male receptacle on a USB hub, camera, etc. Tethered Scanners Do not connect a tethered scanner cable to a mobile device’s USB-C or USB-H labeled endcap port. These ports cannot power a tethered scanner. Tethered scanners connect to RS232-labeled ports on the endcap and can connect to the RS232 port on a powered cradle. The Scan buttons have no effect on tethered barcode scanners (connected to a serial port). Tethered scanners read barcode scans only when the trigger on the tethered scanner is pressed. The tethered scanner requires power on pin 9 of the mobile device’s serial port. To set the MX3X to use a tethered scanner, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM1 (or 2 or 3). Tap the “Power on Pin 9 (+5V)” checkbox for the COM port selected. The COM port that accepts the scanner data can be configured for data rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. See Also: Section titled “Cradles” when using a tethered scanner with a powered cradle. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Physical Controls 57 Programmable Scan Buttons Figure 2-13 Programmable Buttons There are two buttons, one on each side of the display. The buttons can be programmed to perform specific functions. The programmable keys have no effect on barcode scanners tethered to the device. When there is no integrated scanner installed, both buttons default to Enter buttons (with the exception of IBM 5250 terminal emulation devices – in this case, the left button is labelled and functions as “Field Exit”). Note: The programmable Scan key is the Field Exit key when the MX3X is an IBM 5250 / TN5250 compatible device. It can also be programmed as the RFID Read key for an MX3-RFID device. To edit the button parameters, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Keys. Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes. The default setting for the right button for the MX3X and the MX3P is Enter. The default setting for the left button is Scan. When the device does not have an integrated scanner, both buttons default to Enter keys and the Scan selection is greyed out. Each button can be setup as: • • • • • • • Disabled – no response when pressed Scan – initiate a barcode scan sequence (integrated scanner only) Enter Key Tab Key Field Exit (IBM 5250 / TN5250 devices only) Virtual Key (default values F20 and F21) RFID Read Field Exit Key Function (IBM 5250/TN5250 Only) The Field Exit key is used to exit an input field. If the field is an Auto Enter field, the auto transmit function is activated. This key function is present on the IBM 5250/TN5250 specific keypad only. Scan Buttons and the SCNR LED The SCNR LED, located above the keypad, illuminates during an integrated barcode scanner function. It is affected by internal scanner algorithms. • Red – scanning. • Green – good scan. • Unlit – laser scanner is inactive. The Scan buttons have no effect on tethered barcode scanners connected to a serial port. Tethered scanners read barcode scans only when the trigger on the tethered scanner is pressed. Pressing the trigger on the tethered scanner has no effect on the mobile device’s Scan buttons. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 58 The Keypad The Keypad The QWERTY keypad is phosphorescent. A phosphorescent keypad does not use a keypad backlight but glows in dim/dark areas after exposure to a light source. Figure 2-14 The QWERTY Keypad The keymaps (keypress sequences) are located in “Appendix A – Key Maps.” Key Functions Key Function Scan (Scanner integrated into endcaps only.) The Scan key activates the scanner when a scanner endcap is installed and the Scan button is pressed. The internal scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed. A Scan button press has no effect on externally attached scanners. See previous section titled “Programmable Buttons.” When there is no integrated scanner endcap, the Scan keys function as Enter keys. For IBM 5250 configurations, the left button is the “Field Exit” key. Enter The Enter key is used to confirm a forms entry or to transmit information. How it is used is determined by the application running on the computer. 2nd The 2nd key is used to activate the 2nd functions of the keypad. Printed on many keys at the upper left corner are small characters that represent the 2nd function of that key. Using the 2nd key activates the second key function. Note that the 2nd key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you need to use the 2nd function you must press the 2nd key. To cancel a 2nd function before pressing another key, press the 2nd key again. When the 2nd function is active, the 2nd LED illuminates. Ctrl The Ctrl key enables the control functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s Control key. Note that the Ctrl key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you need to use a Ctrl function, you need to press the Ctrl key before pressing the desired key. When the Ctrl function is active, the Ctrl LED illuminates. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H The Keypad 59 Key Function Alt The Alt key enables the alternate functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s Alt key. Note that the Alt key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you need to use an alternate function, you need to press the Alt key before pressing the desired key. When the Alt function is active, the Alt LED illuminates. Shft The Shft key enables the shifted functions of the keypad. This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s Shift key. Note that the Shift key only stays active for one keystroke. Each time you need to use a Shifted function, you need to press the Shft key before pressing the desired key. When the Shft function is active, the Shft LED illuminates. When the Shft key is pressed the next key is determined by the major key legends, i.e., the alpha keys display lower case letters – when CAPS is On alpha characters are capitalized. For example, when CAPS is on and the Shft key and the G key are pressed, a lower case g is displayed. Spc The Spc key adds a space to the line of data on the display. This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s Spacebar. Note that the Spc key only stays active for one keystroke. Caps Key and CapsLock Mode This function is similar to a regular keyboard’s CapsLock key. Note that the CapsLock mode stays active until the CapsLock key sequence is pressed again. Each time you need to use a Caps function, you need to press the Caps key sequence first. To cancel a CapsLock function press the Caps key sequence again. When the CapsLock mode is active, the Caps LED illuminates. The CapsLock key sequence is 2nd + F1. • No CapsLock AND No Shift keypress – result is a lowercase letter. • CapsLock OR Shift – result is an uppercase letter. • CapsLock AND Shift keypress – result is a lowercase letter. Keypad Shortcuts Use keyboard shortcuts instead of the stylus: • • • • • Press Tab and an Arrow key to select a file. Press Shift and an Arrow key to select several files. Once you’ve selected a file, press Alt then press Enter to open its Properties dialog. Press 2nd then press numeric dot to delete a file. To force the Start menu to display, press Ctrl then press Esc. Keypress Sequences See Appendix A for all key press sequences. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 60 The Keypad Custom Key Maps Custom Key Maps should not be confused with the process the system administrator uses to remap the Scan buttons on either side of the touchscreen display. See Appendix A “Keymaps”, section titled “Creating Custom Keymaps”. To activate the Custom keymap, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard icon. Select the Custom keymap from the keyboard popup menu, and close the control panel with the OK button. To return to the default keymap, select 0409 from the keymap popup and tap OK. Note: Mobile device’s host connection and Custom Key Maps: before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select 0409 from the keymap popup. Tap OK. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H The Keypad 61 LED Functions Figure 2-15 LED Functions Across the top of the keypad are LEDs that provide visual cues to current computer operation. When the LED is not illuminated, the function is inactive. LED 2 nd When illuminated ... The next keypress is a 2nd keypress. • • ALT The next keypress is an ALT keypress. • CTRL Amber when on and unlit when off. Uppercase letters are active until the CAPS key sequence is pressed again. • SCNR Amber when on and unlit when off. The next letter is the uppercase letter on alpha keys and the shifted character on the numeric keypad keys. • CAPS Amber when on and unlit when off. The next keypress is a CTRL keypress. • SHFT Amber when on Blinks amber during configuration key sequence. Amber when on and unlit when off. Barcode scanner function, affected by both tethered scanners and the scanner endcap. • • • Red – scanning. Green – good scan. Unlit – scanner is inactive. BATT B Backup Battery. When illuminated, the backup battery is charging. When unlit, the backup battery is not charging STAT Status Indicator. • • BATT M CHGR Main Battery. When illuminated, main battery capacity is low. • Red – low battery. • Blinking Red – power fail. • Unlit – Main battery is not low OR all charge is depleted in both batteries.. Charger. When on, the mobile device is receiving external power either from the DC power jack or the MX3X is seated in a powered cradle. • • • E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Amber – device is booting up. Blinking Green when display Suspend state begins. Red – Main battery is charging. Amber – Fault or temporary standby (Contact LXE Customer Support). Green – battery charge is complete and the mobile device is connected to external power through the power jack or a powered cradle. MX3X Reference Guide 62 Display Display The touchscreen display is an LCD unit capable of supporting VGA graphics modes. Display size is 640 x 240 pixels. The display covering is designed to resist stains. The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input. A pen stylus is included. The touchscreen responds to an actuation force (touch) of 4 oz. of pressure (or greater). There are two types of displays available: transflective greyscale monochrome and transmissive color. The transmissive color display is optimized for indoor lighting. It cannot be used without the backlight. The transflective monochrome is optimized for outdoor use but may also be used indoors. The monochrome display has an electroluminescent backlight. The color display has a CCFL (Cold-Cathode Fluorescent Lighting) backlight. The transflective display appears to have a greenish hue when the display is off. The transmissive display appears black when the display is off. The choice between font sizes is made in the Control Panel option Display | Appearance. Font size selection may be overridden by a user supplied application. The display is automatically turned off when the System Idle timer or Suspend timer expires. Display and Display Backlight Timer When the System Idle timer expires the display is turned off. The default value for the battery power timer is 15 seconds. The default value for the external power timer is 2 minutes. When the User Idle timer expires the screen display backlight is turned off. The default value for the battery power timer is 3 seconds. The default value for the external power timer is 2 minutes. Both values can be adjusted using the Control Panel option “Display | Backlight” or “Power | Schemes”. Any of the following will wake the display and display backlight: Any key on the keypad Stylus touch on the touchscreen Power button tap When the display wakes up, the timers will begin the countdown again. When any of the above events occurs prior to the timers expiring, the timers start the countdown again. Touchscreen The touchscreen provides a means of inputting information into the device by touching the screen using the LXE approved stylus (the Passive Pen – see Chapter 1 section titled “Accessories.”) Touchscreen operation is not affected by Display Backlighting. Touchscreen operation is affected by the Display mode. If the display is off, a stylus touch on the display will turn on the display. No touch data is sent to the running application until the next stylus touch. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Display 63 Cleaning the Glass Display/Scanner Aperture Note: These instructions are for components made of glass. If there is a removable protective film sheet on the display screen, remove the film sheet before cleaning the screen. Keep fingers and abrasive or sharp objects away from the scan aperture and display. If the glass becomes soiled or smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex(R) without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not scrub optical surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint/particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air. Applying the Protective Film to the Display First, clean the display of fingerprints, lint particles, dust and smudges. Remove the protective film from it’s container. Remove any protective backing from the film sheet by lifting the backing from a corner of the film. Discard the backing. Apply the film to the screen starting at one side and smoothing it across the display. If air bubbles appear, raise the film slightly and continue smoothing the film across the display until it covers the glass surface of the display. If dust, lint or smudges are trapped between the protective film and the glass display, remove the protective film, clean the display and apply the protective film again. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 64 Speaker Speaker The speaker is located on the front of the mobile device above the Power button. The Speaker has a loudness of at least 90 dB (2700 Hz) at 10 cm measured from the front of the unit. The Speaker volume is adjustable via the keypad or the Control Panel or by an application through the use of an API call. There are 16 distinct volume levels. The minimum volume level is 0 (no sound) with a default setting of maximum non-distorted volume. The volume sticks at maximum and minimum levels. The speaker is disabled when a headset is plugged into the Audio Jack on the endcap. Speaker volume is enabled and adjusted using the Control Panel “Volume & Sounds” option. After the speaker has been enabled using the Control Panel option, speaker volume is adjusted using the 2nd + key sequence, if desired. Operational “beeps” are emitted from the speaker. Infrared (IR) Port Figure 2-16 Infrared Port – COM2 Port At the back of the mobile device is an Infrared (IR) Data Port. The IR Port is designed to provide a data link between the mobile device and a similarly equipped piece of equipment such as a printer. The IR port is the mobile device’s COM 2 port and is a bi-directional half-duplex communication port. It supports baud rates up to 115k, SIR (Slow IR). It will support serial port emulation, as well as IrDA and Winsock over IR protocols. It also supports ActiveSync. The IR operating envelope has a distance range of 2 cm (.79 inches) to 1 meter (3.2 feet) with a viewing angle of 30 degrees. The mobile device uses IrDA protocol to send data in both directions, but not simultaneously. When sending data through the IR port, make sure the IR port on the first mobile device and the IR port on the second mobile device are in close proximity to each other. IrDA is not required and not used by terminal emulation programs. When the MX3X is docked in a cradle, the Status LED on the cradle is red when data is being transmitted through the IR port. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Power Supply 65 Power Supply Note: LXE recommends that the correct MX3 Multicharger Plus always be used to charge the mobile device’s main battery. The Multicharger plus label is located on the back of the device and the charger must have been upgraded to V1.01 to charge the mobile device’s main battery pack to 100%. Please contact your LXE representative for further information about theV1.01 upgrade kit, if needed. Note: LXE recommends the correct Desktop Cradle always be used to store / charge / communicate with the MX3X. The MX3X Desktop Cradle label is located on the bottom of the device. The MX3X Desktop cradle Product Number is MX3RA002DESKCRADLE. The mobile device is designed to work with a Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery pack from LXE. The mobile device receives continuous power from two batteries. There is a Lithium-Ion main battery that can be recharged separately by an LXE approved battery charging unit. The main battery is recharged, if required, while installed in a powered cradle or when the mobile device is connected to external power using the power jack. There is a 50 mAh Nickel-Cadmium (NiCd) backup battery inside the mobile device that is recharged only by the main battery. Figure 2-17 Main Battery Note: New batteries must be charged prior to use. This process takes up to four hours in an LXE Multi-Charger and eight hours when the mobile device is connected to external power through it’s power jack. Check Battery Status Tap the Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power icon. Main and backup battery level, status and Power Scheme timeout setting options are displayed. Handling Batteries Safely • • • • Never dispose of a battery in a fire. This may cause an explosion. Do not replace individual cells in a battery pack. Do not attempt to pry open the battery pack shell. Be careful when handling any battery. If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not attempt to charge it. Dispose of it using proper procedures. Caution Nickel-based cells contain a chemical solution which burns skin, eyes, etc. Leakage from cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur. In this event, rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the solution contacts the eyes, get immediate medical attention. Caution NiCd and Li-Ion batteries are capable of delivering high currents when accidentally shorted. Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with jewelry, metal surfaces, conductive tools, etc., making the objects very hot. Never place a battery in a pocket or case with keys, coins, or other metal objects. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 66 Power Supply Li-Ion Battery When disposing of the main battery, the following precautions should be observed: The battery should be disposed of promptly. The battery should not be disassembled or crushed. The battery should not be heated above 212°F (100°C) or incinerated. Main Battery The main battery has a rugged plastic enclosure that is designed to withstand the ordinary rigors of an industrial environment. Exercise care when transporting the battery pack making sure it does not come in contact with excessive heat or any power source other than the LXE Multi-Charger or the mobile device battery well. When the main battery is properly installed in the unit it provides up to eight hours of operation depending upon operation and accessories installed. The battery pack is resistant to impact damage and falls of up to four feet to a concrete surface. Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge. The more you use the scanner, the wireless client, or the backlight at it’s brightest setting, the shorter the time required between battery recharges. Battery Hot-Swapping When the main battery power level is low, the mobile device will signal the user with a warning dialog box on the display and the BATT M LED illuminates red. The Batt-M LED is illuminated until the main battery is replaced, the battery completely depletes, external power is applied to the mobile device using the power jack, or the MX3X is placed in a powered cradle. You can replace the main battery by simply removing the discharged battery and installing a fully charged battery within a five minute time limit (or before the backup battery depletes). When the main battery is removed, the mobile device automatically transitions to the Critical Suspend state. During Critical Suspend, the mobile device’s backup battery will continue to power the unit for at least five minutes. Though data is retained, the mobile device cannot be used until a fully charged main battery is installed. After installing the fully charged battery, the mobile device automatically transitions to the Suspend state. To resume from the Suspend state, tap the Power button. Full operational recovery from Suspend can take several seconds while the wireless device is reestablishing a network link. If the backup battery depletes before a fully charged main battery can be inserted, the mobile device will turn OFF and the Power key must be used after the main battery is installed. All configuration data is saved to flash memory before the computer powers off. Low Battery Warning It is recommended that the main battery be removed and replaced when it’s energy depletes. When the Low Battery Warning appears do an orderly shut down of the mobile device, minimizing the operation of any optional equipment and insuring any information is saved that should be saved. When the mobile device is in an ON state, a low battery warning dialog box appears on the display and the Batt-M LED illuminates red. An uninterrupted external power source (wall AC adapters or DC/DC converters) transfers power to the mobile device internal charging circuitry which, in turn, recharges the main battery and backup battery. Note: Once you receive the Low Battery Warning, you have approximately 5 minutes to perform an orderly shutdown and replace the main battery before the unit powers off. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Power Supply 67 The Low Battery Warning will transition to Critical Suspend before the computer powers off. Critical Suspend State The Critical Suspend state or mode can only be entered because of a main battery Power failure. A main battery Power failure can occur because the battery’s energy has been depleted or the battery has been removed. When the mobile device is in the Critical Suspend state the main battery LED illuminates, the System LED blinks red, all peripherals are shut down, the CPU clock is stopped, and power is removed from the PCMCIA card(s). The operating system is saving the state prior to the backup battery failing and cannot be used. If a new fully charged main battery is installed before the backup battery fully depletes the operating system will transition to the Suspend state. To resume operation tap the Power key. Backup Battery The mobile device has a backup battery that is designed to provide limited-duration electrical power in the event of main battery failure. The backup battery is a 50 mAh Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) battery that is factory installed in the unit. The need for recharging of the backup battery is automatically detected and controlled by the operating system. The energy needed to charge the backup battery comes from the main battery. It takes several hours of operation before the backup battery is capable of supporting the operation of the computer. The duration of backup battery life is dependent upon operation of the mobile device, it’s features and any operating applications. The backup battery is replaced by LXE. Note: An uninterrupted external power source (wall AC adapters or DC/DC converters) transfers power to the mobile device’s internal charging circuitry which, in turn, recharges the main battery and backup battery. Backup Battery Maintenance Note: Make sure there is a fully charged main battery in the mobile device before running the backup battery Discharge Utility. The backup battery can be discharged and charged while the mobile device is receiving external power through the Power Jack or from a powered MX3X cradle. The NiCd backup battery should be discharged completely once or twice a year. The main battery will fully charge the backup battery. This process will allow longer life for the backup battery. The backup battery is discharged by selecting Start | Settings | Control Panel | Battery and tapping the “Discharge” button. The discharge utility shows the progress of the discharging. At this time, the program can be exited while continuing the discharge process. Normal use of the mobile device can resume during the discharge, with the exception of Hot-Swapping the main battery. When the backup battery is fully discharged, the mobile device will automatically stop the discharge process and begin to recharge the backup battery. DO NOT REMOVE THE MAIN BATTERY from the mobile device until the backup battery is completely discharged – in approximately 1 hour and recharged in approximately 2.5 hours. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 68 Battery Chargers Battery Chargers Note: LXE recommends that the correct MX3 Multicharger Plus always be used to charge the main battery. The Multicharger plus label is located on the back of the device and the charger must have been upgraded to V1.01. Please contact your LXE representative for further information about the V1.01 upgrade kit, if needed. MX3 Multi-Charger Plus Figure 2-18 MX3 Multi-Charger Plus The main battery can be charged in the MX3 Multi-Charger Plus. The main battery charges the backup battery using the mobile device’s internal charging circuitry. Figure 2-19 Insert Main Battery in Charge Pocket Lower the battery pack straight into the battery charger pocket and push it down firmly until the retaining clip catches on the retaining pins. Do not “slam” the battery into the charging cup or slide it in sideways. Failure to follow these instructions can result in damage to the main battery or the charger. Please refer to the specific battery charger user’s guide for technical information and operating instructions. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Battery Chargers 69 Important Battery Charger Version Information Battery Chargers Affected MX3 Multi-Charger Plus 9000A377CHGR5 Use LXE V1.01 Upgrade Kit MX3 Multi-Charger MX3A378CHGR6 (Not Available After 7-2003) Use LXE V1.20 Upgrade Kit The MX3X main battery will be incompatible with MX3 Battery Chargers that have not been upgraded to V1.20 or V1.01. To successfully charge the mobile device Battery Pack, pre-existing MX3 Battery Chargers must be returned to LXE for a software upgrade. Using a Multi-Charger Plus Battery Charger with the Mobile Device’s Battery Pack The mobile device device is designed to achieve 8+ hours of continuous operation. If the battery pack is inserted into a MX3 Multi-Charger Plus (without the V1.01 upgrade) bay, the battery may not become fully charged in the charger’s 4 hour time limit and a red LED illuminates after 4 hours have elapsed indicating a Battery Problem. Remove and reinsert the battery pack into the same charging bay. This will reset the timer and allow the charger to complete the charge cycle for the mobile device’s main battery in approximately 2 hours.. LXE does not supply an external timing device with the Multi-Charger Plus. Battery Label Location The mobile device battery pack has a silver label (as opposed to the white labels on LXE’s MX3 and MX3-CE battery packs). E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 70 Battery Chargers External Power Supply (Optional) The DC power jack is located on the endcap. The main battery is trickle-charged using external power supplies. The cradle power jack is located on the back of the cradle.The mobile device (and the Desktop Cradle) connect to any of the following power supplies through the DC Power Jack. Figure 2-20 US AC/DC 12V Power Supply and Cigarette Lighter Adapter Figure 2-21 International AC/DC 12V Power Supply Note: When the mobile device is receiving power through a cradle connected to external power, the cradle’s Status LED and the device’s CHGR LED are illuminated. Note: The MX3P receives AC/DC power through the endcap power jack only. The passive vehicle cradle designed for these devices does not have power or communication capability. See “Accessories” for the MX3P passive vehicle cradle part number and description. The MX3P uses MX3P-specific cables. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Chapter 3 System Configuration Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the mobile device. Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as installed hardware and software. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only, the configuration of your specific mobile device computer may vary. The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the mobile device and some of it’s optional features. Your MX3X operating system may be Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0. The MX3X operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE .NET or Windows CE. This is the factory default value for the Desktop Display Background. This chapter presents information and procedures that are common to both CE versions unless otherwise noted. Windows Operating System For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0 user’s guides or the Windows CE .NET on-line Help application installed in the mobile device. This chapter’s contents assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most Windows XP or 2000 (or later) desktop computers. Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the MX3X and it’s Windows CE environment. 2.4 GHz Network Configuration All 2.4GHz network configuration is included in Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”. Installed Software Note: Some standard Windows options require an external modem connection. Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE. When you order a mobile device you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and wireless communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in folders in the mobile device. This section lists the contents of the folders and the general function of the files. Files installed in the mobile device are specific to the intended function of the mobile device. Files installed in each mobile device configured for a wireless network environment contain wireless client specific drivers – the drivers for each type of client are specific to the manufacturer (e.g. Cisco, Symbol, Summit) for the clients installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 72 Installed Software Software Load The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0 OS, hardware-specific OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE browser and utilities. The software supported is summarized below: Operating System • Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system components, including Windows CE 5.0 or CE .NET 4.2 kernel, file system, communications, connectivity (for remote APIs), device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and touchscreen input, window management, and common controls. Network and Device Drivers Wavelink Avalanche (Option) LXE AppLock (Option) Java (Option) • Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option (when installed). Terminal Emulation (Option) • RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot (if installed). LXE API Routines (see “Accessories” for the LXE SDK Kit part number) Note: Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are released by LXE. Software Applications The following applications are included: • • • • • • • • • • • WordPad (was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE) Pocket Inbox Word Viewer Excel Viewer PDF Viewer Image Viewer Scanner Wedge (LXE developed) ActiveSync Transcriber Media Player Internet Explorer Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them. Optional JAVA (Option) Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of JAVA examples and Plug-ins is also installed with the JAVA option. LXE does not support all JAVA applications running on the mobile device. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Installed Software 73 LXE RFTerm (Option) Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm. Please refer to “Terminal Emulation Setup” earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction. Refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction. WAV files added by the user should be stored in System\LXE\RFTerm\Sounds. AppLock (Option) Installed by LXE. Applications are setup by the Administrator by tapping Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end-user. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. See Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction. Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Option) The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Manager. After configuration, Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset. Network parameter configuration is supported for: • IP address: DHCP or static IP • RF network SSID • DNS hosts (primary, secondary, tertiary) • Subnet mask • Enabler update Related Manual: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”. The MX3X has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded, but not installed, on the mobile device when it is shipped from LXE. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_MX3X. LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline. If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device(s). E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 74 Desktop Desktop For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0 user’s guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile device. The Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP. At a minimum, it has the following icons that can be tapped with the stylus to access My Computer, Internet Explorer, and the Recycle Bin. At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Tapping the Start Button causes the Start Menu to pop up. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents, Settings, Help, and Run. The Start Menu Shutdown option found on most desktop PC’s has been replaced with a single command: “Suspend” because the mobile device is always powered On (when a fully charged main battery and backup battery are present). Tap the Suspend button to turn the screen off or tap the red Power button to turn the screen off and place the device into Suspend mode. Tap the screen once more or tap the Power button to “wake” the unit up. Desktop Icon Function My Computer (CE .NET 4.2) My Device (CE 5.0) Access files and programs. Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted. Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires network card and Internet Service Provider – ISP enrollment is not available from LXE). Wireless Client Setup Icon Used for configuring wireless client for network security settings. Note that only one client can be used at a time, e.g. if the Summit Client icon is present, the Cisco Client icon is not present. My Documents Storage for downloaded files / applications. Start Access programs, select from the Favorites listing, documents last worked on, change/view settings for the control panel or taskbar, on-line help, run programs or place the unit into Suspend mode. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Desktop 75 My Computer Folders (CE .NET 4.2) Folder System Network Storage Card Windows Program Files Application Data My Documents Temp Preserved upon Reboot? Yes No Yes No No No No No Description Internal ATA Card Mounted network drive ATA Card in Compact Flash Slot 1 Operating System in ROM Applications Data saved by running applications Storage for downloaded files / applications Location for temporary files Folders Copied at Startup The following folders are copied on startup: System\Desktop System\Favorites System\Fonts System\Help System\Programs -> Windows\Desktop -> Windows\Favorites -> Windows\Fonts -> Windows\Help -> Windows\Programs This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders. The following folders are *NOT* copied on startup: Windows\AppMgr Windows\Recent Windows\Startup because copying these has no effect on the system, or an incorrect effect. Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed too early in the boot process so it has no effect. Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are not parsed by Launch. My Device Folders (CE 5.0) Folder Application Data My Documents Network Program Files System Temp Windows E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Description Data saved by running applications Storage for downoaded files / applications Mounted network drive Applications Internal SD Flash Card (CAB file storage) Location for temporary files Operating System in Secure Storage Preserved upon Reboot? No No No No Yes No No MX3X Reference Guide 76 Start Menu Program Options Start Menu Program Options The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your Program options may be different based on the software and hardware options purchased. Note that there can be only one wireless client installed at a time. The client driver configuration utility chosen is based on the type of installed wireless client card (Cisco, Summit, Symbol). Access: Start | Programs Cisco Set Cisco client / network parameters (See Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for instruction.) Communication Stores Network communication options ActiveSync Transfer files between a mobile device and a desktop computer Connect Run this command after setting up a connection Start/Stop FTP Server Begin/end connection to FTP server Diagnostics (optional) Diagnostic tests for the Mobile Device Registry Editor Edit the mobile device registry ( c a r e f u l l y ) Test Utility Select a test to run e.g. Display, keyboard, audio. Microsoft File Viewers View downloaded files (see Note) Excel Viewer View Excel documents Image Viewer View BMP, JPEG and PNG images PDF Viewer View Adobe Acrobat documents Word Viewer View Word and RTF files Symbol Tap the Network icon in the toolbar to set up the Symbol client (See Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for instruction.) Summit Tap the Network icon in the toolbar to set up the Summit client network (See Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for instruction.) Command Prompt The command line interface in a separate window Inbox Microsoft Outlook mail inbox. Internet Explorer Access web pages on the world wide internet Java Option LXE RFTerm Option. Terminal emulation application. RFTerm automatically opens as soon as a reboot is completed. Media Player Music management program Microsoft WordPad Opens an ASCII notepad Remote Desktop Connection Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Transcriber Handwriting recognition program using an integrated dictionary Wavelink Avalanche Option. Remote management for networked devices. Windows Explorer File management program Note: The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected or encrypted. • If installed, RFTerm runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot. • If installed and enabled, AppLock runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot. • The RF client runs automatically during each reboot. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Start Menu Program Options 77 Communication Access: Note: Start | Programs | Communication Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the mobile device. Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE. ActiveSync After a connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Connect will start to connect to a host. After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established, the ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the network link. See Chapter 1 “Introduction” section titled “ActiveSync”. Connect After a connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Connect will start to connect to a host. Connect is used to initiate a cabled connection to a host. Several pre-defined connect setups are included in the factory setup: • COM1 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud • Infrared connect at 57600 or 115200 baud • COM3 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud • USB direct connect The default connect setup is USB direct connect. Select "Make New Connection" and follow the instructions on the screen to create a connection while following the directions in the section titled "Backup Data Files using ActiveSync" later in this chapter. See Also: Chapter 1 “Introduction”, section titled “ActiveSync”, subsection titled “Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection” Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server. The server defaults to Off (for security) unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu. Start | Programs | Communication | Start FTP Server Start | Programs | Communication | Stop FTP Server E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 78 Start Menu Program Options Command Prompt Access: Start | Programs | Command Prompt Figure 3-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands. Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close. Inbox Access: Start | Programs | Inbox This option requires a connection to a mail server. There are a few changes in the CE version of Inbox as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Outlook Inbox options. Tap the "?" button to access Inbox Help. ActiveSync can be used to transfer messages between the mobile device inbox and a desktop inbox. Internet Explorer Access: Start | Programs | Internet Explorer This option requires a network card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in the CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options. Tap the "?" button to access Internet Explorer Help. Media Player Access: Start | Programs | Media Player There are few changes in the CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Tap the "?" button to access Media Player Help. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Start Menu Program Options 79 Remote Desktop Connection Access: Start | Programs | Remote Desktop Connection There are few changes in the CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options. Select a computer from the drop down list and tap the Connect button. Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and Experience tabs. Tap the "?" button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help. Note: Custom Key Maps: before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select 0409 from the keymap popup. Tap OK. Transcriber Access: Start | Programs | Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu. To make changes to the Transcriber application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., tap the “hand with a pen” icon in the toolbar. Tap the “?” button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help. Windows Explorer Access: Start | Programs | Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Tap the “?” button to access Windows Explorer Help. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 80 Start Menu Program Options Taskbar Access: Start | Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu The Taskbar can also be accessed by tapping on the taskbar and holding the stylus on the taskbar. Choose Properties from the popup menu. Factory Default Settings Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled There are a few changes in the CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options. When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear. Taskbar Properties Taskbar Options Advanced Always on top Auto hide Show Clock Figure 3-2 Taskbar Properties Advanced Tab Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings | Control Panel menu option. When it is unchecked, the Control Panel Properties screen is displayed. Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the “Recently Opened” Document folder. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 81 Settings | Control Panel Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel or My Computer icon | Control Panel (CE 4.2) or My Device icon | Control Panel (CE 5.0) Getting Help Please tap the “?” box to get Help when changing Settings options. Option Function About Displays software, hardware, versions and network IP. No user intervention allowed. Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard, audio, display or mouse function for users with hearing or viewing difficulties. Administration LXE AppLock Administration utility. See Chapter 6 for instruction. Aironet Client Utility Set the parameters for a Cisco client. (See Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for instruction.) Battery View voltage and status of the main and backup batteries. Battery charge and discharge is performed using this option. Bluetooth Device Set the parameters for a Bluetooth radio. Not available in this release. Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication. Date/Time Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings. Use Sync button to synchronize mobile device date and time with an internet time server. Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems (modems are not supplied/supported by LXE). Display Set background graphic and color scheme. Set backlight properties and timers. Input Panel Select the current key / data input method. Internet Options CE .NET 4.2 - Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet connectivity. CE 5.0 – Set General, Connection, Security, Privacy, Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity. Keyboard Select a Key Map (or font). Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate. Mixer Adjust the input and output parameters – volume, sidetone, and record gain, for headphone, software and microphone. Mouse Set the double-tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen. Network and Dial Up Options Set network driver properties and network access properties. Owner Set the mobile device owner details (name, phone, etc). Enter notes. Enable / disable Owner display parameters. Enter Network ID for the device – user name, password, domain. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 82 Settings | Control Panel Options Option Function Password Set access password properties for signon and/or screen saver. PC Connection Control the connection between the mobile device and a local desktop or laptop computer. PCMCIA Network card in Slot 0, Internal ATA in Slot 2. Power Set Power scheme properties. Review device status and properties. Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on country region and language settings. Remove Programs Select to remove specific user installed programs in their entirety. Note: Programs listed in this location are deleted upon warm and cold boot processes. Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. See section titled “Determine Your Scanner Software Version”. Storage Manager Manage storage devices, create partitions. Stylus Set double-tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel. System Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory settings. Enter device name and description. Review copyright notices. Terminal Server Client Licenses (CE 5.0 only) Select a server client license from a drop down list (Not available at this release). Volume and Sounds Enable/disable volume and sounds. Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events. Note: Change the font displayed on the screen by choosing Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and then the Key map dropdown list. About Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | About Displays hardware and software details. Tab Title Contents Software GUID, Windows CE Version, OAL Version, Bootloader Version, Compile Version, FPGA Version and Language. Language indicates any pre-installed Asian fonts. Hardware CPU Type, Codec Type, FPGA Version, Scanner type, Display, Flash memory, and DRAM memory Versions LXE Utilities, LXE Drivers, LXE Image, LXE API, .NET Compact Framework version, and Internet Explorer. Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address. User application version information can be shown in the Version window. Version window information is taken from the registry. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 83 Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “Utilities”). LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Version in the registry. Create a new string value under this key. The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window. Language and Fonts The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image. The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab: • English only – No additional fonts are built into the OS • Japanese • Simplified Chinese • Traditional Chinese • Korean The above listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built-in to the OS image. Built-in fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup. Thai, Hebrew, Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the (English only) default (extended) fonts. When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the /System folder; the font works for Asian web pages, the font works with RFTerm, the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Settings control panel, the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names, the font does not work for third-party .NET applications, the font does not work for some third-party MFC applications. Identifying Software Versions The “Versions” tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all installed software installed on the mobile device is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the MX3X. The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software installed. Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level. MAC Address The “Network IP” tab displays the MAC address of the network card. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 84 Settings | Control Panel Options Accessibility Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sound function. There are a few changes from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The following exceptions are due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system: • If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. • If the SoundSentry option is selected, please note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. Administration – for AppLock Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single or multiple application devices. In other words, only the application or feature specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user. LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to start up in Administration mode with no default password, and when the device is started for the first time, the user has full access to the mobile device and no password prompt is displayed. After the Administrator specifies an application or applications to lock, assigns a password and the device is rebooted (or the hotkey is pressed), the mobile device is then in end-user mode. AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator. See Chapter 6 “AppLock” for further information and instruction. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 85 Battery Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Battery View the status of the Main and Backup batteries. Battery Battery Voltage: Main: Status: 12.121 V (raw=3485) Backup: 5.099 V (raw=2167) Jacked Charge Discharge Figure 3-3 Battery The Battery tab shows the status and the percentage of power left in the main battery. It also shows the status of the backup battery. The listed values cannot be changed by the user. LXE recommends Discharging and Recharging the backup battery twice a year. Use the Charge or Discharge buttons to charge and discharge the backup battery: To Charge Tap the Charge button. The Discharge button text changes to “Off”. When the backup battery is charging, tap the Off button to stop the Charge process. To Discharge Tap the Discharge button. The Charge button text changes to “Off”. When the backup battery is discharging, tap the Off button to stop the Discharge process. The Main Battery is charged only when an AC adapter is connected via the endcap, the MX3X is docked in a powered cradle or when the Main Battery is removed from the MX3X and placed in the MX3 Multi-charger. Bluetooth Manager Note: May or may not be available in every MX3X version. Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth Device Properties Set the parameters for a Bluetooth radio. Bluetooth Manager, Bluetooth service or options are not available for all MX3X devices or in all MX3X software releases. Factory Default Settings All Found Devices Untrusted Tap the Scan Device button to locate Bluetooth devices in your wireless area. Tap the “?” button and follow the instructions in the Help file to authenticate Bluetooth devices in your area. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 86 Settings | Control Panel Options Certificates Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication. Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the mobile device user. These values may change based on the type of network security resident in the client, access point or the host system. See Chapter 5 “Wireless Network Security” section titled “Certificates” for instruction. Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the MX3X user. These values may change based on the type of network security resident in the client, access point or the host system. Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file. Tap the View button to view a highlighted digital certificate. Tap the Remove button to remove a highlighted certificate file. Tap the “?” button and follow the instructions in the Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates. See Also: Chapter 5 “Wireless Network Configuration” for instruction. It is important that all dates are correct on the mobile device when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 87 Date/Time Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and assign a Daylight Savings location after a warm boot or a cold boot or at anytime. Factory Default Settings Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT-05:00 Daylight Savings Disabled Note: (CE .NET 4.2 only) Date and time is reset to the factory default value each time the mobile device is cold booted. Figure 3-4 Date/Time Properties There is very little functional change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Double-tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear. Sync requires Internet connection. When an Internet connection is available, tap the Sync button to synchronize the mobile device operating system time with an Internet time server. The MX3X includes a GrabTime utility which can be configured to synchronize the time at each boot up. Please see “Enabling GrabTime”, in the “Utilities” section, for details. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 88 Settings | Control Panel Options Dialing Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems (modems are not supplied/supported by LXE). Factory Default Settings Location Work Area Code 425 Tone Dialing Enabled Country/Region 1 Disable Call Waiting Disabled Dialing Properties When dialing from: New ... Remove Local settings are: Dialing Patterns ... The local area code is: The local country code is: Dial using: Tone Pulse Disable call waiting by dialing: Figure 3-5 Dialing Tap the “?” and follow the instructions in Help. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 89 Display Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties. Factory Default Settings Background Tile Appearance Scheme: Monochrome Color Backlight Battery Power Auto Turn Off Idle Time External Power Auto Turn Off Idle Time Windows CE or CE .NET Disable High Contrast White Windows Standard Enabled 3 Seconds Enabled 2 minutes Background There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Appearance No change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Appearance options. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The default is High Contrast White for monochrome displays and Windows Standard for color displays. Note: The color screens display Windows standard colors (or the color scheme selected) instead of shades of grey. Backlight Display Properties Background Appearance Backlight To save battery life, you can adjust when the display automatically shuts off. Automatically turn off backlight while on battery power. Turn off after of continuous idle time. Automatically turn off backlight while on external power. Turn off after of continuous idle time. Figure 3-6 Display Properties / Backlight Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When the backlight timer expires, the monochrome screen is turned off, the color transmissive backlight is dimmed not turned off. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 90 Settings | Control Panel Options Input Panel Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel Select the current key / data input method. Factory Default Settings Input Method Allow applications to change input panel state Keys Use gestures Keyboard Disabled Small keys Disabled Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the integrated keypad primarily available when entering data. Selecting Keyboard enables both. Enable the input panel by checking “Allow applications to change the input panel’s state”. Then tap the OK button. Tap the Options button to set the size of the keys displayed on-screen and whether transcriber gestures are enabled or disabled. Tap the “OK” button to save any changes and exit, or tap the “X” button to exit without saving any changes. Tap the “?” button for Help. Warmboot the device to store the changed setting. Note: Check with your LXE representative for language packs as they become available. Internet Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options Windows CE .NET 4.2 Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for internet connectivity. Select a tab. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. Changes are saved from tab to tab. Tap the Clear Cache or Clear History buttons to clear files that have been downloaded to the mobile device during internet use. The changes take effect immediately. Help is not available for this option. Factory Default Settings General Start Page Search Page Cache Size Connection Use LAN Autodial Name Proxy Server Security Allow cookies Allow TLS 1.0 security Allow SSL 2.0 security Allow SSL 3.0 security Warn when switching Advanced Display web images Play web sounds MX3X Reference Guide http://www.lxe.com/ http://www.google.com 512 Kb Disabled Blank Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options Factory Default Settings Enable web scripting Display script error note Underline links 91 Enabled Disabled Never Windows CE 5.0 Set General, Connection, Security, Privacy, Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity. Select a tab. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. Changes are saved from tab to tab. Tap the “X” box to ignore all changes. The changes take effect immediately. Tap the “?” button for Help. Factory Default Settings General Start Page Search Page Cache Size User Agent Connection Use LAN Autodial Name Proxy Server Bypass Proxy Security Allow cookies Allow TLS 1.0 security Allow SSL 2.0 security Allow SSL 3.0 security Warn when switching Privacy First party cookies Third party cookies Session cookies Advanced Stylesheets Theming Support Multimedia Security Popups Block popups Display notification Use same window E-EQ-MX3XRG-H http://www.lxe.com/ http://www.google.com 512 Kb Windows CE Disabled Blank Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Accept Prompt Always allow Enable Enable All options enabled All options enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled MX3X Reference Guide 92 Settings | Control Panel Options Keyboard Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon Set keypad key map and keypad key repeat delay and key repeat rate. Factory Default Settings Repeat Enable Delay Short Rate Slow Key Map 0409 (CE .NET 4.2) Default (CE 5.0) There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When new key maps are added to the registry, they appear in the Key Map dropdown list on the Keyboard Panel. These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps. Mixer Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mixer Icon Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input or headphone use. Factory Default Settings Master Volume 0dB Record Gain 22.5dB Sidetone 12.0dB Input None Figure 3-7 Mixer Select the Input for the mixer. Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level. Tap OK to save the settings. Note: Set Input to “None” when using stereo headphones. Set Input to “Mic1” when using a mono headset with microphone. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 93 Mouse Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mouse Set the double-tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen. Network and Dialup Connections Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection on the mobile device. To configure the mobile device to use DHCP or a fixed IP address, select the desired connection. The default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP. A static IP address can be assigned by tapping the Specify an IP address radio button and entering the desired IP address, subnet mask and gateway. Create a Connection Option 1. On the mobile device, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections. A window is displayed showing the existing connections. 2. Assuming the one you want does not exist, double-tap Make New Connection. 3. Give the new connection an appropriate name (IR @ 9600, etc.). Tap the Direct Connection radio button. Tap the Next button. 4. From the popup menu, choose the port you want to connect to. Only the available ports are shown. 5. Tap the Configure... button. 6. Under the Port Settings tab, choose the appropriate baud rate. Data bits, parity, and stop bits remain at 8, none, and 1, respectively. 7. Under the Call Options tab, be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone, since a direct connection will not have a dial tone. Set the timeout parameter (default is 90 seconds). Tap OK. 8. TCP/IP Settings should not need to change from defaults. Tap the Finish button to create the new connection. 9. Close the Remote Networking window. 10. To activate the new connection select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection and tap the Change button. 11. Select the new connection. Tap OK twice. 12. Close the Control Panel window. 13. Connect the desktop PC to the mobile device with the appropriate cable. 14. Tap the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection. You can activate the connection by double-tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window, but this will only start an RAS (Remote Access Services) session, and does not start ActiveSync properly. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 94 Settings | Control Panel Options Owner Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon Set mobile device owner details. Factory Default Settings Identification Name, Company, Address, Telephones Display at power-on Notes Notes Display at power-on Network ID User Name Password Domain Blank Disabled Blank Disabled Blank Blank Blank Enter the information and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Owner Properties Identification Notes Network ID At Power On Name: Display Owner Identification Company: Address: Area Code: Phone: Work: Home: Figure 3-8 Owner Properties MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 95 Password Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon Set user access and power up password properties. Factory Default Settings Password Blank Enter at Power On Disabled Enter at Screen Saver Disabled Note: Once a password is assigned, each Settings option requires the password be entered before the Settings option can be accessed. If you forget the password, it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit (which erases all memory). Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and tap the OK box to save the changes. The password is in effect immediately. Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On. Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver. If there is no screensaver chosen, this checkbox is ignored. The screensaver password affects the Remote Desktop screensaver only. The screensaver password is the same as the power-on password. They are not set independently. A screensaver password cannot be created without first enabling the “Enable password protection at power-on” checkbox. The screensaver password is not automatically enabled when the “poweron” checkbox is enabled. Note: Screensavers are not installed by LXE. Password Properties Password Settings Password Password: Confirm Password: Enable Password Protection At Power On Screen Saver Figure 3-9 Password Properties E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 96 Settings | Control Panel Options PC Connection Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection Control the connection between the mobile device and a nearby desktop/laptop computer. Factory Default Settings Allow Connection Enabled Connect Using ‘USB Client’ Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and tap the OK button to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Unchecking the “Allow connection with …..” disables ActiveSync. Change …. Tapping the Change button shows a list of configured ActiveSync connections. In addition, there is a checkbox for Automatic Connect. If this checkbox is checked, when the serial driver detects a cable connection on the configured port, it will automatically try to start ActiveSync on that port. Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time. These settings control the connection between your Windows CE device and a desktop computer. Warning: Adjusting these settings may result in an inability to connect with your desktop computer. Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached. Connect using: ‘USB Client’ Change ... Figure 3-10 Communication / PC Connection Tab Please refer to the "Backup Data Files using ActiveSync" section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 97 PCMCIA Access: Note: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA Network card in Slot 0, Internal ATA in Slot 2. Factory Default Settings Slot 0 Disable slot now Power slot during sleep (3.3v) Power slot during sleep (5v) Write protect slot Slot 1 Disable slot now Power slot during sleep (3.3v) Power slot during sleep (5v) Write protect slot Slot 2 Disable slot now Power slot during sleep (3.3v) Power slot during sleep (5v) Write protect slot PCMCIA Off Off Off Off (dimmed) Compact Flash Off Off Off Off ATA Card Off (dimmed) On (dimmed) Off (dimmed) Off (dimmed) The name of the card (from the CIS data on the card) in the slot is displayed. This information cannot be changed by the user. When “Power slot during sleep” is checked, the slot will stay powered up in Suspend at the cost of reduced battery life. When “Disable slot now” is checked, the slot is powered down as soon as the Control Panel is closed and the PCMCIA driver ignores any card in the slot. When there is no card in a slot, the options are dimmed. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 98 Settings | Control Panel Options Power Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Power Set Power Off, Backlight properties. Review battery status and perform backup battery charging/discharging. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. Changes are saved across tabs. Tap the “X” box to discard any changes. Tap the “?” for Help. The changes take effect immediately. Note: Control Panel parameters established in Power Properties affect the mobile device operating system. Factory Default Settings Battery Turbo Schemes – Battery Power User Idle System Idle Suspend Schemes – AC Power User Idle System Idle Suspend Enabled 3 seconds 15 seconds 5 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes Please refer to Chapter 2 "Physical Description and Layout" section titled "Power Modes". The mode timers are cumulative. The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired. When the User Idle timer is set to “Never”, the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle, System Idle or Suspend modes (even when the device is idle). Because of the cumulative effect, and using the Battery Power Scheme Defaults listed above: • The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity, • The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity (15sec + 3sec), • And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity. Battery The Battery tab shows the status and the percentage of power left in the main battery (removable). It also shows the status of the internal backup battery. The listed values cannot be changed by the user. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 99 Schemes Figure 3-11 Power Schemes Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Battery Power Scheme Use this option when the device will be running on battery power only. Switch state to User Idle: Default is After 3 seconds Switch state to System Idle: Default is After 15 seconds Switch state to Suspend: Default is After 5 minutes AC Power Scheme Use this option when the device will be running on external power (e.g. AC adapter, auto outlet adapter, powered cradle). Switch state to User Idle: Default is After 2 minute Switch state to System Idle: Default is After 2 minutes Switch state to Suspend: Default is After 5 minutes Device Status This option displays the power levels being used by the mobile device. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 100 Settings | Control Panel Options Regional Settings Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Options (and defaults) for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image. Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details. CE . NET 4.2 Default Settings Factory Default Settings Regional Setting English (United States) Number 123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg Currency $123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg Time h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM) Date M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long CE 5.0 Default Settings A language must be installed before it can be selected. After selecting a language to use, and after all changes are made, tap OK to save your changes then warmboot the device. Factory Default Settings Regional Settings Your Locale Number Currency Time Date User Interface Language User Interface Language Input Language Input Language Installed Input Languages English (United States) 123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg $123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM) M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long Dimmed (default is Your Locale setting) Dimmed (default is Your Locale setting) English (US) Tap the Customize button to set Number, Currency, Time and Date format for the selected Locale. User Interface Language determines the language used for the menus, dialogs and alerts. Select the Default Input Language to use when the device is rebooted. Remove Programs Access: Note: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs Programs listed in this location are deleted upon warm and cold boot processes. No change from general desktop Remove Programs options. Select a program and tap the Remove button. Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed only programs. The change takes effect immediately. Files stored in the “My Documents” folder are not removed using this option. Note: Do not remove LXE-installed programs using this option. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 101 Scanner Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. Scanner parameters apply to the MX3X integrated scan engine only. Barcode manipulation parameters apply to barcodes scanned by the integrated scan engine only. Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API functions. While the changed configuration is being read, the Scan LED is solid amber. The scanner is not operational during the configuration update. Please refer to the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide” when setting up scanner parameters for the MX3-RFID mobile device. Determine Your Scanner Software Version Note: Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver and OS versions in MX3X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the most current software and drivers for your mobile device. To identify the software version, tap the “About” icon in the Control Panel. Scanner Control Menu Structure Versions Tabs Main Keys COM1 COM2 COM3 Go to . . . . This chapter, section titled “Scanner” Chapter 4 “Scanner”, section titled “Advanced”. Chapter 4 “Scanner”, section titled “Barcode Manipulation”. Figure 3-12 Determine Your Scanner Software Version Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API functions. While the changed configuration is being read, the Scan LED is solid amber. The scanner is not operational during the configuration update. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 102 Settings | Control Panel Options Factory Default Settings Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Internal Port 2 Disabled Power Port 1 while asleep Disabled Send key messages WEDGE Enabled Keys Left Scan Right Enter COM Ports (COM1- COM2 – COM3) Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 Notes: • If the internal scanner has to be configured to operate at any communication settings other than 9600, N, 8, 1 and the computer either loses power or a cold boot command is entered, the Scanner applet must be reconfigured to match the scanner communication settings. • When there is no internal scanner, Port 1 is disabled and the Left Scan button is an Enter key. • ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is enabled in the Scanner applet as a scanner input. For example, if COM 1 is being used by the scanner, COM 1 can’t be used by any other program. • When an RFID module is not installed, the RFID option on the Keys tab is greyed out. See the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide” for instruction when using the MX3-RFID. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 103 Main Scanner Control Main Keys COM1 COM2 COM3 Port 2 Port 1 Power Port 1 while asleep Send Key Messages (WEDGE) Figure 3-13 Scanner Properties / Main Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. If “Power Port 1 while asleep” is checked, whichever serial port is enabled as Port 1 will remain powered while the device is in Suspend, at the cost of reduced battery life. This allows a tethered scanner to wake the device by pressing the trigger on the scanner. If “Send Key Messages …” is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using “Wedge”. Even if Send Key Messages is enabled (“key mode”), the data is still available using the scanner APIs (“block mode”). The Scan buttons have no effect on tethered external scanners connected to the RS-232 connector on the endcap. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 104 Settings | Control Panel Options Keys Figure 3-14 Scanner Properties / Keys Tab See the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide” when using an MX3X with an RFID Module. The Keys tab sets up what happens when one of the Scan keys are pressed. Note that the two keys can do the same or different functions. Assigned Function Disabled When either scan key is set to Disabled, it does nothing when pressed. Scan When set to “Scan” the integrated scanner is activated. If no integrated scanner is present, the Scan selection is greyed out. Enter When set to “Enter”, both the Enter key and the (Scan button) / Enter key perform the same function. Tab When set to “Tab”, both the Tab key and the (Scan button) / Tab key perform the same function. Field Exit 5250 devices only. When a Scan key is set to “Field Exit”, the key press causes the cursor to exit an input field. A field exit key press functions as a Pause key press on non-5250 devices. Virtual When set to “Virtual”, the Virtual Left scan key produces an F20 and the Virtual Right scan key produces an F21. RFID or RFID Read When enabled, the Right Scan / Left Scan key functions as the RFID tag reader trigger. See the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide”. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 105 Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “Utilities”). LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Scanner. Set either the ScanCodeLeft or ScanCodeRight to be the scan code of the key to be used as the virtual key when the Virtual Left key (Left Scan key) or Virtual Right key (Right Scan key) is pressed. The registry requires a decimal value. COM Ports Do not connect a tethered scanner to the USB labelled ports: COM1, COM2 and COM3 Panel Options are Identical. Figure 3-15 Scanner Properties / COM Port Settings Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The COM 1 display contains the same parameters as the COM 2 and COM 3 Tab. “Power on Pin 9” on the COM2 panel is disabled. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. See the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide” when using an MX3X with an RFID Module. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 106 Settings | Control Panel Options Storage Manager Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Storage Manager Installed storage devices are listed by device name in the dropdown box. To view information about the disk or perform store operations, select a device from the list. On-line help is available for this option. • Topics available are: • Manage storage devices • Manage disk partitions • Creating a new partition • Advanced partition features LXE recommends caution when formatting or dismounting storage devices and when creating new partitions or deleting partitions on the storage device. Using the storage manager to perform operations on the internal ATA is no longer available as of July 2006. Note: Contact LXE Customer Support prior to using management functions on the internal ATA card. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 107 Stylus Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus Set double-tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel. Double Tap Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Calibration Press and hold the stylus on the center of the target as it moves around the screen. Press Enter to keep the new calibration settings or Esc to cancel. Figure 3-16 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start Figure 3-17 Stylus Properties / Recalibration E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 108 Settings | Control Panel Options System Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | System Icon Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory settings. Factory Default Settings General Memory Device Name Device Description Copyrights N/A 1/3 storage, 2/3 programs. MX3X001 LXE_MX3X N/A Persist RAM Base Files "Desktop" "Favorites" "Fonts" "Help" "Programs" If you create a directory or directories with the above listed names in the "\System" folder (which is on the CF ATA card) and place your files in those directories, the Launch utility will automatically copy all of the files in these directories to the respective RAM base folders every time upon warm boot. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 109 General System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights System Microsoft Windows Version 4.20 CE .NET Computer Processor Type: Expansion Slots: 1996-2003 Microsoft Corp. All rights reserved. This computer program is protected by U.S. and International copyright laws. Memory: 38220 KB RAM Registered to: Figure 3-18 System / General tab System: This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be changed by the user. Computer: The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of the installed network card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user. Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the internal ATA card used for storage. Memory System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs. Move slider to the right for more storage room. Only unused RAM can be adjusted. Storage Memory Allocated: In Use: Program Memory 19108KB 384KB Allocated: In Use: 19112KB 5420KB Figure 3-19 System / Memory Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the mobile device is running slowly, try increasing the amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 110 Settings | Control Panel Options Device Name System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights These settings are used to identify your Windows CE device to other computers. Please type a name (without any spaces) and a short description. Device name: Device description: Figure 3-20 System / Device Name The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Copyrights This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user. Terminal Server Client Licenses (CE 5.0 only) Select a server client license from a drop down list Not available at this release. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Settings | Control Panel Options 111 Volume and Sounds Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Volume & Sounds Icon Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events. Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Enabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Loud Screen tap Loud Sounds Scheme LOUD! Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure 3-21 Volume and Sounds Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows directory, as SCANGOOD.WAV and SCANBAD.WAV. These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the user’s choice. By default a good scan sound on the mobile device is a single 2700 Hz beep, and a bad scan sound is a double beep. Note: E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from a tethered scanner, and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the barcode processing causes a bad scan beep from the MX3X on the same data. MX3X Reference Guide 112 Utilities Utilities These utilities are pre-loaded by LXE. LAUNCH.EXE All applications to be installed into persistent memory are normally in the form of Windows CE CAB files. These CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image, and need to be copied to the mobile device using an internal ATA card or from a PC using ActiveSync. The CAB files are loaded into the folder System, which is the internal ATA drive. Then, information is added to the registry, if desired, to make the CAB file auto-launch at startup. The CAB file can update the registry as desired and cause the unpacked file(s) to be placed in the appropriate location. The registry information needed is under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ SOFTWARE \ LXE \ Persist, as follows. The main subkey is any text, and is a description of the file. Then 3 values are added: FileName is the name of the CAB file, with the path (usually \System) Installed is a DWORD value of 0, which changes to 1 once auto-launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed. The value in FileCheck is the name of one of the files (with path) installed by the CAB file. Since the CAB file installs into DRAM, when memory is lost this file is lost, and the CAB file must be reinstalled. 3 optional fields are also added: Order, Delay, and PCMCIA. These are all DWORD fields, described below. The auto-launch process goes as follows. The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto-launch. First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present. If not, the registry entry is ignored. If it is present, and the Installed flag is not set, auto-launch makes a copy of the CAB file (since it gets deleted by installation), and runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it. If the Installed flag is set, auto-launch looks for the FileCheck file. If it is present, the CAB file is installed, and that registry entry is complete. If the FileCheck file is not present, memory has been lost, and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file. Then, the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry, until all registry entries are analyzed. To force execution every time (for example, for AUTOEXEC.BAT), use a FileCheck of “dummy”, which will never be found, forcing the item to execute. For persist keys specifying .EXE or .BAT files, the executing process will be started, and then Launch will continue, leaving the loading process to run independently. For other persist keys (including .CAB files), Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing. This is important, for example, to ensure that a .CAB file is installed before the .EXE files from the .CAB file are run. The Order field is used to force a sequence of events; Order=0 is first, and Order=99 is last. Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass, but not in a predictable sequence. Note: If the order of loading is not critical, it may be easier to use the \System\Startup folder instead; see below (only on .01D or newer images). The Delay field is used to add a delay after the item is loaded, before the next is loaded. The delay is given in seconds, and defaults to 0 if not specified. If the install fails (or the file to be installed is not found), the delay does not occur. The PCMCIA field is used to indicate that the file (usually a CAB file) being loaded is a wireless client driver, and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded. By default, the PCMCIA slots are off on powerup, to prevent the “Unidentified PCMCIA Slot” dialog from appearing. Once the drivers are loaded, the slot can be turned on. The value in the PCMCIA field MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Utilities 113 is a DWORD, representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file, but before activating the slot (a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation). The default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on. The default values for the default wireless client drivers (listed below) is 1, meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up. Note that the auto-launch process can also launch batch files (*.BAT), executable files (*.EXE), registry setting files (*.REG), or sound files (*.WAV). The mechanism is the same as listed above, but the appropriate CE application is called, depending on file type. Registry information is already in the default image for the following 3: ; Summit client [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\Summit Radio] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\SUMMIT.CAB" "Installed"=dword:1 "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\SDCCFG10G.DLL" "Order"=dword:02 "Delay"=dword:0 "PCMCIA"=dword:1 ; Cisco client [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\Cisco Radio] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\CISCO.CAB" "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\CISCO.DLL" “Order”=dword:01 “PCMCIA”=dword:1 ; Symbol client [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\Symbol Radio] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\SYMBOL.CAB" "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\NICTT.EXE" “Order”=dword:01 “PCMCIA”=dword:1 ; this key installs RFID drivers/default values from the CAB file [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\RFID] "FileName"="\WINDOWS\RFID.CAB" "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\RFID_WDG.DLL" “Order”=dword:0C ; this key installs RFTERM from the CAB file [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\LXE TE] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\RFTERM.CAB" "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\LXE\RFTERM.EXE" “Order”=dword:10 ; this key installs JAVA [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\Java] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\JEODE.CAB" "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\EVM.EXE" “Order”=dword:30 3 CAB files for options not purchased are not loaded e.g. JAVA or RFID. If a CAB file is missing, please contact your LXE Representative. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 114 Utilities ; this key runs RFTERM as a startup app [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\RFTERM] "FileName"="\WINDOWS\LXE\RFTERM.EXE" "FileCheck"="dummy" “Order”=dword:40 ; this key installs APPLOCK from the CAB file [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AppLockInstall] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\APPLOCK.CAB" "FileCheck"="\WINDOWS\APPLOCK.EXE" “Order”=dword:0 ; this key runs the APPLOCK prep app [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AppLockPrep] "FileName"="\WINDOWS\APPLOCKPREP.EXE" "FileCheck"="\dummy" “Order”=dword:1 ; this key runs the APPLOCK main app [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AppLock] "FileName"="\WINDOWS\APPLOCK.EXE" "FileCheck"="\dummy" “Order”=dword:63 ; Autoexec [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AUTOEXEC] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.BAT" "FileCheck"="dummy" “Order”=dword:50 ; Avalanche (prior to October 2006) [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\Avalanche] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\LXEAVA.CAB" "FileCheck"="\SYSTEM\AVALANCHE\MODEL.DAT" "Order"=dword:4 "Installed"=dword:0 "PCMCIA"=dword:0 "Delay"=dword:0 ; Avalanche (prior to October 2006) [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AvaLaunch] "FileName"="\SYSTEM\AVALANCHE\AVAINIT.EXE" "FileCheck"="dummy" “Order”=dword:5 "Delay"=dword:0 "PCMCIA"=dword:0 "Installed"=dword:0 When you are installing your custom CAB file to the mobile device’s operating sytem, refer to the default image segments that are commented with “… RFTERM …” to see the expected Registry format. One special key is included to force the system folders (Desktop, Fonts, Programs, etc.) to copy from the internal ATA card (\System) to the \Windows directory. This is implemented as a persist key so the sequence of startup events can be controlled (especially for AppLock). The filename is a special internal trigger for the Launch utility, to activate the CopyFolders function. DO NOT EDIT OR ALTER THIS KEY, OR IT MAY NO LONGER FUNCTION. You may however change the Order or Delay values if necessary for a particular startup sequence. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Utilities 115 [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\COPYFOLDERS] "FileName"="COPYFOLDERS" "FileCheck"="" “Order”=dword:0F To have files (CAB, EXE, REG, or WAV files) loaded on startup, when sequence of execution is not important, you can put these files in the \System\Startup folder (on the internal ATA card). This is parsed by the Launch utility, and these programs are started or executed. Note that this only works on images from .01D and newer. REGEDIT.EXE Before using REGEDIT.EXE, please refer to commercially available Microsoft Power Tools for Windows manuals. For example, Microsoft Windows Registry Guide, Second edition. The Registry Editor allows viewing, searching for items and changing settings in the registry. The registry contains information about how the mobile device runs. LXE recommends caution when inspecting and editing the Registry as making incorrect changes can damage the mobile device operating system. LXE recommends making a backup copy of the registry before viewing or c a r e f u l l y making changes to the registry. REGLOAD.EXE Double-tapping a registry settings file (e.g. REG) causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry. This is similar to the way RegEdit works on a desktop PC. The .REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC. WARMBOOT.EXE Double tap this file to warm boot the computer (i.e., all RAM is preserved). It automatically saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost. WAVPLAY.EXE Double-tapping a sound file (e.g. WAV) causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the background. Enabling GrabTime The MX3X has a GrabTime utility which can automatically synchronize the MX3X with a time server (an active Internet connection is required) at boot up. By default, using GrabTime for time synchronization at boot up is Off. Grabtime can be run at any time (even when Off at boot up) using the Sync button on the Date/Time control panel. To enable GrabTime to run automatically at boot up, run \Windows\tmsync.reg and perform a warmboot. For more detail, see “LAUNCH.EXE”, earlier in this chapter. Note: E-EQ-MX3XRG-H This utility affects the behavior of GrabTime at warmboot. After a coldboot, GrabTime is disabled. MX3X Reference Guide 116 Utilities Disabling the Touchscreen To disable the touchscreen, run \Windows\TouchDisable.reg and perform a warm reboot. To enable the touchscreen, run \Windows\TouchEnable.reg and perform a warm reboot. Note: These utilities affect the behavior of the touchscreen on warmboot. After a coldboot, the touchscreen is enabled. Enable this option with caution when switching from AppLock Administrator mode to AppLock User Mode. Troubleshooting: Touchscreen is not accepting stylus taps or need recalibration. Press + to force the Start Menu to appear. Use the tab, backtab and cursor keys to move the cursor from element to element. Configuring CapsLock Behavior To set CapsLock status to On after a warmboot, run \Windows\CapsLockOn.reg and perform a warmboot. To set CapsLock status to Off after a warmboot, run \Windows\CapsLockOff.reg and perform a warmboot. Note: Setting CapsLock to On using this method does not display the CapsLock icon in the Windows CE taskbar. The current status of CapsLock can be changed with the CAPS key, however this method does not change CapsLock behavior upon reboot. Note: These utilities affect the behavior of the CapsLock on warmboot. After a coldboot, CapsLock is disabled. Configuring IPv6 By default, IPv6 is enabled and an IPv6 broadcast message is sent on power up. To disable IPv6, run \Windows\ipv6Disable.reg and perform a warmboot. To enable IPv6, run \Windows\ipv6Enable.reg and perform a warmboot. Note: These utilities affect the behavior of IPv6 on warmboot. After a coldboot, IPv6 is enabled. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H API Calls 117 Command-line Utility Command line utilities can be executed by Start | Run | [program name]. COLDBOOT.EXE Command line utility which performs a cold boot (all data in RAM is erased). The command is not case-sensitive. Passwords are lost upon cold boot. If a password is set, that password must be entered to begin the cold boot power cycle process. PrtScrn.EXE Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in .BMP format in the \System folder. Tap Start | Run | then type prtscrn and tap OK, or press Enter. There is a 10 second delay before the screen print is made. The device beeps and screen captured file (scrnnnnn.bmp) is placed in the \System folder. The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each time the PrtScrn function is activated. The command is not case-sensitive. API Calls See Also: LXE CE API Programming Guide E-SW-WINAPIPG The LXE CE API Programming Guide documents only the LXE-specific API calls for the mobile device. It is intended as an addition to the standard Microsoft Windows CE API documentation. Details of many of the calls in the LXE guide may be found in Microsoft’s documentation. The APIs documented in the programming guide are included in the file LXEAPI.ZIP, which is in the LXE MX3X SDK kit. See “Accessories”. For ease of software development, the files LXEAPI.H and LXEAPI.LIB are available in the MX3X SDK, which are the include files and the link library for the DLL, respectively. Note that this DLL is installed in mobile device images with a version number of 1.2 or higher (as displayed on the screen during bootup). A full SDK is now included for Microsoft Embedded Visual C++ 4.0 (which is available free on the Microsoft website). E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 118 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration An MX3X device manufactured before October 2006 must have drivers and system files upgraded before it can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline. If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device. Briefly . . . The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the mobile device by LXE; however, the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface. Note: LXE recommends serial communication with an MX3X be performed using the serial port on the MX3X endcap rather than using a docking cradle serial port. Note: On LXE mobile devices with integrated scanners, the Scanner Wedge has primary control of the serial ports and must be configured properly to allow the Enabler to access the serial ports. Enabler Install Process • Doubletap the Avalanche Enabler CAB file in the System folder. The filename is LXE_MX3X_ENABLER.CAB. • Warm boot the mobile device. Enabler Uninstall Process To remove the LXE Avalanche Enabler from a Windows CE mobile device: • Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System folder. • Warm boot the mobile device. The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running. See Stop the Enabler Service. If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder, warm boot the mobile device, immediately delete the Avalanche folder, and then perform another warm boot. Orphaned Packages To prevent the enabler from restoring parameters, delete orphaned packages through the Wavelink Management Console (refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Manager User Guide for details and instruction). MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 119 Stop the Enabler Service To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Management Console: 1. Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop. 2. Select File | Settings. Enter the password. 3. Select the Startup/Shutdown tab. 4. Select the “Do not monitor or launch Enabler” parameter to prevent automatic monitoring upon startup. 5. Select Stop Monitoring for an immediate shutdown of all enabler update functionality upon exiting the user interface. 6. Click the OK button to save the changes. 7. Reboot the device if necessary. Update Monitoring Overview There are three methods by which the Enabler on an LXE device can communicate with the Agent running on the host machine. • Wired via a serial cable between the Agent PC and the LXE device. • Wired via a USB connection, using ActiveSync, between the Agent PC and the mobile device. • Wirelessly via the 2.4GHz network card and an access point After installing the Enabler on the mobile unit, a reboot is required for the Enabler to begin normal functionality. Following a mobile device reboot, the Enabler searches for an Agent, first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_MX3X. The Enabler running on LXE Windows CE devices will attempt to access COM1, COM2, and COM3. “Agent not found” will be reported if the agent is not located or a serial port is not present or available (COM port settings can be verified using the LXE scanner applet in the Control Panel). The wireless connection is made using the default network interface on the mobile device therefore the device must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed. If an Agent or Management Console is found, the Enabler will automatically attempt to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile. The Enabler will also automatically download and process all available packages. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 120 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings Once the connection to the Agent is established, the Enabler will attempt to apply all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile. The success of the application of settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler. These local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche Management Console. The default Enabler adapter control setting are: • Manage network settings – enabled • Use Avalanche network profile – enabled • Manage wireless settings – disabled for Windows CE Units To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings: 1. Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop. 2. Select File | Settings. Enter the password. 3. Select the Adapters tab. 4. Choose settings for the “Use Manual Settings” parameter. 5. Choose settings for “Manage Network Settings”, “Manage Wireless Settings” and “Use Avalanche Network Profile”. 6. Click the OK button to save the changes. 7. Reboot the device. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_MX3X. See Also: “LXE Computers and Wavelink Avalanche User’s Guide”. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 121 Enabler Configuration The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking: either the Avalanche icon on the desktop or Taskbar Avalanche Icon or selecting Avalanche from the Programs menu. The opening screen presents the user with the connection status and a navigation menu. Figure 3-22 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen File View Help Connect Updates Adapter Info Abort Programs About Settings Icons Scan Config List Exit Details Launchable All Packages Time on Taskbar Device Status E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 122 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration File Menu Options Connect The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual connection to the Agent and Management Console. The connection methods, by default, are wireless and COM connections. Any updates available will be applied to the mobile device immediately upon a successful connection. Abort Stop transmission. Settings The Settings option under the File menu allows the user to access the control panel to locally configure the Enabler settings. The Enabler control panel is, by default, password protected. The default password is system. The password is not case-sensitive. Scan Config Note: LXE does not support the Scan Configuration feature on Windows CE devices. The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that can be created using the Avalanche Management Console utilities. Refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Manager User Guide for details. Exit The Exit option is password protected. The default password is leave. The password is not case-sensitive. If changes were made on the Startup/Shutdown tab screen, then after entering the password, tap OK and the following screen is displayed: Change the option if desired. Tap the X button to cancel Exit. Tap the OK button to exit the Avalanche applet. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 123 Avalanche Update Settings Access: Start | Avalanche | File | Settings Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the mobile device. LXE recommends changing and then saving the changes (reboot) before connecting to the network. Alternatively, the Agent on the Wavelink Avalanche Management Console can be disabled until needed (refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Manager User Guide for details). Menu Options Settings Tab Function Connection Enter the IP Address or host name of the Agent portion of the Avalanche Management Console. Set the order in which serial ports or RF are used to check for the presence of the Agent. Execution Unavailable in this release. LXE recommends using AppLock, which is resident on each Windows mobile device. Server Contact Setup synchronization, scheduled Agent contact, suspend and reboot settings. Startup/Shutdown Set options for Enabler program startup or shutdown. Scan Config This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that is created by the Avalanche Management Console. Not currently supported by LXE. Display Set up the Windows display at startup, on connect and during normal mode. The settings can be adjusted by the user. Shortcuts Add, delete and update shortcuts to user-allowable applications. Adapters Enable or disable network and wireless settings. Select an adapter and switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings. Status View the current adapter signal strength and quality, IP address, MAC address, SSID, BSSID and Link speed. The user cannot edit this information. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 124 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Connection Figure 3-23 Connection Options Avalanche Server Address Enter the IP Address or host name of the Agent assigned to the mobile device. Check Serial Connection Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection to the Agent before checking for a wireless connection to the Agent. Disable ActiveSync Disable ActiveSync connection with the Agent. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 125 Execution Note the dimmed options on this panel. This menu option is designed to manage downloaded applications for automatic execution upon startup. Figure 3-24 Execution Options (Dimmed) Auto-Execute Selection An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Management system can be run automatically following each boot. Select Auto-Execute App The drop-down box provides a list of applications that have been installed with the Avalanche Management System. Delay before execution Time delay before launching Auto-Execute application. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 126 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Server Contact Figure 3-25 Server Contact Options Sync Clock Reset the time on the mobile computer based on the time on the Agent host PC. Contact at startup Connect to the Agent when the Enabler is accessed. Contact when cradled Initiate connection to the Agent based on a docking event. Contact Periodically Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact the Agent and query for updates at a regular interval beginning at a specific time. Wakeup device if suspended If the time interval for periodic contact with the Agent occurs, a mobile device that is in Suspend Mode can ‘wakeup’ and process updates. Reboot before attempt Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Agent. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 127 Startup/Shutdown LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6. Figure 3-26 Startup / Shutdown Options Do not monitor or launch Enabler When the device boots, do not launch the Enabler application and do not attempt to connect to the Agent. Monitor for updates Attempt to connect to the Agent and process any updates that are available. Do not launch the Enabler application. Monitor and launch Enabler Attempt to connect to the Agent and process any updates that are available. Launch the Enabler application. Manage Taskbar (Lock or Hide) Note the dimmed options. The Enabler can restrict user access to other applications when the user interface is accessed by either locking or hiding the taskbar. Program Shutdown (Continue or Stop monitoring) The system administrator can control whether the Enabler continues to monitor the Agent for updates once the Enabler application is exited. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 128 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Scan Config Note: Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche System but is not currently supported by LXE on Windows CE. Figure 3-27 Scan Config Option Display Figure 3-28 Window Display Options Update Window Display The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of the connection with the Agent. At startup Half screen, Hidden or Full screen. Default is Half screen. On connect As is, Half screen, full screen, Locked full screen. Default is As is. Normal Half screen, Hidden or As is. Default is As is. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 129 Shortcuts LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6. Figure 3-29 Application Shortcuts Configure shortcuts to other applications on the mobile device. Shortcuts are viewed and activated in the Programs panel. This limits the user’s access to certain applications when the Enabler is controlling the mobile device display. LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. See Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 130 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Adapters Note: LXE recommends the user review the network settings configuration utilities and the default values in Chapter 5 before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet. Figure 3-30 Adapters Options – Network Manage Network Setting When enabled, the Enabler will control the network settings. This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Management Console and is enabled by default. Manage Wireless Settings When enabled, the Enabler will control the wireless settings. This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Management Console and is disabled by default. This parameter setting does not apply to Summit Clients only. Current Adapter Lists all network adapters currently installed on the mobile device. Primary Adapter Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter (active only if there are multiple network adapters). Icon on taskbar Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may, optionally, override the standard Windows taskbar. Use Avalanche Network Profile The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the Management Console. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Avalanche Icon 131 Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network Profile tab which will display current network settings. Figure 3-31 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed Use Manual Settings When enabled, the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings coming from the Avalanche Management Console and use only the network settings on the mobile device. Properties Icon Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog applet. From here, the user can configure Network, DNS and Wireless parameters using the displays shown below: Note: A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options. Network DNS Wireless For descriptions of these Enabler parameters, refer to Chapter 5 “Wireless Network Configuration”. LXE does not recommend enabling “Manage Wireless Settings” for Summit Client devices. Figure 3-32 Manual Settings Properties Panels E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 132 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings, the Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters panel (see Figure titled Adapters Options – Network). Until these options are enabled, the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third-party software associated with these settings. Status The Status panel displays the current status of the mobile device network adapter selected in the drop down box. Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button. When tapped, the signal strength, signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter. It also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the dropdown menu.. Figure 3-33 Status Display Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the mobile device. Speed is dependent on signal strength. Troubleshooting Cold Boot If a device managed by Avalanche is cold-booted, a warmboot MUST be performed following the coldboot. Failure to perform the warmboot will leave the device in an undetermined configuration and it may not perform as expected. If the intention is to stop using Avalanche to manage the device configuration, please see “Enabler Uninstall Process” earlier in this section. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Reflash the Mobile Device 133 Reflash the Mobile Device Note: When reflashing, LXE recommends using a Compact Flash card that is greater than 64MB. Files to be loaded on the CF card are: NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT Caution ! Make sure the main battery has been fully charged before beginning the reflash procedure. Depleting the backup battery during the reflash process can result in corrupted files. Requirement: A screwdriver (not supplied by LXE) Preparation • LXE recommends that installation of the CF card be performed on a clean, uncluttered, well-lit surface. The CF card is slightly larger than a postage stamp. • Remove the screws on the endcap and slide the endcap to the side, being very careful not to disconnect the ribbon cables, damage the leads to the external power jack, the headphone jack or the antenna. The antenna may be taped to the endcap so great care must be taken when loosening the endcap. • Carefully remove or loosen all cables to an existing CF card. Remove the CF card. How To : Reflash using Keypress Method 1. Place the compact flash card with new image files on it in the right hand slot. 2. Double-tap My Computer, then Storage Card folder. 3. Select NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT. Select Edit | Copy. 4. Tap Back Arrow. Double-tap System Folder. 5. Select Edit | Paste. When asked “Overwrite ?”, tap Yes to All. 6. When the copy process finishes, remove the CF card. 7. Select Start | Run and type Coldboot. 8. Before the splash screen appears, press and hold down the key. Continue to hold it down until the displays shows “Writing to boot flash”. Note: 9. If you do not press and hold the key quickly enough, the display shows “Loading OS Image”. Remove the main battery for 2 seconds, re-insert the battery and press the Power button. Press and hold the key again. The mobile device will automatically reboot after flashing the bootloader. “Loading OS Image” is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading, all software upgrades are complete. 10. Replace the endcap, being careful not to pinch any leads or cables. The touchscreen will need to be re-calibrated. Once the bootloader is loaded and the files are copied onto the internal ATA drive, you can reflash the bootloader at any time by rebooting the MX3X, and holding down the key on the keypad before the splash screen appears. Wait until the splash screen displays “Writing new bootloader”, and you can release the key. When complete (3-5 seconds), the MX3X will reboot and startup with the new bootloader again. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 134 Clearing Persistent Storage How To: Reflash using TAG file Method 1. Place the compact flash card with new image files on it in the right hand slot. 2. Double-tap My Computer, then Storage Card folder. 3. Select NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT. Select Edit | Copy. 4. Tap Back Arrow. Double-tap \System folder. 5. Select Edit | Paste. When asked “Overwrite ?”, tap Yes to All. 6. Additionally a REFLASH.TAG file is needed to trigger the reflash. This file can be created on the MX3X or copied to it along with the system files. The contents of the file are unimportant; but the file must be named REFLASH.TAG and it must be in the \System folder with the new system load. 7. When the copy process finishes, remove the CF card. 8. Select Start | Run and type Coldboot. 9. When booting, the MX3X looks for a file named REFLASH.TAG in the \System folder. When REFLASH.TAG is encountered, the MX3X loads a new bootloader image (eboot.nb0) into the boot flash. The tag file is deleted and the MX3X is rebooted to begin using the new boot loader. If there is no .nb0 file it does not re-flash and deletes the REFLASH.TAG file to prevent an endless cycle. 10. The mobile device automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader. “Loading OS Image” is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading, all software upgrades are complete 11. Replace the endcap, being careful not to pinch any leads or cables. The touchscreen will need to be re-calibrated. Clearing Persistent Storage Cold boot sets all registry settings back to LXE factory defaults. No other clearing is available or necessary. Important: Contact LXE Customer Support prior to upgrading MX3X Windows CE .NET 4.2 to Windows CE 5.0. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Chapter 4 Scanner Introduction Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge parameters, enable or disable symbologies from being scanned, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. Determine Your Scanner Software Version Integrated Scanner Programming Guide and the Reset All barcode. After scanning the Reset All (to factory defaults) barcode for the specific scan engine, the next step is Start | Control Panel | Scanner. Tap the OK button and close the scanner applet. This action will synchronize all scanner formats. Note: Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver and OS versions in MX3X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the most current software and drivers for your mobile device. To identify the software version, tap the “About” icon in the Control Panel. Scanner Control Menu Structure Versions Tabs Main Keys COM1 COM2 COM3 Go to . . . . Chapter 3, “System Configuration”, section titled “Scanner” This chapter, section titled “Advanced”. This chapter, section titled “Barcode Manipulation”. Figure 4-1 Determine Your Scanner Software Version Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API functions. While the changed configuration is being read, the Scanner LED is solid amber. The scanner is not operational during the configuration update. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 136 Barcode Manipulation Barcode Processing Overview Note: Steps 1-7 describe the barcode manipulation. Steps 8-12 describe how the manipulated data is built. Step 13 describes how the manipulated data is output. The complete sequence of barcode processing is as follows: 1. Scanned barcode is tested for a code ID. If one is found, it is stripped from the data, and the settings for the symbology specified are used. Otherwise, the All symbology settings are used. 2. If symbology is disabled, the scan is rejected. 3. If the length of data (minus the code ID) is out of specified Min/Max range, the scan is rejected. 4. Strip leading data bytes unconditionally. 5. Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally. 6. Parse for, and strip if found, Barcode Data strings. 7. Replace any control characters with string, as configured. 8. Add prefix string to output buffer. 9. If Code ID is *not* stripped, add saved code ID from above to output buffer. 10. Add processed barcode string from above to output buffer. 11. Add suffix string to output buffer. 12. Add a terminating NUL to the output buffer, in case the data is processed as a string. 13. If key output is enabled, start the process to output keys. If control characters are encountered: • If Translate All is set, key is translated to CTRL + char, and output. • If Translate All is not set, and key has a valid VK code, key is output. • Otherwise, key is ignored (not output). The data is ready to be read by applications. See “Barcode Processing Examples” at the end of the “Barcode Manipulation” section. Barcode Manipulation Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner If your scanner applet has an “Advanced” tab instead of a “Barcode” tab, please see section titled “Advanced” at the end of this chapter. Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Power Port 1 while asleep Enable Internal Scanner Sound Send Key Messages (WEDGE) Bluetooth Output Enable COM3 Port 2 Enable Internal Scanner Sound Send key messages WEDGE MX3X Reference Guide COM1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled (Dimmed) Disabled (Dimmed) Disabled (Dimmed) Disabled Enabled Enabled E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 137 Factory Default Settings Main Bluetooth Disabled (Dimmed) Output enable Disabled (Dimmed) COM3 Disabled (Dimmed) Keys Left Scan key Scan Right Scan key Enter key COM Ports (COM1 - COM2 – COM3) Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 Power on Pin 9 (+5v) Disabled Barcode Enable Code ID None Symbology Settings Enable Dimmed / Min - 1 to Max - all AIM (ID) Enable Dimmed Symbol (ID) Enable Dimmed Custom Null Control Character Disabled Translate All Disabled Character/Replacement NULl / Ignore(drop) Custom Identifiers Name Blank ID Code Blank Notes: • If the internal scanner has to be configured to operate at any communication settings other than 9600, N, 8, 1 and the MX3X either loses power or a cold boot command is entered, the Scanner applet must be reconfigured to match the scanner communication settings. • LXE 8300 Tethered Scanners and Symbology Settings (AIM ID) – Before manipulating data received from 8300 tethered scanners, and Symbology settings are desired, the user must configure and append the Symbology ID as a prefix. • ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is enabled in the Scanner applet as scanner input. For example, if COM 1 is being used by the scanner, COM 1 can’t be used by any other program. • The MX3P does not have an integrated scanner or RFID capability. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 138 Barcode Manipulation Main Tab Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main Figure 4-2 Scanner Control / Main Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When Power Port 1 while asleep is checked, whichever serial port is enabled as Port 1 will remain powered while the device is in Suspend, at the cost of reduced battery life. This allows a tethered scanner to wake the device by pressing the trigger on the scanner. When Send Key Messages (WEDGE) is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using “Wedge”. Even if Send Key Messages is enabled (“key mode”), the data is still available using the scanner APIs (“block mode”). When using the scanner APIs, refer to the “CE API Programming Guide” and the ClearBuf setting. When two applications are reading the data using block mode, ClearBuf must be off so that the data is not erased when read. Note: The user can also open the WDG: device and perform standard OS read functions to retrieve the data without using the LXE APIs. When Enable Internal Scanner Sound is checked, the functionality of the internal scanner driver engine includes audible tones on good scan (at the maximum db supported by the speaker) and failed scan. Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from a tethered scanner, and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep from the MX3X on the same data. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 139 Keys Tab Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Keys Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / Keys Tab The Keys tab sets up what happens when one of the Scan keys are pressed. Note that the two keys can do the same or different functions. Note: The left and right Scan buttons have no effect on tethered external scanners connected to an RS-232 connector on the endcap. Assigned Function Disabled When either scan button is set to Disabled, it does nothing when pressed. Scan When set to “Scan” the integrated scanner is activated. If no integrated scanner is present, the Scan selection is greyed out. Enter When set to “Enter”, both the Enter key and the (Scan button) / Enter key perform the same function. Tab When set to “Tab”, both the Tab key and the (Scan button) / Tab key perform the same function. Field Exit 5250 devices only. When a Scan key is set to “Field Exit”, the (Scan button) key press causes the cursor to exit an input field. A field exit key press functions as a Pause key press on non-5250 devices. Virtual key When set to “Virtual”, the Virtual Left (Scan button) key produces an F20 and the Virtual Right (Scan button) key produces an F21. RFID When enabled, the Right Scan / Left Scan (button) key functions as the RFID tag reader trigger. See the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide” for directions. Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “Utilities”). LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Scanner. Set either the ScanCodeLeft or ScanCodeRight to be the scan code of the key to be used as the virtual key when the Virtual Left key (Left Scan key) or Virtual Right key (Right Scan key) is pressed. The registry requires a decimal value. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 140 Barcode Manipulation COM Port Tabs Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM1 or COM2 or COM3 Do not connect a tethered scanner to the USB labelled ports: COM1, COM2 and COM3 Panel Options are Identical. Figure 4-4 Scanner Control / COM Port Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The COM 1 tab contains the same parameters as the COM 2 and COM 3 Tab. “Power on Pin 9” on the COM 2 panel is disabled. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 141 Barcode Tab Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode The Scanner application (Wedge) can only enable or disable the processing of a barcode inside the Wedge software. The Scanner application enables or disables the Code ID that may be scanned. Enabling or disabling a specific barcode symbology is done manually using the configuration barcode in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide (available on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website). Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop-down box: None, AIM ID, Symbol ID, or Custom ID. Figure 4-5 Scanner Control / Barcode tab Buttons Symbology Settings Individually enable or disable a barcode from being scanned, set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode before transmission. Ctrl Char Mapping Define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters (values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes. Custom Identifiers Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of barcode data which acts as a Code ID. After a Custom Identifier is defined, Symbology Settings can be defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs. See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 142 Barcode Manipulation Enable Code ID This parameter programs the internal scanner to transmit the specified Code ID and/or determines the type of barcode identifier being processed. If the scanner being configured is not an integrated scanner, the scanner driver expects that the setting has been programmed into the scanner externally, and that the data will be coming in with the specified Code ID attached. Transmission of the Code ID is enabled at the scanner for all barcode symbologies, not for an individual symbology. Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate between symbologies. Options None Programs the internal scanner to disable transmission of a Code ID. The only entry in the Symbology popup list is All. AIM Programs the internal scanner to transmit the AIM ID with each barcode. The combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies for that platform, plus any configured Custom code IDs. Symbol Programs the internal scanner to transmit the Symbol ID with each barcode. The combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with the known Symbol ID symbologies for that platform, plus any configured Custom Code IDs. Custom Does not change the scanner’s Code ID transmission setting. The combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with any configured Custom Code IDs. Notes • When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is not enabled, the code ID is sent as part of the barcode data to an application. • When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is enabled, the entire custom code ID string is stripped (i.e. treated as a Code ID). • UPC/EAN Codes only: The code id for supplemental barcodes is not stripped. • When Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol, Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the list of standard Code IDs. • When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code IDs. • When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the end of the Custom Code ID. For example, if a Custom Code ID ‘AAA’ is created to be read in combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 ‘]A1’, the Custom Code ID must be entered with the AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID : ]A1AAA. • When Enable Code ID is set to None, Custom Code IDs are ignored. • Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog. They are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver. This allows custom IDs, based on actual code IDs, to be processed before the Code ID. • The tethered scanner operation cannot be controlled by the MX3X scanner application; therefore, a ‘good’ beep may be sounded from the tethered scanner even if a barcode from a tethered scanner is rejected because of the configuration specified. The MX3X emits a bad scan beep, to indicate the barcode has been rejected. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 143 Barcode – Symbology Settings The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured. The features available on the Symbology Settings dialog include the ability to individually enable or disable a barcode from scanning, set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode. The Symbology drop-down list contains all symbologies supported on the MX3X. An asterisk appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the default value. Each time a Symbology is changed, the settings are saved as soon as the OK button is tapped. Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop-down list. Figure 4-6 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings Clear This button will erase any programmed overrides, returning to the default settings for the selected symbology. If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology, a confirmation dialog appears, then all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults, and all star (*) indications are removed from the list of Symbologies. The order in which these settings are processed are: • Code ID • Leading / Trailing • Barcode Data Note: When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Barcode tab and when All is selected in the Symbology field, Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the user is not allowed to change them, to prevent deactivating the scanner completely. When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed, the settings in this dialog become the defaults, used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies. This is also true for Custom IDs, where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user. Note: In Custom mode on the Barcode tab, any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be stripped, because they will not be recognized as code IDs. If a specific symbology’s settings have been configured, a star (*) will appear next to it in the Symbology drop-down box, so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their defaults. If a particular symbology has been configured, the entire set of parameters from that symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology. In other words, either the settings for the configured symbology will be used, or the default settings are used, not a combination of the two. If a symbology has not been configured (does not have an * next to it) the settings for “All” are used which are not necessarily the defaults. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 144 Barcode Manipulation Parameters Enable This checkbox enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the symbology field. The scanner driver searches the beginning of the barcode data for the type of ID specified in the Barcode tab – Enable Code ID field (AIM or Symbol) plus any custom identifiers. When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming barcode data, if the symbology is disabled, the barcode is rejected. Otherwise, the other settings in the dialog are applied and the barcode is processed. If the symbology is disabled, all other fields on this dialog are grayed. When there are no customized settings, and the Enable checkbox is unchecked (All is selected and no other settings are customized) a confirmation dialog is presented to the user “You are about to disable all scan input – Is this what you want to do?”. Tap the Yes button or the No button. Tap the X button to close the dialog without making a decision. If there are customized settings, uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology. This results in disabling all symbologies except the customized ones. Min This field specifies the minimum length that the barcode data (not including Code ID) must meet to be processed. Any barcode scanned that is less than the number of characters specified in the Min field is rejected. The default for this field is 1. Max This field specifies the maximum length that the barcode data (not including Code ID) can be to be processed. Any barcode scanned that has more characters than specified in the Max field is rejected. The default for this field is All. If the value entered is greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology, the maximum valid length will be used instead. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 145 Strip Leading/Trailing Control This group of controls determines what data is removed from the barcode before the data is buffered for the application. If all values are set, Code ID takes precedence over Leading and Trailing; Barcode Data stripping is performed last. Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix are added, so does not affect them. See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. Figure 4-7 Strip Leading/Trailing Controls If the total number being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode data, it becomes a zero byte data string. If, in addition, Strip Code ID is enabled, and no prefix or suffix is configured, the processing will return a zero-byte data packet, which will be rejected. The operation of each type of stripping is defined below: Leading This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the barcode data (not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by default. Trailing This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the barcode data (not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by default. Code ID Strips the Code ID based on the type code id specified in the Enable Code ID field in the Barcode tab. Programmed custom identifiers are always checked (in the order they are entered) and stripped, regardless of Enable Code ID setting. By default, Code ID stripping is enabled for all symbologies (meaning code IDs will be stripped, unless specifically configured otherwise). E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 146 Barcode Manipulation Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the barcode. Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button. The entry is added to the Match list. To remove an entry from the Match list, highlight the entry in the list and tap the Remove button. Tap the OK button to store any additions, deletions or changes. Figure 4-8 Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data Edit Buttons Add Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button. Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list. Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert. Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list. Edit Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing. The Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the values for the current item in the list are updated. Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in the Name and ID Code text boxes. Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it. Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time. Notes • Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete, and is not affected by any stripping settings. • If the stripping configuration results in a 0 length barcode, a ‘good’ beep will still be sounded, since barcode data was read from the scanner. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 147 Match List Rules The data in the list is processed by the rules listed below: • Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list. If the list contains ABC and AB, in that order, incoming data with ABC will match first, and the AB will have no effect. • When a match between the first characters of the barcode and a string from the list is found, that string is stripped from the barcode data. • Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached. • If the wildcard * is not specified, the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the barcode data. The string ABC* strips off the prefix ABC. The string *XYZ will strip off the suffix XYZ. The string ABC*XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together. More than one * in a configuration string is not allowed. (The user interface will not prevent it, but results would not be as expected, as only the first * is used in parsing to match the string.) • The question mark wildcard ? may be used to match any single character in the incoming data. For example, the data AB?D will match ABCD, ABcD, or AB0D, but not ABDE. It is valid to have more than one ? in a string to match multiple characters. • The Barcode Data is saved per symbology configured. The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured. • Note that the Code ID (if any are configured) is ignored by this dialog, regardless of the setting of Strip: Code ID in the Symbologies dialog. If Strip Code ID is disabled, then the barcode data to match must include the Code ID. If Strip Code ID is enabled, the data should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 148 Barcode Manipulation Add Prefix/Suffix Control See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. Figure 4-9 Add Prefix/Suffix Controls Use this option to specify a string of text, hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the beginning (prefix) or the end (suffix) of the barcode data. Up to 19 characters can be included in the string. The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding. Please see the “Hat Encoding” section in Appendix B for a list of characters with their hex and hat-encoded values. Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values. Add Prefix To enable a prefix, check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When barcode data is processed, the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any other data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping settings do not affect the prefix. The prefix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the prefix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured. Add Suffix To enable a suffix, check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When barcode data is processed, the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the barcode data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping settings do not affect the suffix. The suffix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the suffix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured. See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” in Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. Note: Non-ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option. NonASCII equivalent keys include the function keys (e.g. ), arrow keys, Page up, Page down, Home, and End. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 149 Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters (values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes. Control characters can be replaced with user-defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values. In key message mode, control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key sequences. Figure 4-10 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” at the end of Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. Translate All When Translate All is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode. The wedge provides a one-to-one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control+character sequence of keystrokes. If control characters are translated, the translation is performed on the barcode data, prefix, and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated. Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode (on the Main tab) selected. In Key Message mode, when this option is enabled, control characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent ‘control’ key keystroke sequence (13 [0x0d] is translated to Control+M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL, SHIFT, and m keys on the keypad). Additionally, when Translate All is disabled, any control code which has a keystroke equivalent (enter, tab, escape, backspace, etc.) is output as a keystroke. Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped. Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name. Refer to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their names. When a character name is selected from the drop down box, the default text Ignore (drop) is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control. Ignore (drop) is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored. Once the user types any character into the Replacement edit control, reselecting the character from the Character drop down box redisplays the default Ignore (drop) in the Replacement edit control. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 150 Barcode Manipulation Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character. Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down box, typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control (according to the formats defined above) and then selecting Assign. The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button. For example, if ‘Carriage Return’ is replaced by Line Feed (by specifying ‘^J’ or ‘0x0A’) in the configuration, the value 0x0d received in any scanned barcode (or defined in the prefix or suffix) will be replaced with the value 0x0a. The Wedge then sends Ctrl+J to the receiving application, rather than Ctrl+M. List Box The list box shows all user-defined control characters and their assigned replacements. All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned. Delete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted. When an entry (or entries) is highlighted, and Delete is selected, the highlighted material is deleted from the list box. Barcode – Custom Identifiers Code IDs can be defined by the user. This allows processing parameters to be configured for barcodes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for barcodes that have data embedded at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID. These are called “custom” Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the Symbology dialog, unless Enable Code ID is set to None. When the custom Code ID is found in a barcode, the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the barcode data. The dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured. It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs (if Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol), or to replace the list of standard code IDs (if Enable Code ID is set to Custom). When Enable Code ID is set to None, custom code IDs are ignored. Note: Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog, and are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself. This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID itself. Note: When Strip: Code ID is enabled, the entire custom Code ID string is stripped (i.e., treated as a Code ID). MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 151 Figure 4-11 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers After adding, changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list, tap the OK button to save changes and return to the Barcode panel. Parameters Name text box Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID. Names must be unique from each other; however, the Name and ID Code may have the same value. Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the custom Code ID in a user-friendly manner. Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list. ID Code text box ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a barcode that acts as an identifier (the actual Code ID). Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list. Buttons Add Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button. Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custon ID list. Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert. Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list. Edit Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing. The Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the values for the current item in the list are updated. Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in the Name and ID Code text boxes. Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it. Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 152 Barcode Manipulation Control Code Replacement Examples Configuration data Ignore(drop) Printable text Hat-encoded text Escaped hatencoded text Hex-encoded text Escaped hexencoded text MX3X Reference Guide Translation The control character is discarded from the barcode data, prefix and suffix Text is substituted for Control Character. The hat-encoded text is translated to the equivalent hex value. The hatencoding to pass thru to the application. The hexencoded text is translated to the equivalent hex value. The hexencoding to pass thru to the application. Example Control Character ESCape ‘Ignore (drop)’ 0x1B in the barcode is discarded. Start of TeXt ‘STX’ Carriage Return ‘^M’ Horizontal Tab ‘\^I’ Carriage Return ‘0x0A’ 0x02 in a barcode is converted to the text ‘STX’. Value 0x0d in a barcode is converted to the value 0x0d. Value 0x09 in a barcode is converted to the text ‘^I’. Value 0x0D in a barcode is converted to a value 0x0A. Vertical Tab ‘\0x0A’ or ‘0\x0A’ Example configuration Translated data Value 0x0C is a barcode is converted to text ‘0x0A’ E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Barcode Manipulation 153 Barcode Processing Examples The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix/suffix configurations. The examples assume that the scanner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier. Symbology All EAN-128 (]C1) EAN-13 (]E0) Intrlv 2 of 5 (]IO) Code93 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Min length 1 4 1 1 Max length all all all 10 Strip Code ID Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Strip Leading 3 0 3 3 ‘*123’ ‘1*’ ‘456’ 0 0 3 3 Prefix ‘aaa’ ‘bbb’ ‘ccc’ ‘ddd’ Suffix ‘www’ ‘xxx’ ‘yyy’ ‘zzz’ Enable Strip Barcode Data Strip Trailing Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table, below are examples of scanned barcode data and results of these manipulations. Barcode Symbology Raw Scanner Data Resulting Data EAN-128 ]C11234567890123 bbb1234567890xxx EAN-128 ]C111234567890123 bbb11234567890xxx EAN-128 ]C1123 EAN-13 ]E01234567890987 ccc]E04567890yyy EAN-13 ]E01231234567890987 ccc]E0234567890yyy EAN-13 ]E01234 ccc]E0yyy I2/5 ]I04444567890987654321 I2/5 ]I04444567890123 ddd7890zzz I2/5 ]I0444 dddzzz I2/5 ]I022245622 ddd45zzz Code-93 ]G0123456 < rejected > (disabled) Code-93 ]G0444444 < rejected > (disabled) Code-39 ]A01234567890 aaa4567890www Code-39 full ASCII ]A41231234567890 aaa1234567890www Code-39 ]A4 < rejected > (too short) < rejected > (too long) < rejected > (too short) Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep (from the external scanner), and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 154 Advanced Advanced Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner If your scanner applet has a “Barcode” tab instead of an “Advanced” tab, please see section titled “Barcode Manipulation” at the beginning of this chapter. Factory Default Settings Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Internal Port 2 Disabled Power Port 1 while asleep Disabled Send key messages WEDGE Enabled Bluetooth Disabled (Not supported) Output enable Disabled (dimmed) Keys Left Scan Right Enter COM Ports (COM1- COM2 – COM3) Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 Advanced or Barcode Translate Disabled Strip Leading 0 characters Strip Trailing 0 characters Prefix Disabled Suffix Disabled Barcode Advanced Barcode Processing Disabled Notes: • If the internal scanner has to be configured to operate at any communication settings other than 9600, N, 8, 1 and the MX3X either loses power or a cold boot command is entered, the Scanner applet must be reconfigured to match the scanner communication settings. • ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is enabled in the Scanner applet as scanner input. For example, if COM 1 is being used by the scanner, COM 1 can’t be used by any other program. • The MX3P does not have an integrated scanner or RFID capability. • Bluetooth Manager, Bluetooth service or options are not available for all MX3X devices or in all MX3X software releases. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 155 Main Tab Note: Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver and OS versions in MX3X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain current software and drivers for your mobile device. Figure 4-12 Advanced – Main Tab Parameter Default Options Port 1 Internal Disabled, COM1, COM3, Internal, Cradle, Bluetooth, Output Enable. Port 2 Disabled Disabled, RFID Internal, COM3, Internal, Cradle, Bluetooth, Output Enable Power Port 1 while Asleep Disabled Enabled, Disabled. If “Power Port 1 while asleep” is checked, whichever serial port is enabled as Port 1 will remain powered while the device is in Suspend, at the cost of reduced battery life. This allows a tethered scanner to wake the device by pressing the trigger on the scanner. Send Key Messages Enabled Enabled, Disabled. If “Send Key Messages …” is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using “Wedge”. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The Scan buttons have no effect on tethered external scanners connected to the RS-232 connector on the endcap. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 156 Advanced Keys Tab Note: Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver and OS versions in MX3X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain current software and drivers for your mobile device. Parameter Default Options Left Scan Key Scan Disabled, Scan, Enter key, Tab key, Field Exit key, Virtual key, RFID (or RFID Read) Right Scan Key Enter key Disabled, Scan, Enter key, Tab key, Field Exit key, Virtual key, RFID (or RFID Read) • If there is no integrated scanner installed in the mobile device, the Left and Right Scan Keys default to Enter keys. • On a 5250 device with an integrated scanner, the Left Scan key defaults to Scan and the Right Scan key defaults to Field Exit key. The Keys tab sets up what happens when one of the Scan keys are pressed. Note that both keys can do the same or different functions. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Assigned Function Disabled When either scan key is set to Disabled, the mobile device does nothing when pressed. Scan When set to “Scan” the integrated scanner is activated. If no integrated scanner is present, the Scan selection is greyed out. Enter When set to “Enter”, both the Enter key and the (Scan button) / Enter key perform the same function. Tab When set to “Tab”, both the Tab key and the (Scan button) / Tab key perform the same function. Field Exit 5250 devices only. When a Scan key is set to “Field Exit”, the key press causes the cursor to exit an input field. A field exit key press functions as a Pause key press on non-5250 devices. Virtual When set to “Virtual”, the Virtual Left scan key produces an F20 and the Virtual Right scan key produces an F21. RFID When enabled, the Right Scan / Left Scan key functions as the RFID tag reader trigger. See the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide”. Change a Virtual Key (F20 or F21) Value Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “Utilities”). LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Scanner. Set either the ScanCodeLeft or ScanCodeRight to be the scan code of the key to be used as the virtual key when the Virtual Left key (Left Scan key) or Virtual Right key (Right Scan key) is pressed. The registry requires a decimal value. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 157 COM1, COM2, COM3 Tabs Do not connect a tethered scanner to the USB labelled ports: COM Default Options COM1 19200, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity Baud Rate – 115200 (115200 - RFID only), 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200 Power on pin 9 (+5v) Enabled Data Bits – 8, 7 Stop Bits – 1, 2 Parity – None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space COM2 9600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity Baud Rate – 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200 Power on pin 9 (+5v) Disabled Data Bits – 8, 7 Stop Bits – 1, 2 Parity – None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space COM3 9600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity Baud Rate – 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200 Power on pin 9 (+5v) Disabled Data Bits – 8, 7 Stop Bits – 1, 2 Parity – None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 158 Advanced Advanced Tab Note: Scanner control panel options are based on the installed software version levels, driver and OS versions in MX3X devices. Your Scanner options may or may not be as described in this section. Contact your LXE representative to obtain current software and drivers for your mobile device. Translate Control Codes Figure 4-13 Advanced – Translate Control Codes Note: If your Advanced tab scanner panel has four button choices, as shown above, then when the Prefix/Suffix button is tapped, CTRL codes are passed through in Block mode. If “Translate Control Codes” is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode. When “Translate Control Codes” is not checked and “Send Key Messages” is checked, CTRL codes are passed through in Block mode. Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters Figure 4-14 Advanced – Strip Leading/Trailing Characters This feature, when enabled, strips the specified number of characters from a barcode, either from the beginning (leading) or at the end (trailing), or both. When this feature and the Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix fetaures are both enabled, the leading and trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is appended. The configuration for stripping leading and trailing characters is specified independently. To enable, either or both of the checkboxes labeled Strip Leading and Strip Trailing must be checked. Then the number of characters to be stripped can be typed into the edit control or set using the spin control on the right of the edit control. The maximum number of characters that can be stripped is 99 characters for each leading and trailing number of characters. When the Strip Leading and Strip Trailing checkboxes are blank (or MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 159 disabled), the edit controls are disabled; however the last specified number of characters to strip is retained and dimmed. When the number of characters to be stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode a good read beep is sounded but all barcode data is discarded. Prefix / Suffix Figure 4-15 Advanced – Prefix/Suffix If Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix are combined with Strip Leading and / or Strip Trailing, the leading and / or trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is added. The mode for Prefix/Suffix feature is determined by the “Send Key Messages (WEDGE)” setting in the Main tab. When checked (enabled), the prefix/suffix feature is in Key Message mode. Key message mode sends the prefix, barcode, and suffix to the application with the focus as keystrokes. In Key message mode all keys on the keypad can be entered. When the “Send Key Messages” is not checked, Block mode is enabled. Block mode allows ASCII characters (0x0 – 0x7F), plus backspace, tab, delete, return and escape. In Block mode the prefix/suffix data is added to the beginning and end of the buffered barcode data that can then be read by an application from the WDG: device. Up to 19 characters can be specified for the prefix and up to 19 characters can be specified for the suffix. The characters can be text or control characters, e.g. tab, carriage return. The characters can be entered into the prefix and suffix text boxes by typing from the keypad, entering the key’s hex equivalent, or entering in hat ( ^ ) encoded delimited (8-bit code table) notation. • To enable the Prefix or Suffix processing, check the associated checkbox. When the box is checked, the edit controls to the right are enabled. Keys/characters are typed into the edit control following the checkbox. • Selecting the Add button then adds the key to the associated list of keys in the read-only edit control to the right of the Add / Clear buttons. The keys are shown as commadelimited strings. • To erase the Prefix or Suffix, select the read-only edit control that contains the currently configured Prefix or Suffix and select the Clear button. • The Add and Clear buttons function on the control that is selected when the button is pressed. • Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with ‘0x’. Control characters can also be entered using the ‘hat’ delimited notation, i.e. ^M for Carriage Return. • All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key. Some keypad keys are only valid if in “Key Message” mode. For example, the Function Keys (F1, PF1) are only valid in “Key Message” mode. See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” at the end of Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 160 Advanced Barcode Tab Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode tab Figure 4-16 Barcode Tab Prefix / Suffix Note: Prefix / Suffix is only available when Use Advanced Barcode Processing is disabled. Figure 4-17 Barcode – Prefix / Suffix Prefix/Suffix (and pre-existing data) is unavailable when Use Advanced Barcode Processing is enabled. Strip Leading / Strip Trailing Characters This feature, when enabled, strips the specified number of characters from a barcode, either from the beginning (leading) or at the end (trailing), or both. When this feature and the Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix features are both enabled, the leading and trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is appended. The configuration for stripping leading and trailing characters is specified independently. To enable, either or both of the checkboxes labeled Strip Leading and Strip Trailing must be checked. Then the number of characters to be stripped can be typed into the edit control or set using the spin control on the right of the edit control. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 161 The maximum number of characters that can be stripped is 99 characters for each leading and trailing number of characters. When the Strip Leading and Strip Trailing checkboxes are blank (or disabled), the edit controls are disabled; however the last specified number of characters to strip is retained and dimmed. When the number of characters to be stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode a good read beep is sounded but all barcode data is discarded. Prefix / Suffix If Add Prefix and / or Add Suffix are combined with Strip Leading and / or Strip Trailing, the leading and / or trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is added. The mode for Prefix/Suffix feature is determined by the “Send Key Messages (WEDGE)” setting in the Main tab. When checked (enabled), the prefix/suffix feature is in Key Message mode. Key message mode sends the prefix, barcode, and suffix to the application with the focus as keystrokes. In Key message mode all keys on the keypad can be entered. When the “Send Key Messages” is not checked, Block mode is enabled. Block mode allows ASCII characters (0x0 – 0x7F), plus backspace, tab, delete, return and escape. In Block mode the prefix/suffix data is added to the beginning and end of the buffered barcode data that can then be read by an application from the WDG: device. Up to 19 characters can be specified for the prefix and up to 19 characters can be specified for the suffix. The characters can be text or control characters, e.g. tab, carriage return. The characters can be entered into the prefix and suffix text boxes by typing from the keypad, entering the key’s hex equivalent, or entering in hat ( ^ ) encoded delimited (8-bit code table) notation. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H • To enable the Prefix or Suffix processing, check the associated checkbox. When the box is checked, the edit controls to the right are enabled. Keys/characters are typed into the edit control following the checkbox. • Selecting the Add button then adds the key to the associated list of keys in the read-only edit control to the right of the Add / Clear buttons. The keys are shown as commadelimited strings. • To erase the Prefix or Suffix, select the read-only edit control that contains the currently configured Prefix or Suffix and select the Clear button. • The Add and Clear buttons function on the control that is selected when the button is pressed. • Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with ‘0x’. Control characters can also be entered using the ‘hat’ delimited notation, i.e. ^M for Carriage Return. • All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key. Some keypad keys are only valid if in “Key Message” mode. For example, the Function Keys (F1, PF1) are only valid in “Key Message” mode. MX3X Reference Guide 162 Advanced Interaction between Strip Leading/Trailing and Prefix/Suffix Settings 1. Replacements are not done on the Prefix and Suffix, only the barcode data, for both Block and Key Message mode. Control characters in the Prefix and Suffix are translated when Translate All is enabled. 2. Replacements are done on the barcode data and then characters are stripped for both Strip Leading and Strip Trailing features. As an example, suppose we have the following data and configuration: The barcode scanned begins with Group Separator (GS) followed by the character ‘A’ Group Separator is translated to ‘GS’ Strip Leading is set to 2 In this case, the Group Separator is translated to ‘GS’ and then the ‘GS’ is stripped by the Strip Leading setting; rather than the Group Separator and ‘A’ being stripped. 3. If Translate All is enabled and replacements are assigned, the assigned replacements take precedence over the default one-to-one translation enabled by Translate all. For example if Translate All is enabled and Carriage Return is replaced by ^J, the value, 0x0d, in the barcode (prefix and suffix) are replaced with CTRL+Shift+J instead of CTRL+Shift+M keystrokes in Key Message mode. 4. Since the assigned replacements are applied before the Translate All is performed, if a control character is set to ‘Ignore (drop)’ by the assigned replacements, it is discarded before the Translate All processing is performed and is therefore not translated. 5. Since the assigned replacements are applied before the Translate All is performed, if a control character is set to text by the assigned replacements, the text is substituted for the control character. In this case, the control character would not be in the data processed by the Translate All feature. 6. If the application that is accessing the Barcode Wedge in Block mode, supports Hat encoded characters, like ^M, hat encoded characters can be assigned in the defined action and then interpreted by the receiving application by using the ‘escape’ format described above. The same is true for hex-encoded characters. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 163 Ctrl Char Mapping Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode tab Figure 4-18 Barcode – Ctrl Translation Note that Control Character Mapping is available regardless of the status of the Use Advanced Barcode Processing checkbox. See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” at the end of Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. Translate All If “Translate All” is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode. When “Translate All” is not checked and “Send Key Messages” is checked, CTRL codes are passed through in Block mode. The wedge provides a one-to-one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control+character sequence of keystrokes in Key Message mode. If a control character is replaced by another control character, the replacement is performed on the barcode data, prefix, and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated. For example, if ‘Carriage Return’ is replaced by Line Feed (by specifying ‘^J’ or ‘0x0A’) in the configuration, the value 0x0d received in any scanned barcode (or defined in the prefix or suffix) will be replaced with the value 0x0a. The Wedge then sends Ctrl+J to the receiving application, rather than Ctrl+M. Translate All E-EQ-MX3XRG-H This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode (on the Main tab) selected. In Key Message mode, when this option is enabled, control characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent ‘control’ key keystroke sequence (13 [0x0d] is translated to Control+M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL, SHIFT, and m keys on the keypad). It does not replace control characters in the prefix and suffix. The assignments provided by this enhancement allow the user to override the oneto-one translation provided by Translate All. MX3X Reference Guide 164 Advanced Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name. Refer to the table in “Assigned Replacements” for the list of control characters and their names. When a character name is selected from the combo box, the text ‘Ignore (drop)’ is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control. ‘Ignore (drop)’ is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored. Once the user types into the Replacement edit control, reselecting the character form Character combo box redisplays the ‘Ignore (drop)’ default in the Replacement edit control. Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character. Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character combo box, typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control (according to the formats defined above) and then selecting Assign. The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button. List Box The list box shows all user-defined control characters and their assigned replacements. All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned. Delete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted. When an entry (or entries) is highlighted, and Delete is selected, the highlighted material is deleted from the list box. Scancode Enable Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode tab See the “Integrated Scanner Programming Guide”, section titled “Data Options” for full details on AIM Codes and Symbol Codes. Figure 4-19 Barcode – Scancode Enable/Disable Note that Scancode Enable is available regardless of the status of the Use Advanced Barcode Processing checkbox. This panel displays a list of all barcode symbologies supported by the integrated barcode scanner. Barcodes are sent to the application just as they are received from the scanner and before the ‘Strip Leading / Trailing’ or ‘Append Prefix / Suffix’ features. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 165 Advanced Processing Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode tab Note that the Use Advanced Barcode Processing checkbox must be enabled before Advanced Processing can occur. See Also: The “Integrated Scanner Programming Guide”, section titled “Data Options” for full details on AIM Code IDs and Symbol Code IDs. Figure 4-20 Barcode – Advanced Processing No Code ID Default. All symbology IDs are transmitted. This means that by default, all good scan barcodes are sent to the application just as they are received from the scanner, regardless of any possible symbology ID attached. The Strip Code ID radio button is unavailable when No Code ID is enabled. AIM Code ID Enabling the Strip Code ID checkbox ensures the 3-character AIM Code ID symbology is stripped off by the WEDGE before the barcode is made available to the application. Disable Data inludes Symbol Code ID if the AIM Code ID parameter is enabled. When Strip Code ID is disabled (unchecked), the Code ID is included in the barcode data being matched. Symbol Code ID Enabling Strip Code ID ensures the 1-character Symbol Code ID symbology is stripped off by the WEDGE before the barcode is made available to the application. Disable Data includes AIM Code ID if the Symbol Code ID parameter is enabled. When Strip Code ID is disabled (unchecked), the Code ID is included in the barcode data being matched. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 166 Advanced Strip Code ID Enabling this parameter removes the number of characters (specified by AIM Code ID or Symbol Code ID radio button setting) before the barcode is sent to the application. Figure 4-21 Barcode – Advanced Processing – Strip Code ID This checkbox is unavailable when Data includes no Code ID radio button is enabled. Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes When Strip Code ID is disabled (unchecked), the AIM Code or Symbol Code ID is included in the barcode data being matched. Scanned barcodes are not matched against the following parameters unless they are EAN128 barcodes. If the scan engine does not support EAN128 barcodes, or EAN128 barcodes have been disabled, the Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes function is not available. Figure 4-22 Barcode – Advanced Processing – EAN128 Barcodes The user specifies whether the barcodes have an AIM Code ID (3 characters) or a Symbol Code ID (1 character). They also specify whether the AIM or Symbol Code ID will be stripped or passed through to the Codes match, as long as the barcode is an EAN128 barcode. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Advanced 167 Adding Codes to the Match List for EAN128 Barcodes The first elements of an EAN128 barcode are matched against the entries in the Match Code list, in the order entered in the list. For example, if the match code list contains Item 0 ABC, Item 1 C and Item 2 AB in that order, the AB has no effect. When a match is found (e.g. Code ID A was matched by Item 0 ABC and the process terminated) or when the end of the list is reached, processing terminates. Up to 20 Codes (up to 16 characters each) can be added to the Match list. The characters can be text or control characters, e.g. tab, carriage return. The characters can be entered into the Match Code List text box by typing from the keypad, entering the key’s hex equivalent, or entering in hat ( ^ ) encoded delimited (8-bit code table) notation. • Keys/characters are typed into the lower left text box. • To add a match code, move the cursor to the lower left text box. Add the characters to the box and select the Add button to place the new Match Code in the List Box. • To edit a match code, highlight the match code in the List Box and double-click. The match code text is moved to the lower left text box. Make changes to the copied match code and select the Add button. • To delete a match code, highlight the code in the List Box and select the Remove button. The match code is deleted from the list. • After adding, editing or removing match codes, perform the Suspend/Resume function to store your changes in the registry. • Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with ‘0x’. Control characters can also be entered using the ‘hat’ delimited notation, i.e. ^M for Carriage Return. See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” at the end of Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. • All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key. Note: E-EQ-MX3XRG-H No matching is done for barcodes using this option if they are not EAN128 barcodes. MX3X Reference Guide 168 MX3X Reference Guide Advanced E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Introduction The MX3X mobile device offers a choice of Cisco, Symbol and Summit clients. The Summit client device is an 802.11g network card. The Cisco and Symbol client network cards are 802.11b clients. They can be configured for the security types listed below. Certificates are necessary for many of the WPA authentications. Please refer to the “Certificates” section at the end of this chapter for more information on generating and installing certificates. Please refer to the table below for the security options supported for each network client type. Type Security Options Supported Summit Client Cisco Client Symbol Client None Yes Yes Yes No No EAP-FAST Yes 4 EAP-TLS No* Yes No LEAP Yes Yes Yes PEAP-GTC Yes Yes No PEAP-MSCHAP Yes Yes No WEP Yes Yes Yes WPA/LEAP Yes Yes No WPA-PSK Yes Yes No * Not available when this manual was published. Check with your LXE representative for current availability. Prerequisites • Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point • WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys • The Summit profile settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security option chosen. Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for MX3X communication. It is available on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website. It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. It may be necessary to upgrade radio drivers in order to use certain Summit Client Utility (SCU) features described in this chapter. Please contact your LXE representative for details. 4 EAP-FAST is supported only with automatic PAC provisioning. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 170 Summit Client Configuration Summit Client Configuration The Summit client requires driver 1.2.1 SCU 1.2.4 or later. All MX3X’s with a Summit wireless device ship with this software revision or greater. To identify the software version, tap the “About” icon in Start | Settings | Control Panel. Summit Client Utility Icon Start the Summit Client configuration by tapping the Summit Client Utility icon on the desktop. You can also start the Summit Client utility by tapping Start | Programs | Summit | SCU. Important: Perform a Warm Reset after adding a new profile or changing parameters of an existing profile to save the changed parameters in the registry. Perform a Warm Reset by using the Power key to first Suspend then Resume the mobile device. Summit Client Utility Access: Start | Programs | Summit | SCU or SCU Icon on Desktop Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility The Main tab provides information, admin login and active config (profile) selection. Profile specific parameters are found on the Config tab. The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile. The Status tab contains information on the current connection. The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the client connection. Diagnostics, Update Driver, and Site Survey functions are not available in this release.Contact your LXE representative for availability. Global parameters are found on the Global Settings tab. The values for these parameters apply to all profiles. Help Help is available by clicking the ? button in the title bar on most SCU screens. SCU Help may also be accessed by selecting Start | Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility link. The SCU does not have to be open to view the help information using this option. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 171 Summit Tray Icon The Summit tray icon provides access to the SCU and is a visual indicator of link status. The Summit tray icon is displayed when: • The Summit radio is installed and active. • The Windows Zero Config utility is not active. • The Tray Icon setting is On. Tap the icon to launch the Summit Configuration Utility. Use the tray icon to view the link status: Summit client is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access Point. The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is -80 dBm or weaker. The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than -80dBm but not stronger than -60 dBm. The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than -60 dBm but not stronger than -40 dBm. The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than -40 dBm. Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client • The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them, indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time (the MX3X is not connected to a network). • You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network. LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network. The Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio. Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Config drop down list as the active profile. Warmboot the MX3X. The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wireless Information control panel. Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels, set up client and security settings. LXE does not recommend use of the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility for configuring the client device as it cannot be used to configure all supported security protocols. To switch back to Summit client control, select any other profile in the SCU Active Config drop down list, except ThirdPartyConfig. Warmboot the MX3X. Wireless client control is passed to the SCU. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 172 Summit Client Configuration Main Tab Factory Default Settings Admin Login Radio Active Config SUMMIT Enabled Default Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab The Main tab displays information about the client device including: • SCU (Summit Client Utility) version • Driver version • Regulatory Domain • Copyright Info • Active Config • Status of the network device (Down, Associated, Authenticated, etc). The Active Config (profile) can be switched without logging in to Administrator mode. Selecting a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Administrator mode. The profile must already exist. LXE recommends performing a Suspend/Resume function when changing profiles. Profiles can be created or edited after the Administrator password has been entered and accepted (LXE recommends that only the “default” profile be edited). The Disable Radio button is used to disable the network card. Once disabled, the button label changes to Enable Radio. The Admin Login button provides access to editing client device parameters. Config and Global Settings may only be edited after entering the Admin Login password. The password is casesensitive. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. To logout, either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 173 Administrator Login To login to Administrator mode, tap the Admin login button. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. The admin is automatically logged out when the SCU is exited. The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button, or a navigation button (X or OK), to logout. The Administrator remains logged in when the SCU is not closed and a Suspend/Resume function is performed. Figure 5-3 Admin Password Entry Enter the Admin password (the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive) and tap OK. If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed. The Administrator default password can be changed on the Global Settings tab. The end user can: • View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Config tab. • View the global parameter settings on the Global Settings tab. • The current connection details on the Status tab. • Radio status, software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab. After Admin login, the end user can also: • Turn radio On/Off on the Main tab. • Select active Config (Profile) on the Main tab. • Create, edit, rename and delete profiles on the Config tab. • Edit global parameters on the Global Setting tabs. • Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 174 Summit Client Configuration Config Tab Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU. If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved! Factory Default Settings Config Profile SSID Client Name Power Save Tx Power Bit Rate Radio Mode Auth Type EAP type Encryption Default Blank Blank Fast Maximum Auto BG Optimized Open None None Figure 5-4 SCU – Config Tab When logged in as an Administrator (see “Administrator Login”), use the Config tab to manage profiles. When not logged in as an Administrator, the parameters can be viewed, and cannot be changed. The buttons on this tab are greyed out if the user is not logged in as an Administrator. Buttons Button Function Rename Assigns a new, unique name. If the new name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed. Delete Deletes the profile. The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted. New Creates a new profile with the default settings (see “Config Parameters”) and prompts for a unique name. If the name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created. Commit Saves the profile settings made on this screen. Settings are saved in the profile. Credentials Allows entry of a username and password, certificate names, and other information required to authenticate with the access point. The information required depends on the EAP type. WEP/PSK Keys Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration Note: 175 Unsaved Changes -- Newer versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the Config tab. IMPORTANT – The settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen. Please refer to “Wireless Security” later in this Summit Client Utility section to determine the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN. Config Parameters Parameter Default Explanation Config Default A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters, establishes the name of the Config or Profile. Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig. SSID Blank A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Establishes the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the WLAN to which the network card connects. Client Name Blank A string of up to 16 characters. The client name is assigned to the network card and the device using the network card. The client name may be passed to networking devices, e.g. Access Points. Power Save Fast Power save mode is On. Options are: Constantly Awake Mode (CAM) power save off, Maximum (power saving mode) and Fast (power saving mode). Tx Power Maximum Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current regulatory domain. Options are: Maximum, 50mW, 30mW, 10mW or 1mW. Bit Rate Auto Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the wireless network device. Options are: Auto, 1 Mbit, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbit. Radio Mode BG Optimized or BG Rates Full Specify 802.11g and/or 802.11b when communicating with the Access Point. Options are: B rates only, BG Rates full, G rates only, BG optimized. Note: Default value may vary depending on installed SCU driver version. Auth Type Open 802.11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point. Options are: Open, LEAP, or Shared key. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 176 Summit Client Configuration Parameter Default Explanation EAP Type None Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used for 802.1x authentication to the Access Point. Options are: None, LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP-MSCHAP, or PEAP-GTC. Note: EAP Type chosen determines whether the Credentials button is active and also determines the available entries in the Credentials pop-up window. Encryption None Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data. Options are: None, Manual WEP, Auto WEP, WPA PSK, WPA TKIP, WPA2 PSK, WPA2 AES, CCKM TKIP, Manual WEP CKIP, or Auto WEP CKIP. Note: The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP/PSK Keys button is active and also determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop-up window. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 177 Status Tab Figure 5-5 SCU – Status Tab This screen displays information on the current profile and network connection. Information cannot be edited or changed on the Status panel. The panel displays: Note: E-EQ-MX3XRG-H • The config profile being used • The client name, IP address and MAC address • The status of the network connection (down, associated, authenticated, etc.) • The name, IP address and MAC address of the Access Point maintaining the connection to the network. • Signal strength (changes with network activity). • Channel currently being used for wireless traffic. • Current transmit power in mW. • Rate in Mbps. After completing radio configuration, it is good practice to review this screen to verify the radio has associated (no encryption, WEP) or authenticated (LEAP, any WPA), as indicated above. MX3X Reference Guide 178 Summit Client Configuration Diags Tab The Diags panel can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and wireless connectivity issues for the IP address shown above the Release/Renew button. Administrator login is required for the (Re)connect button function. Note: Diagnostics and Site Survey functions are not available in this release. Figure 5-6 SCU – Diags Tab Buttons Button Function (Re)connect Tap this button to apply, or reapply, the current config profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN. Activity is logged in the Diagnotic Output text box on the lower part of the panel. Administrator login required for this function. Diagnostics Tapping this button begins an attempt to (re)connect to the wireless LAN. This option provides more data in the Diagnostics Output text box than the (Re)connect option. The data dump includes network card state, profile settings, global settings, and a list of access points by SSID broadcasting in the client’s immediate area. Not available in this release. Start Ping Tap the text box and type an IP address to Ping. Tap the Start Ping button to start pinging the IP address. The button name changes to Stop Ping. Tap Stop Ping to end the pinging process. The pinging process ends when any other button on this panel is tapped or a different menu tab is selected. Ping results are displayed in the Diagnostic Output text box. Release/Renew Release the current IP address to obtain a new IP address. This option renews the IP address when applicable. Activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output text box. If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the client device, this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box. The current IP address is displayed above the Release/Renew button. Site Survey Not available in this release. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 179 Global Settings Tab The parameters on the Global Settings panel can only be changed when an Administrator is logged in. No password is required to view the parameter settings. Note: Tap the Commit button to save changes. If the panel is closed before tapping the Commit button, changes are not saved! Factory Default Settings RX Diversity TX Diversity Preamble G Shorslot Roam Trigger Roam Delta Roam Period Frag Threshold RTS Threshold Ping Payload Ping Timeout Ping Delay ms LED Hide Passwords Admin Password Certs Path CCX WMM On-Start on Main On Auto Auto -65 dBm 10 dBm 10 sec. 2346 2347 32 bytes 5000 1000 Off Off Blank System Off Off Figure 5-7 SCU – Global Settings Tab Global Parameters Note: Unsaved Changes -- Newer versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the Config tab. Parameter Default Function RX Diversity On-start on Main How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the Access Point. Options are: Main Only (use the main antenna only), Aux Only (use the auxiliary antenna only), On-start on Main (on startup, use the main antenna), or On-start on Aux (on startup, use the auxiliary antenna). E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 180 Summit Client Configuration Parameter Default Function TX Diversity On How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Access Point. Options are: Main only (use the main antenna only), Aux only (use the auxiliary antenna only), or On (use diversity or both antennas). Preamble Auto The type of client header, or preamble, for packets. Options are: Auto, Short, or Long. G Short Slot Auto 802.1x short slot timing mode. Options are: Auto, On, or Off. Note: The G Short Slot parameter has no effect on the Summit client device. This option is always set to On regardless of the parameter setting. This parameter is not present in some versions of the SCU. Roam Trigger -65 dBm If signal strength is less than this trigger value, the client device looks for a different Access Point with a stronger signal. Options are: -50 dBm, -55, -60, -65, -70, or -75 dBm. Roam Delta 10 dBm The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must exceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to the different Access Point is attempted. Options are: 5 dBm, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 35 dBm. Roam Period 10 sec The amount of time, after association or a roam scan with no roam, that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) scan data before a roaming decision is made. Options are: 5 sec, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, or 60 sec. Frag Thresh 2346 If the packet size (in bytes) exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold, the packet is fragmented (sent as several pieces instead of as one block). Use a low setting in areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of wireless interference. Options are: Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes. RTS Thresh 2347 If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send (RTS) threshold, an RTS is sent before sending the packet. A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point. Options are: Any number between 0 and 2347. Ping Payload 32 bytes Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping. Options are: 32 bytes, 64, 128, 512, or 1024 bytes. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 181 Parameter Default Function Ping Timeout ms 5000 The amount of time, in milliseconds, that a device will be continuously pinged. The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout. Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms. Ping Delay ms 1000 The amount of time, in milliseconds, between each ping after a Start Ping button tap. Options are: Any number between 0 and 30000 ms. LED Off The LED on the network card is not visible to the user when the network card is installed in a sealed mobile device. Options are: On, Off. Hide Password Off If On, the Summit Config Utility masks passwords (characters on the screen are displayed as an *) as they are typed and when they are viewed. When Off, password characters are not masked. Options are: On, Off. Admin Password SUMMIT A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped. If Hide Password is On, the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry text box. The password is case sensitive. Options are: none. Certs Path System A valid directory path, of up to 64 characters, where WPA Certificate Authority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device. LXE suggests ensuring the directory path currently exists before assigning the path in this parameter. See sections titled “Root Certificates” and “User Certificates” later in this chapter for instructions on obtaining CA and User Certificates. Options are: none. For example, when the valid certificate is stored as My Computer/System/mycertificate.cer, enter System in the Certs Path text box as the directory path. CCX Off Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features. Options are: On, Off. WMM Off Use of Wi-Fi Multimedia extensions. Options are: On, Off. Tray Icon On Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray. Options are: On, Off. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 182 Summit Client Configuration Summit Wireless Security Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Config tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network. The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network. Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions. Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements. Note: It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. Default profile LXE recommends editing the Default profile instead of creating new profiles. Important: Perform a soft reset (or Suspend/Resume) after changing parameters to save the changed parameters in the registry. Switching profiles Successfully connecting after switching from one profile to another may take up to 30 seconds from the moment the “Is not authenticated” or “Is not Associated” messages are displayed. Adding, changing or renaming profiles LXE recommends performing a Warmboot function (or Suspend/Resume) after tapping the Commit button. Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP and PEAP/GTC A sign-on screen is created by leaving the user name and password blank when configuring the credentials for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP, PEAP/GTC. The sign-on screen is displayed upon each reboot function, and return from Suspend function, for the listed protocols. Figure 5-8 Credential Sign-on Screen When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered, the Summit Client Utility offers two choices: • The User name and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen. If this method is selected, anyone using the mobile device can access the network. • The User name and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen. When this method is used and the mobile device attempts to connect to the network, a sign-on screen is displayed. The user must enter the User name and Password at that time to authenticate. Enter the user name and password and tap OK. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is properly configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used for authentication. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 183 No Security Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-9 Summit Profile with No Security Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile. Set Auth Type to Open. Set EAP Type to None. Set Encryption to None. Tap the Commit button 5 to save the new profile configuration. Perform a warm reset to connect using the new profile configuration. 5 LXE recommends performing a soft reset or Suspend/Resume function each time the Commit button is tapped. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 184 Summit Client Configuration WEP Keys Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network WEP key requirements. To connect using WEP, use the following minimum required profile options.. • Auth Type = Open • EAP Type = None • Encryption = Manual WEP Tap the WEP/PSK Keys button. The WEP Key Entry text entry box appears. Figure 5-10 Summit WEP Keys Enter the WEP key. If there are more than one set of keys, tap the radio button in front of the Key to be used. WEP keys may be entered in Hex or ASCII format. For previous versions of the SCU, if the WEP key entry does not offer a choice between Hex and ASCII, the key must be in Hex (refer to the Hex Key Format segment that follows). Once configured, tap OK then tap the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Config is selected on the Main tab and warm boot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Hex Key Format Valid keys are 10 (for 40 bit encryption) or 26 (for 128 bit encryption) hexadecimal characters (09, A-F). Enter the key(s) and tap OK. ASCII Key Format Valid keys are 5 (for 40 bit encryption) or 13 (for 128 bit encryption) alphanumeric characters. Enter the key(s) and tap OK. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 185 LEAP w/o WPA Authentication If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type client parameter to “Open”. If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type client parameter to “LEAP”. Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-11 Summit Profile for LEAP w/o WPA Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile. Set Auth Type to Open. Set EAP Type to LEAP. Set Encryption to Auto WEP. To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button. Note: No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-12 Summit LEAP Credentials Enter the Username or Domain \Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired. Enter the Password, if desired. Tap OK. Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration. Perform a warm reset to connect using the new profile configuration. Please see “WPA/LEAP Authentication” later in this section to configure the client for WPA LEAP. Please see “Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP, and PEAP/GTC” earlier in this chapter if the username and password are left blank during setup. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 186 Summit Client Configuration EAP-FAST Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-13 Summit Profile for EAP-FAST Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile. Set Auth Type to Open. Set EAP Type to EAP-FAST. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP. The SCU only supports EAP-FAST with automatic PAC provisioning. The user credentials, whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the signon screen, are sent to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the client device. Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on the RADIUS server configuration. To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button. Note: No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-14 Summit EAP-FAST Credentials Enter the Username or Domain \Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired. Enter the Password, if desired. Tap OK. Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration. Perform a warm reset to connect using the new profile configuration. Please see “Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP, and PEAP/GTC” earlier in this chapter if the username and password are left blank during setup. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 187 PEAP/MSCHAP Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-15 Summit Profile for PEAP/MSCHAP Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile. Set Auth Type to Open. Set EAP Type to PEAP-MSCHAP. Set Encryption to Auto WEP (without WPA). To configure PEAP-MSCHAP for WPA set Encryption to WPA TKIP. To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button. Note: No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network. Enter the Username or Domain\Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired. Enter the Password, if desired. Leave the CA Certificate Filename blank for now. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 188 Summit Client Configuration Figure 5-16 Summit PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials Once successfully authenticated, copy the CA certificate into the \System directory of the device. Once the file is in the \System directory, enter the file name in the CA Certificate Filename text box. Tap OK then tap the Commit button. Perform a warm reset function. 6 The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user authentication. Please see “Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP, and PEAP/GTC” earlier in this chapter if the username and password are left blank during setup. Note: The date must be properly set on the mobile device to authenticate a certificate. 6 LXE recommends performing a soft reset or Suspend/Resume function each time the Commit button is tapped. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 189 WPA/LEAP Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-17 Summit Profile with LEAP for WPA TKIP To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button. Note: No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-18 Summit WPA/LEAP Credentials Enter the Username or Domain \Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired. Enter the Password, if desired. Tap OK. Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration. Perform a warm reset to connect using the new profile configuration. Please see “LEAP w/o WPA” earlier in this section to configure the client for LEAP without WPA. Please see “Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP, and PEAP/GTC” earlier in this chapter if the username and password are left blank during setup. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 190 Summit Client Configuration WPA PSK Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-19 Summit Profile with WPA/PSK Encryption Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile. Set Auth Type to Open. Set EAP Type to None. Set Encryption to WPA PSK. Tap the WEP/PSK Keys button. Figure 5-20 Summit PSK Entry Enter the Passphrase in the PSK Entry popup text entry box. This value can be a 64 hex character or an 8-63 byte ASCII value. Tap OK Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration. Perform a warm reset to connect using the new profile configuration. Tap the Main tab. The screen shows the “WPA PSK” Active Config is Associated after the client connects to the network. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Summit Client Configuration 191 PEAP/GTC Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon. Tap the Admin Login button on the main panel. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK. Tap the Config tab. Figure 5-21 Configure a Summit Profile with PEAP/GTC Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile. Set Auth Type to Open. Set EAP Type to PEAP-GTC. Set Encryption to WPA TKIP. To use Stored Credentials, tap the Credentials button. Note: No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-22 PEAP/GTC Credentials Enter the Username or Domain\Username in the Credentials popup text entry box, if desired. Enter the Password, if desired. Leave the CA Certificate Filename blank for now. Tap OK. Tap Commit. Once successfully authenticated, copy the CA certificate into the System directory of the device. Once the certificate file is in the System directory, enter the filename in CA Certificate Filename on the popup Credentials data entry box. Tap OK. Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration. Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration. Please see “Sign-on Screen for LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP/MS-CHAP, and PEAP/GTC” earlier in this chapter if the username and password are left blank during setup. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 192 Cisco Client Configuration Cisco Client Configuration Prerequisites • Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point • WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys Aironet Client Utility (ACU) Access: Note: Start | Aironet Client Utility or ACU Icon on Desktop When making changes to profile parameters, the mobile device should be warmbooted afterwards. Cisco options are available on the MX3X and MX3-RFID devices. Figure 5-23 Cisco Aironet Client Utility Note: To configure WPA, please see “Cisco Configuration”, later in this chapter. Profiles Tab See the following “Profiles Tab” section for default profile parameter settings.. Firmware Tab Displays the current firmware version and allows you to load new firmware. Tap the Browse button to locate the new firmware file. Status Tab Immediately runs status on : signal strength and signal quality. Statistics Tab Select the Receive Stats or Transmit Stats. The data is displayed on the screen. Survey Tab Immediately runs signal strength and quality and link speed. An option is available to Setup parameters for Active Mode reporting. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 193 Profile Parameters Use this option to manage profiles and review firmware information, status, statistics and wireless device survey data. Profile Parameter SSID Client Name Infrastructure Mode Power Save Mode Network Security Type WEP Authentication Types LEAP Mixed Mode World Mode Data Rates Transmit Power Offline Channel Scan Default Blank Blank Yes Fast PSP None No WEP Open Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto MAX Enabled Select an active profile to manage. Figure 5-24 Cisco Profile Properties Screen Tap the WEP Keys button to enter WEP information. If a key is already entered, the “Already set?” checkbox is checked. The previously entered key value is not displayed for security. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 194 Cisco Client Configuration Cisco Wireless Security Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is only available on mobile device’s equipped with the updated Cisco client driver (release 2.60 or later). WPA requires software revision 1ED or greater. To identify the software revision, please tap the “About” icon in the Control Panel. Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for Cisco client communication. It is important that all dates are correct on the .NET computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. System Requirements To support Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), the mobile device must be equipped as follows: • Cisco 350 network card with driver release 2.60 (or later). The LXE MX3X supports WPA and all authentications. The Microsoft supplicant and Cisco supplicants are used separately or together to provide support for the different authentications. Most of the configuration is done with the Microsoft Wireless Configuration tool. WPA/LEAP requires the Cisco supplicant and Cisco ACU configuration tool. Installing Client Device Drivers Which version of the Cisco client driver should be installed depends on which authentication protocol is to be configured. • Cisco PEAP should not be installed if using PEAP/MSCHAP. • Cisco PEAP must be installed if using PEAP/GTC. • For all other authentications (LEAP, EAP-TLS, WPA-PSK) it does not matter if Cisco PEAP is installed or not. To determine if Cisco PEAP is installed or to change the installation, refer to the instructions in the following sections. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 195 Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant With a Cisco client installed, open the Wireless network properties as described in “Cisco Configuration”, later in this section. With the Authentication tab selected check the text in the EAP type drop down box. Refer to the following figures to determine if Cisco PEAP is installed. Figure 5-25 No Cisco PEAP Figure 5-26 Cisco PEAP Installed If the Cisco installation is correct, continue with the configuration. If it is not correct, follow the procedures below. Note: Instructions are also included in the README file located in the \SYSTEM folder. There are two Cisco CAB files in the \SYSTEM folder of the MX3X. The default files are: CISCO.CAB CISCOPEAP.CAB The default CISCO.CAB file provides for all authentications except Cisco PEAP. When the default CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the figure labeled “No Cisco PEAP”, above. If Cisco PEAP is desired: 1. 2. 3. Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOMSCHAP.CAB. Rename the CISCOPEAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB. Coldboot the mobile device to install the new driver with the registry. The renamed CISCO.CAB file provides for Cisco PEAP and PEAP/GTC authentications. When the renamed CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the previous figure labeled “Cisco PEAP Installed”. If it becomes necessary to switch to a different authentication than Cisco PEAP or PEAP/GTC, 1. 2. 3. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOPEAP.CAB. Rename the CISCOMSCHAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB Coldboot the mobile device to install the new driver with the registry. MX3X Reference Guide 196 Cisco Client Configuration Cisco WPA Configuration Use the following instructions for all authentication protocols to configure the Microsoft Wireless Network configuration utility unless WPA/LEAP is used. WPA/LEAP is configured with the Cisco ACU (see Section titled “WPA/LEAP Authentication Configuration”). Tap the ACU icon on the desktop. Figure 5-27 Cisco ACU Profile Selection From the Select Active Profile pull down list, select . Tap OK and warmboot. Figure 5-28 Cisco ACU Reboot Message After booting up, the Microsoft Zero Config tool should start. If it does not, start configuring the wireless connection by tapping the icon on the task bar shown in below. Figure 5-29 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 197 The Wireless Network Connection screen appears. Figure 5-30 Wireless Information Screen Make sure the “Notify me when new wireless networks are available” box is not checked.. Tap the Advanced… button. Figure 5-31 Advanced Wireless Settings Make sure the “Use Windows to configure my wireless settings” box is checked. Set the “Networks to access” drop down box to “Only access points”. Tap the OK button on the Advanced Wireless Settings screen and the Wireless Information Screen is displayed. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 198 Cisco Client Configuration On the Wireless Information screen tap the Add New … line. The Wireless Network Properties screen is displayed. Figure 5-32 Wireless Network Properties Enter the Network name (SSID) into the text field. For PEAP/MSCHAP and EAP/TLS, set Encryption to TKIP and Authentication to WPA. For WPA/PSK see “WPA/PSK Authentication Configuration”. To configure the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box see the following sections for configuration of each authentication protocol. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 199 PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/MS-CHAP protocol. The Cisco CAB file without Cisco PEAP must be used with PEAP/MS-CHAP. See “Installing Client Device Drivers”, earlier in this chapter, for more information. Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant Figure 5-33 PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties With the client parameters configured set the EAP type to PEAP as shown above. If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see “Installing Client Device Drivers” earlier in this chapter, to change the wireless CAB file. Tap the Properties button. Figure 5-34 Authentication Settings When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the user authentication to be tested. When user authentication is successful, come back to this screen and validate the server certificate. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 200 Cisco Client Configuration The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network. Figure 5-35 Wireless Network Login Once authenticated, tap the IP Information tab. Figure 5-36 IP Information Tab If the network is set to use DHCP, the mobile device displays the IP address assigned by the DHCP server. Now go back and authenticate the server. Server Authentication To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate. For instructions for installing, see “Root Certificates”, later in this chapter. Figure 5-37 Authentication Settings, Validate Server MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 201 Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen. Tap the Properties button. Check “Validate server” . Tap OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. Figure 5-38 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID Once the authentication completes, the status changes to show the mobile device has authenticated to the , as shown in the figure above. Tap the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure labeled “IP Information Tab”, earlier in this chapter. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 202 Cisco Client Configuration PEAP/GTC Authentication Configuration The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/GTC protocol. Configuring the PEAP/GTC Supplicant With the client parameters configured set the EAP type to Cisco PEAP as shown below. Figure 5-39 PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see “Installing Client Device Drivers”, earlier in this chapter, to change the client CAB file. Click the Properties button. Figure 5-40 PEAP Properties When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the user authentication to be tested. When user authentication is successful, return to this screen and validate the server certificate as shown later in this section. Check the Always try to resume secure session box. Note: This box must be checked for the LXE device to roam from one AP to another AP. Tap the OK button. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 203 The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network. Figure 5-41 Login Screen Enter valid user credentials. Once authenticated tap the IP Information tab Figure 5-42 IP Information Tab The .NET device displays the IP address given by the DHCP server. Now go back and authenticate the server. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 204 Cisco Client Configuration Server Authentication To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate. For instructions for installing, see “Root Certificates”, earlier in this chapter. Figure 5-43 Authentication Settings, Validate Server Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen. Tap the Properties button. Check Validate server . Tap OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. Figure 5-44 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID Once the authentication completes, the status changes to show the mobile device has authenticated to the , as shown in the figure above. Tap the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure labeled “IP Information Tab”, earlier in this chapter. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 205 WPA/LEAP LEAP is a Cisco proprietary authentication protocol and is not supported by the Microsoft supplicant. To configure the mobile device for WPA/LEAP, use the Cisco ACU installed during normal installation of the Cisco client driver. Cisco ACU Start the Cisco ACU by tapping the icon on the desktop or navigate to Start | Programs | Cisco | ACU. Tap the Profile tab. Figure 5-45 WPA/LEAP using ACU Profile Tab Tap the Rename button. Name the profile. Figure 5-46 Renaming Profile Tap the Edit . . . button. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 206 Cisco Client Configuration The profile properties screen is displayed. Figure 5-47 Profile Properties Screen Enter the SSID and Client Name in the correct fields. Set the Network Security Type to LEAP(WPA). Tap the OK button. Figure 5-48 Select Profile Use the drop down box to choose the profile just configured. Tap OK. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 207 The mobile device associates and displays the sign on screen. Figure 5-49 Login Screen Tap the Status tab to display status. Figure 5-50 ACU Status Tab E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 208 Cisco Client Configuration EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration To authenticate using the EAP-TLS protocol you need a user certificate file and a private key file. Once you have the user certificate files run the certificate installer from the Microsoft control panel. For EAP-TLS it does not matter which Cisco cab file is installed. Note: It is important that all dates are correct on the .NET computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. User Certificate To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start | Control Panel | Certificates. Set the drop down box to “My Certificates” as shown below. The correct user certificate should be shown in the right pane. Figure 5-51 Certificate Stores Tap the View . . . button. Figure 5-52 View Certificate Details Set the Field to Private Key. Make sure the private key is Present. If it is not present, install the private key file. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 209 If there is no user certificate refer to “User Certificates”, earlier in this chapter, to acquire a user certificate and private key file. Setting EAP/TLS Parameters With the client parameters configured set the EAP type to TLS as shown. Figure 5-53 EAP/TLS Configuration Tap the Properties button. Figure 5-54 Authentication Settings Tap the Select button to choose the user certificate. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 210 Cisco Client Configuration Figure 5-55 Select Certificate Figure 5-56 Authentication Settings, Certificate Details Do not check the Validate server certificate box. This allows the user to be authenticated as the first step. When the user certificate successfully authenticates, come back to this screen and validate the server certificate as described in the next section. Tap the OK button to dismiss the configuration screens. When the client device re-connects the user is authenticated with the user certificate. If the user does not authenticate, recheck the user certificate and the date on the computer. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Cisco Client Configuration 211 Validating the Server Certificate Before validating the server certificate, make sure the Root CA certificate is installed on the mobile device. Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen. Tap the Properties button. Check the Validate server box as shown below. Figure 5-57 Validate Server Tap OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. Figure 5-58 SSID Authenticated Once the authentication completes the status changes to show the mobile device has authenticated to as shown above. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 212 Cisco Client Configuration WPA PSK Configuration Figure 5-59 WPA PSK Configuration Configure the Wireless Network Settings as described in “Wireless Security”, earlier in this chapter. Change the Network Authentication to WPA-PSK. Enter an ASCII network key in the text field. Hex keys do not work in the Microsoft Zero Config utility at this time. There is no server authentication when using WPA-PSK. Tap the OK button to complete the configuration. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Symbol Client Configuration 213 Symbol Client Configuration Prerequisites • Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point • WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys Note: When making changes to profile parameters, the mobile device should be warmbooted afterwards unless noted otherwise. Symbol options are available on an MX3X device only. Access: Tap the Network Connected Icon in the Status Bar Profile Parameters Menu Figure 5-60 Symbol NETWLAN Screen IP Information Tab After the IP Address has been assigned to the mobile device, tap the Renew button to renew the IP address if necessary. Tap the Details button to view the Network Connection details. IPv6 Information Tab This is the TCP/IPv6 information screen. The contents cannot be edited by the user. Configuring IPv6: By default, IPv6 is enabled and an IPv6 broadcast message is sent on power up. To disable IPv6, run \Windows\ipv6Disable.reg and perform a warmboot. To enable IPv6, run \Windows\ipv6Enable.reg and perform a warmboot. Note: These utilities affect the behavior of the IPv6 on warmboot. After a coldboot, IPv6 is enabled. Wireless Information Tab E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Setup Symbol client connection parameters: Encryption, authentication, WEP, WPA, EAP, etc. MX3X Reference Guide 214 Symbol Client Configuration Wireless Information Tab Factory Default Settings Wireless Information Notify when new networks available Advanced Button Use Windows to configure wireless settings Automatically connect to non-preferred networks Networks to access (Only APs, Only comp-to-comp) Encryption (WEP, TKIP) Authentication (WPA, Open, Shared, WPA-PSK) Ad hoc network Key provided automatically Enable 802.1X authentication EAP Type (MDF-Challenge, PEAP, TLS) Enabled Enabled Disabled All available WEP WPA Disabled Enabled Enabled TLS Figure 5-61 Symbol Wireless Information Tab View Log Displays the logon/connection data for the current network connection. Add a new connection Select Add New. Enter the ESSID in the Network Name text box. Figure 5-62 Symbol Wireless Network Properties MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Symbol Client Configuration 215 Disable WEP • If WEP is to be disabled, tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box. Select Open. • Tap the down arrow in the Encryption drop down box. Tap Disabled and WEP is disabled. • Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab. Enable WEP • Tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box. • Tap the WEP Authentication protocol. • If the key is provided automatically by your network, check the “Key provided automatically” checkbox. • If you wish to enter your Authentication key, uncheck the “Key provided automatically” checkbox and enter the Network Key in the Network Key text box. • Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab. Continue Tap the Advanced … button. Make sure there is a checkmark in the “Use Windows to configure my wireless settings” checkbox. Make sure there is no checkmark in the “Automatically connect to non-preferred networks” checkbox. Tap the Connect button. Tap OK to return to the Wireless Information tab. Tap the Connect button. Figure 5-63 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings To access NETWLAN1 Properties again, tap the Network Connected icon in the Toolbar. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 216 Symbol Client Configuration Select a User Certificate 1. Select Wireless Information Tab 2. Select a network by doubletapping the network name. 3. In the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box, enable 802.1X authentication 4. Select an EAP type. 5. Tap the Properties button. Validate Server is enabled by default. 6. At the Authentication Settings display, tap the Select button to choose a User Certificate. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Certificates 217 Certificates It is important that all dates are correct on the .NET computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. Root Certificates Generating a Root CA Certificate Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on obtaining and installing root certificates. The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a desktop PC to navigate to the CA (Certificate Authority). To request the root CA certificate, open a browser to http:// /certsrv Sign into the CA with any valid username and password. Figure 5-64 Logon to Certificate Authority Figure 5-65 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Click the Download a CA certificate, certificate chain or CRL task link. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 218 Certificates Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box. Figure 5-66 Download CA Certificate Screen Click the DER button. To download the CA certificate, click on the Download CA certificate link. Figure 5-67 Download CA Certificate Screen Click the Save button and save the certificate to the desktop PC. Keep track of the name and location of the certificate as the certificate file name and file location is required in later steps. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Certificates 219 Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device Copy the certificate file from the desktop PC to the mobile device. Import the certificate by navigating to Start | Control Panel | Certificates. Figure 5-68 Certificates Tap the “Import” button. Figure 5-69 Import Certificate Make sure “From a File” is selected and tap OK. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 220 Certificates Figure 5-70 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the Explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the certificate desired and tap OK. Figure 5-71 Certificate Import Confirmation Tap Yes to import the certificate. Once the certificate is installed, return to the proper authentication section, described later in this chapter. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Certificates 221 User Certificates It is important that all dates are correct on the .NET computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. Generating a User Certificate for the MX3X Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on obtaining and installing user certificates. The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA. To request the user certificate, open a browser to http:// /certsrv Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device. Figure 5-72 Logon to Certificate Authority This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file. CE devices such as the MX3X require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate. Figure 5-73 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Click the “Request a certificate” task link. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 222 Certificates Figure 5-74 Request a Certificate Screen Click on the “advanced certificate request” link. Figure 5-75 Advanced Certificate Request Screen Click on the “Create and submit a request to this CA” link. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Certificates 223 Figure 5-76 Advanced Certificate Details For the Certificate Template, select “User”. Check the “Mark keys as exportable” and the “Export keys to file” checkboxes. Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied. Also specify the private key filename. ! Be sure to note the name used for the private key file, for example MX3XUSER.PVK. The certificate file created later in this process must be given the same name, for example, MX3XUSER.CER. DO NOT check “Enable strong private key protection”. Make any other desired changes and click the “Submit” button. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 224 Certificates Figure 5-77 Script Warnings If any script notifications occur, click the “Yes” button to continue the certificate request. Figure 5-78 Script Warnings When prompted for the private key password: • Click “None” if you do not wish to use a password, or • Enter and confirm your desired password then click “OK”. Figure 5-79 Certificate Issued Click the Download certificate link. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Certificates 225 Figure 5-80 Download Security Warning Click Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC. Keep track of the name and location of the certificate as the file name and location is required in later steps. The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process. ! E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file. For example, it the private key was saved as MX3XUSER.PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name, for example, MX3XUSER.CER. MX3X Reference Guide 226 Certificates Installing a User Certificate on the MX3X (WPA-TLS Only) Copy the certificate and private key files to the mobile device. Import the certificate by navigating to Start | Control Panel | Certificates. Select “My Certificates” from the pull down list. Figure 5-81 Certificates Click the “Import” button. Figure 5-82 Import Certificate Make sure “From a File” is selected and click OK. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Certificates 227 Figure 5-83 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the certificate desired and tap OK. The certificate is now shown in the list. Figure 5-84 Certificate Listing Highlight the certificate you just imported and tap the View. . button. From the Field pull down menu, select “Private Key. Figure 5-85 Private Key Not Present E-EQ-MX3XRG-H • If the private key is present, the process is complete. • If the private key is not present, import the private key. MX3X Reference Guide 228 Certificates To import the private key, tap OK to return to the Certificates screen. Tap import. Figure 5-86 Browsing to Private Key Location Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the private key file, change the Type pull down list to “Private Keys”, select the certificate desired and tap OK. Enter the password for the certificate if appropriate. Tap View to see the certificate details again. Figure 5-87 Private Key Present The private key should now say “Present”. If it does not, there is a problem. Possible items to check: • Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file, as shown earlier in this section. If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file, generate a new certificate and follow the import process again. • Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name, for example mx3xuser.cer for the certificate and mx3xuser.pvk for the private key file. If the file names are not the same, rename the private key file and import it again. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Chapter 6 AppLock Introduction Note: LXE has made the assumption, in this chapter, that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator. LXE’s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only. LXE loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device enduser. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up. When the mobile device is reset to factory default values, for example after a cold reset, the Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters. Sections in this chapter that are not specifically Multi-Application or Single Application are used/changed in the same way by both versions. Note: To reset the device to factory default values, please refer to Chapter 3 “System Configuration” section titled “Utilities” and the RegClear, PSMFormat and ColdBoot executable files. Setup a New Device LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies an application to lock, a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user mode. Briefly, the process to configure a new device is as follows: 1. 2. 3. Insert a fully charged battery and press the Power button. Connect an external power source to the device (if required). Adjust screen display, audio volume and other parameters if desired. Install accessories (e.g. handstrap, stylus). 4. Tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon. 5. Assign an application on the Control (single application) or Application (multiple application) tab screen. 6. Assign a password on the Security tab screen. 7. Select a view level on the Status tab screen, if desired. 8. Tap OK 9. Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application(s). 10. The device is now in end-user mode. Note: E-EQ-MX3XRG-H AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications. Attempting to open multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to administration mode. MX3X Reference Guide 230 Setup a New Device Multi-Application Version Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon A mobile device running the Multi-Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, multiple application device. Only the applications or features specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the end-user. This version offers a user-mode taskbar icon allowing the end-user to switch between user applications. See section titled Multi-Application Configuration for information and instruction. Note: only two applications can be specified at this release. Figure 6-1 Administrator Control Panels – Multi-Application MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Setup a New Device 231 Single Application Version Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon A mobile device running the Single Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, single application device. In other words, only the application or feature specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator is available to the user. See section titled Single Application Configuration for information and instruction. Administrator Control Control Security Status Application: ... Internet Command Line: Application Startup Delay: seconds Administrator Control Control Security Status Hot Key: Password: Confirm Password: Administrator Control Control View Level: Security Status Refresh Log Level: Clear Save As... Figure 6-2 Administrator Control Panels – Single Application E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 232 Administration Mode Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device, hardware and software configuration options. The administrator must enter a valid password (when a password has already been assigned) before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed. The administrator can configure the following options: 1. Create/change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access. 2. Create/change the password for administrator access. 3. Assign the name of the application, or applications, to lock. 4. Select the command line of the application to lock. In addition to these configuration options, the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions. Administrator default values for this device: Administrator Hotkey Shift+Ctrl+A Password none Application path and name none Application command line none End User Mode End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes. Each application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up. The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applications. Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows CE key combinations, such as close (X) icon, File Exit, File Close, Alt-F4, Alt-Tab, etc. are disabled. The Windows CE desktop icons, menu bars, task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible. Task Manager is not available. If the end-user selects File/Exit or Close from the applications menu bar, the menu is cleared and nothing else happens; the application remains active. Nothing happens when the end-user taps on the Close icon on the application’s title bar and the application remains active. Note: A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application which causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked, the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker. Windows accelerator keys such as Alt-F4 are disabled. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Passwords 233 Passwords A password must be configured. If the password is not configured, a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password. In addition to the hotkey press, a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration. There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured. If the configured hotkey is pressed, the password prompt is displayed. In this case the user has 30 seconds to enter a password. If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end-user mode. All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt -- this is because the other situations result in invalid end-user operation. These conditions include: 1. If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator, i.e. an application is specified that does not exist. 2. If the application name, which is mandatory for end-user mode, is missing in the configuration. 3. Invalid installation of AppLock (e.g. missing DLLs). 4. Corrupted registry settings. To summarize, if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode, the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered. Troubleshooting Can’t locate the password that has been set by the administrator? Enter this LXE back door key sequence: Ctrl+L Ctrl+X Ctrl+E E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 234 Multi-Application Configuration Multi-Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A. Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device. When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode, a password prompt is displayed (if a password has been configured). A password must be entered within 30 seconds (and within three tries) or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end-user mode with the focus returned to the locked application. Without entry of a valid password, the switch into Administrator mode will not occur. Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured. When the valid password is entered, the Administration Control panel is displayed. When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the user is returned to the System Control Panel. If a password has not been configured, the Administrator Control panel is displayed. Note: AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications. Attempting to open multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to administration mode. Application Panel Figure 6-3 Application Panel – Multi-Application Note: If your Application Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single Application version. Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End User Mode. Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the application from the Browse dialog, tap OK. Enter the Title to be associated with the application’s icon. The assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique text for the icon in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel. Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Multi-Application Configuration 235 Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end user. Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order. Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End User Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE) When the checkbox is enabled, the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available. See the section titled End User Internet Explorer for more details. Select the Global Key key sequence the end user is to press when switching between applications. The Global Key default key sequence is Ctrl+Spc. The Global key is selected from a predefined list of Global hotkey combinations. The Global key is presented to the end-user as the Activation key. Enter the number of seconds in Global Delay that both Applications must wait before starting to run upon reboot. Tap the Clear button to clear all Application information that are currently displayed. The Global settings remain the same for both applications. Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to application setup screen. The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively. If no application is specified when the Administrator Control applet is closed, the device reboots into Administrator mode. If a password has been set, but an application has not been specified, the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode. The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered. End User Internet Explorer (EUIE) AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer, such as .HTML pages and JAVA applications. The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer’s address bar. To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method, the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer. This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode: End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE). The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar. The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re-enable the address bar. The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of the Administrator applet. The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box. When the Internet checkbox is enabled, the Menu and Status check boxes are available. Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE’s menu which contains navigation functions like Back, Forward, Home, Refresh, etc., functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users. When the Menu checkbox is blank, the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable. When the Status checkbox is enabled, the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the enduser when they are navigating the Internet. If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired, it should be treated like any other application. This means that IEXPLORER.EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line. In this case, do not check the Internet checkbox. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 236 Multi-Application Configuration Security Panel Figure 6-4 Security Panel – Multi-Application Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode. The default hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A. A 2nd key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence. Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box. Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key. The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use. The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application. Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes. The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with “Shift”, “Alt”, and “Ctrl” text strings representing the shift state keys. The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence. The hotkey must be entered via the keypad. Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel. Also, hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes. For example, if the ‘Ctrl’ key is pressed followed by ‘A’, “Ctrl+A” is entered in the text box. If another key is pressed after a normal key press, the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started. A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch; this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key. However, when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes, the normal key must be entered from the keypad; it cannot be entered from the SIP. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Multi-Application Configuration 237 Password Move the cursor to the Password text box. The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match. Passwords are case sensitive. When the user exits the Administrator Control panel, the two passwords are compared to verify that they match. If they do not match, a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error. After the user closes the dialog box, the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again. If the passwords match, the password is encrypted and saved. See Also: Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi-Application AppLock Status Panel Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation. Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile specified by the Administrator. For this reason, the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged, as well as clear the status information. Figure 6-5 Status Panel – Multi-Application Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the logfile from the Browse dialog, tap OK. Note: If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single Application version. View Error Process Extended All Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked. Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program. Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging. All messages are displayed. Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another. The filtered records are displayed, all others are not displayed. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 238 Multi-Application Configuration Log Note: If a level higher than Error is selected, the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator. In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely. The system default is ‘None’; however to reduce registry use, the administrator may want to select ‘None’ after verifying the configuration. Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry. • • • • • None Error Processing Extended All Save As When the 'Save As'… button is selected, a standard 'Save As' dialog screen is displayed. Specify the path and filename. If the filename exists, the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten. If the file does not exist, it is created. See Also: MX3X Reference Guide Error Messages E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Multi-Application Configuration 239 End-User Switching Technique Figure 6-6 End-User Multi-Application Touch Panel Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end-user mode, a taskbar icon is available to the user so they can switch between the locked applications. The touch screen must be enabled on the mobile device before the taskbar icon can be used. The taskbar is always visible on top of the application in focus. When the taskbar icon is tapped, a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user. The user then taps the application name in the popup menu and the selected application is brought to the foreground. The previous application continues to run in the background. Stylus taps affect the application in focus only. The appearance of the taskbar is different on various mobile device platforms and may differ from the example shown above. This example is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus. If RFTerm and Microsoft Word were the two applications locked, a switching icon showing both applications is displayed on the screen. Using a Hotkey Sequence One hotkey is defined for the end-user to key in when switching between locked applications. This is known as the Activation key. The Activation key is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter. When the hotkey or hotkey sequence is pressed on the keypad, the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background. The previous application continues to run in the background but enduser key presses affect the application in focus only. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 240 Multi-Application Configuration Troubleshooting Multi-Application AppLock The mobile device won’t switch from Administration mode to end-user mode. • If the configuration is valid for one application but not the other, the switch to end-user mode fails. AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered. • If two copies of the same application are configured, but the application only allows one copy to run at a time, for example Microsoft Pocket Word, the switch to end-user fails. AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered. The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed. What does this mean? When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes, they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications. LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY. When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator, the following error message is displayed in a message box: Selected hotkey is not allowed. Please reenter. When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device, the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Single Application Configuration 241 Single Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A. Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device. When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode, a password prompt is displayed (if a password has been configured). A password must be entered within 30 seconds (and within three tries) or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end-user mode with the focus returned to the locked application. Without entry of a valid password, the switch into Administrator mode will not occur. Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured. When the valid password is entered, the Administration Control panel is displayed. When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the user is returned to the System Control Panel. If a password has not been configured, the Administrator Control panel is displayed. Control Panel Administrator Control Control Security Status Application: ... Internet Command Line: Application Startup Delay: seconds Figure 6-7 Administrator Control Panel Note: If your Administrator Control Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Multi-Application version. Use the Control tab options to select the application to launch when the device boots up. Move the cursor to the Application text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard Windows Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the application from the Browse dialog, tap OK. Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Command Line text box. Enter the number of seconds the selected Application must wait before starting to run upon reboot. If no application is specified when the Administrator Control panel is closed, the device reboots into Administrator mode. If a password has been set, but the application has not been specified, the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode. The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 242 Single Application Configuration End User Internet Explorer AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer, such as .HTML pages and JAVA applications. The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer’s address bar. To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method, the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer. This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode, End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE). The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar. The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re-enable the address bar. The administrator specifies the EUIE by simply checking the “Internet” checkbox in the Control tab of the Administrator applet. The internet application should then be entered in the “Application” text box. If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the device is desired, it should be treated like any other application. This means that IEXPLORER.EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line. In this case, do not check the Internet checkbox. Security Panel Administrator Control Control Security Status Hot Key: Password: Confirm Password: Figure 6-8 Administrator Security Panel Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode. The default hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A. A 2nd key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence. Note: Some key combinations cannot be specified because they conflict with the key combinations used by other LXE applications. The message “Selected hotkey is not allowed, Please re-enter” is displayed. A different Hotkey must be entered. Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box. Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key. The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use. The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application. Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes. The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with “Shift”, “Alt”, and “Ctrl” text strings representing the shift state keys. The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Single Application Configuration 243 For example, if the ‘Ctrl’ key is pressed followed by ‘A’, “Ctrl+A” is entered in the text box. If another key is pressed after a normal key press, the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started. A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch; this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key. However, when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes, the normal key must be entered from the keypad; it cannot be entered from the SIP. Password Move the cursor to the Password text box. The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match. Passwords are case sensitive. When the user exits the Administrator Control panel, the two passwords are compared to verify that they match. If they do not match, a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error. After the user closes the dialog box, the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again. If the passwords match, the password is encrypted and saved. See Also: E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Passwords MX3X Reference Guide 244 Single Application Configuration Status Panel Administrator Control Control View Level: Security Status Refresh Log Level: Clear Save As... Figure 6-9 Administrator Status Panel Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operation and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation. As the status information is stored in the registry and accumulates during AppLock configuration and operation, it is very important that the administrator periodically clear the status information to reduce the amount of registry space used. For this reason, the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged, as well as clear the status information. View Error Process Extended All Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked. Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program. Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging. All messages are displayed. Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another. The filtered records are displayed, all others are not displayed. Levels Note: If a level higher than Error is selected, the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator. In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely. The system default is Error Logging; however to reduce registry use, the administrator may want to select ‘None’ after verifying the configuration. Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry. • • • • • MX3X Reference Guide None Error Processing Extended All E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Error Messages 245 Save As When the 'Save As'… button is selected, a standard 'Save As' dialog screen is displayed. Specify the path and filename. If the filename exists, the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten. If the file does not exist, it is created. See Also: Error Messages Error Messages Any messages whose first word is an ‘ing’ word is output prior to the action described in the message. For example, “Switching to admin-hotkey press” is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process. For all operations that can result in an error, an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs. These messages contain the word “failure”. These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged which contains the word “OK” if the action completed successfully rather than with an error. For processing level messages, “Enter…” is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and “Exit…” is logged at the end (just before the return) of the function specified in the message. Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey; using default A hotkey is required. If there is a failure reading the hotkey, the internal factory default is used. LOG_ERROR App Command Line= Command line of the application being locked LOG_PROCESSING App= Name of the application being locked LOG_PROCESSING dwProcessID= <#> Device ID of the application being locked LOG_EX Encrypt exported key len <#> Size of encrypt export key LOG_EX Encrypt password length= <#> The length of the encrypted password. LOG_EX Encrypted data len <#> Length of the encrypted password LOG_EX hProcess= <#> Handle of the application being locked LOG_EX Key pressed = <#> A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey processing. LOG_EX ***************** The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened successfully. LOG_EX Address of keyboard hook procedure failure Applock found the kbdhook.dll, but was unable to get the address of the initialization procedure. For some reason the dll is corrupted. Look in the \Windows directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also delete applock.exe from the \Windows directory and reboot the unit. Deleting applock.exe triggers the applock system to reload. LOG_ERROR E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 246 Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Address of keyboard hook procedure OK Applock successfully retrieved the address of the keyboard filter initialization procedure. LOG_EX Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing. LOG_EX Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Application handle search failure The application being locked did not complete initialization. LOG_ERROR Application handle search OK The application initialized itself successfully LOG_ERROR Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock; the application could not be found or is corrupted. LOG_ERROR Backdoor message received The backdoor keys have been pressed. The backdoor hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the registry or reloading the device. LOG_PROCESSING Cannot find kbdhook.dll The load of the keyboard filter failed. This occurs when the dll is missing or is corrupted. Look in the \Windows directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also delete applock.exe from the \Windows directory and reboot the unit. Deleting applock.exe triggers the applock system to reload. LOG_ERROR Converted Pwd Converted password from wide to mbs. LOG_EX Could not create event EVT_HOTKEYCHG The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator Control panel. The event could not be created. LOG_ERROR Could not hook keyboard If the keyboard cannot be controlled, AppLock cannot process the hotkey. This failure prevents a mode switch into user mode. LOG_ERROR Could not start thread HotKeyMon The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes. The watch process could not be initiated. LOG_ERROR Ctrl after L or X Processing the backdoor entry. LOG_EX Ctrl pressed The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing. LOG_EX Ctrl Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry. LOG_EX Decrypt acquire context failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt acquired context OK Decryption process ok. LOG_EX Decrypt create hash failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt created hash OK Decryption process ok. LOG_EX MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Error Messages 247 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Decrypt failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt import key failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt imported key OK Decryption process ok. LOG_EX Encrypt acquire context failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt acquire encrypt context failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt acquired encrypt context OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt create hash failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt create key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt created encrypt hash OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt export key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt export key length failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt exported key OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt failure The password encryption failed. LOG_ERROR Encrypt gen key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt generate key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt get user key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt get user key ok Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt hash data failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt hash data from pwd OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt length failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt out of memory for key Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypted data OK The password has been successfully encrypted. LOG_EX Enter AppLockEnumWindows In order for AppLock to control the application being locked so it can prevent the application from exiting, AppLock launches the application and has to wait until it has created and initialized its main window. This message is logged when the function that waits for the application initialization is entered. LOG_EX Enter DecryptPwd Entering the password decryption process. LOG_PROCESSING E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 248 Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Enter EncryptPwd Entering the password encryption processing. LOG_PROCESSING Enter FullScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen mode. In full screen mode, the taskbar is hidden and disabled. LOG_PROCESSING Enter GetAppInfo Processing is at the beginning of the function that retrieves the application information from the registry. LOG_PROCESSING Enter password dialog Entering the password dialog processing. LOG_PROCESSING Enter password timeout Entering the password timeout processing. LOG_PROCESSING Enter restart app timer Some application shut down before AppLock can stop it. In these cases, AppLock gets notification of the exit. When the notification is received, AppLock starts a timer to restart the application. This message logs that the timer has expired and the processing is at the beginning of the timer function. LOG_PROCESSING Enter TaskbarScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen to non-full screen mode and enable the taskbar. LOG_PROCESSING Enter ToAdmin Entering the function that handles a mode switch into admin mode. LOG_PROCESSING Enter ToUser Entering the function that handles the mode switch to user mode LOG_PROCESSING Enter verify password Entering the password verification processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindowsFound There are two exit paths from the enumeration function. This message denotes the enumeration function found the application. LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindows-Not found There are two exit paths from the enumeration function. This message denotes the enumeration function did not find the application. LOG_PROCESSING Exit DecryptPwd Exiting password decryption processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit EncryptPwd Exiting password encryption processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit FullScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen to full screen. LOG_PROCESSING Exit GetAppInfo Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the application information from the registry. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog Exiting password prompt processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog-cancel Exiting password prompt w/cancel. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog-OK Exiting password prompt successfully. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password timeout Exiting password timeout processing. LOG_PROCESSING MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Error Messages 249 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Exit restart app timer Processing is at the end of the timer function LOG_PROCESSING Exit TaskbarScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back to normal operation for the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToAdmin Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into admin mode. LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToUser Exiting the user mode switch function. LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToUser-Registry read failure The AppName value does not exist in the registry so user mode cannot be entered. LOG_PROCESSING Exit verify password-no pwd set Exiting password verification. LOG_PROCESSING Exit verify password-response from dialog Exiting password verification. LOG_PROCESSING Found taskbar The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode. LOG_PROCESSING Getting address of keyboard hook init procedure AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook. LOG_PROCESSING Getting configuration from registry The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry. This occurs at initialization and also at entry into user mode. The registry must be re-read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the application being controlled. LOG_PROCESSING Getting encrypt pwd length The length of the encrypted password is being calculated. LOG_EX Hook wndproc failure AppLock is unable to lock the application. This could happen if the application being locked encountered an error after performing its initialization and shut itself down prior to being locked by AppLock. LOG_ERROR Hook wndproc of open app failure The application is open, but AppLock cannot lock it. LOG_ERROR Hot key event creation failure The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey notification. LOG_ERROR Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key set event failure When the administrator changes the hotkey configuration the hotkey controller must be notified. This notification failed. LOG_ERROR Hotkey press message received The user just pressed the configured hotkey. LOG_PROCESSING E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 250 Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level In app hook:WM_SIZE In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s window. This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it. LOG_EX In app hook:WM_WINDOWPOSCHANG ED In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s window. This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it. LOG_EX Initializing keyboard hook procedure Applock is calling the keyboard hook initialization. LOG_PROCESSING Keyboard hook initialization failure The keyboard filter initialization failed. LOG_ERROR Keyboard hook loaded OK The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully. LOG_EX L after Ctrl Processing the backdoor entry. LOG_EX Loading keyboard hook When Applock first loads, it loads a dll that contains the keyboard hook processing. This message is logged prior to the load attempt. LOG_PROCESSING Open failure The status information is being saved to a file and the file open has failed. This could occur if the file is write protected. If the file does not exist, it is created. LOG_ERROR Open registry failure If the Administration registry key does not exist, the switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in the Administration key is not available. LOG_ERROR Opened status file The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened successfully. LOG_EX Out of memory for encrypted pwd Not enough memory to encrypt the password. LOG_ERROR pRealTaskbarWndProc already set The taskbar control has already been installed. LOG_EX Pwd cancelled or invalid-remain in user mode The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded. LOG_EX Read registry error-hot key The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty. This is not considered an error. The keyboard hook uses an embedded default if the value is not set in the registry. LOG_ERROR Read registry failure-app name AppName registry value does not exist or is empty. This constitutes a failure for switching into user mode. LOG_ERROR Read registry failure-Cmd Line AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty. This is not considered an error since command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the application. LOG_ERROR MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Error Messages 251 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Read registry failure-Internet The Internet registry entry is missing or empty. This is not considered an error since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application. LOG_ERROR Registering Backdoor MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message. Both AppLock.exe and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization. LOG_PROCESSING Registering Hotkey MSG The applock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message. Both Applock.exe and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization. LOG_PROCESSING Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing. This user mode entry is attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or has changed the the application name or command line. LOG_ERROR Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when switching into user mode. This is because the administrator can change the settings during administration mode. The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the AppName value was missing or empty. LOG_ERROR Registry read failure The registry read failed. The registry information read when this message is logged is the application information. It the Adminstration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty, this error is logged. The other application information is not required. If the AppName value is not available, AppLock cannot switch into user mode. LOG_ERROR Reset system work area failure The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area. The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration mode. AppLock was unable to adjust this area. LOG_ERROR Shift pressed The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing. LOG_EX Shift Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Show taskbar The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-backdoor The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because of the backdoor key presses were entered by the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-hotkey press The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-kbdhook.dll not found The keyboard hook load failed, so Applock switches to admin mode. If a password is specified, the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered. LOG_PROCESSING E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 252 Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Switching to admin-keyboard hook initialization failure If the keyboard hook initialization fails, Applock switches to admin mode. . If a password is specified, the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-registry read failure See the explanation of the “Registry read failure” above. AppLock is switching into Admin mode. If a password has been configured, the prompt will be displayed and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to TaskbarScreenMode In administration mode, the taskbar is visible and enabled. LOG_EX Switching to user mode The registry was successfully read and AppLock is starting the process to switch to user mode. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to user-hotkey press The system is currently in admin mode and is now switching to user mode. The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Taskbar hook failure Applock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the locked application from re-enabling it. LOG_ERROR Taskbar hook OK AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar. LOG_EX Timeout looking for app window After the application is launched, AppLock must wait until the application has initialized itself before proceeding. The application did not start successfully and Applock has timed out. LOG_ERROR ToUser after admin, not at boot The user mode switch is attempted when the device boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey. The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press. LOG_EX ToUser after admin-app still open The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey press and the administrator has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration. LOG_EX ToUser after admin-no app or cmd line change If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press, the administrator may have left the configured application open. If so, AppLock does not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified; otherwise, it just locks it. LOG_EX Unable to move desktop The desktop is moved when switching into user mode. This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not affect the screen mode switch; processing continues. LOG_ERROR Unable to move taskbar The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode. This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not affect the screen mode switch; processing continues. LOG_ERROR Unhook taskbar wndproc failure AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar. This error does not affect AppLock processing LOG_ERROR MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Error Messages 253 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Unhook wndproc failure AppLock could not remove the hook that allows monitoring of the application. LOG_ERROR Unhooking taskbar In administration mode, the taskbar should return to normal operation, so AppLock’s control of the taskbar should be removed. LOG_EX Unhooking wndproc When the administrator leaves user mode, the device is fully operational; therefore, AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application. LOG_EX WM_SIZE adjusted This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the window size. LOG_EX X after Ctrl+L Processing the backdoor entry. LOG_EX Ret from password <#> Return value from password dialog. LOG_EX Decrypt data len <#> Length of decrypted password. LOG_EX Window handle to enumwindows=%x The window handle that is passed to the enumeration function. This message can be used by engineering with other development tools to trouble shoot application lock failures. LOG_EX WM_WINDOWPOSCHG adjusted=%x Output the window size after it has been adjusted by AppLock LOG_EX Term process restart –window not found The locked application has been closed using a method that cannot be detected by AppLock. AppLock will restart the application. LOG_ERROR E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 254 AppLock Registry Settings AppLock Registry Settings This system application runs at startup via the “launch” feature of LXE Windows CE .NET devices. When the launch feature is installed on the device, the following registry settings are created. The launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Filename=AppLock.exe HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Installed= HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\FileCheck= AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters that are needed by the application. These registry settings are as follows: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Administration\\AppName HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppCommandLine= In addition to the registry settings needed to specify the application, additional registry settings are needed to store the configuration options for AppLock. These options include, among others, the administrator’s password and hotkey. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\HotKey= HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\EP= MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Appendix A Key Maps Keypad Note: The key mapping in this appendix relates to the physical keypad. See section titled “Input Panel” for the Virtual (or Soft) Keypad used with the stylus. Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies Note: This key mapping is used on hand held computers that are NOT running an LXE Terminal Emulator. When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the key sequence. Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of NumLock is On and the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be toggled with a 2nd+F1 key sequence. The CAPS LED is illuminated when CapsLock is On. To get this key Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl Alt Contrast x F6 Volume x F8 Backlight x F10 nd 2nd 2 Shift Shft Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl Esc Esc Space Spc Enter Enter Scan 7 CapsLock (Toggle) 7 Press this key CapsLock Scan x F1 Back Space BkSp Tab Tab BackTab x Tab Break x F2 Pause x x F3 Up Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Right Arrow Left Scan key default value is Scan. Right Scan key default value is Enter. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 256 Key Maps To get this key Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl Alt Press this key CapsLock Left Arrow Left Arrow Insert x BkSp Delete x DOT Home x Left Arrow End x Right Arrow Page Up x Up Arrow Page Down x Down Arrow ScrollLock x x F4 F1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F7 F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 F10 F10 F11 x x F1 F12 x x F2 a Off A b Off B c Off C d Off D e Off E f Off F g Off G h Off H i Off I j Off J k Off K l Off L m Off M n Off N o Off O p Off P MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 257 To get this key Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl Alt Press this key CapsLock q Off Q r Off R s Off S t Off T u Off U v Off V w Off W x Off X y Off Y z Off Z A x A B x B C x C D x D E x E F x F G x G H x H I x I J x J K x K L x L M x M N x N O x O P x P Q x Q R x R S x S T x T U x U V x V W x W X x X Y x Y Z x Z E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 258 Key Maps To get this key Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl Alt Press this key CapsLock 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 DOT DOT < x 0 [ x 1 ] x 2 > x 3 = x 4 { x 5 } x 6 / x 7 - x 8 + x 9 * x I : (colon) x D ; (semicolon) x F ? x L ` x N _ (underscore) x M , (comma) x J ‘ (apostrophe) x H ~ (tilde) x B \ x S | x A “ x G ! x Q @ x W # x E MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 259 To get this key Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl Alt Press this key CapsLock $ x R % x T ^ x Y & x U ( x O ) x P 3270 Key Sequences Legend ........................Explanation......................... Key Sequence Attn ..............................Attention............................... Ctrl + A Clr ................................Clear ..................................... Ctrl + C Del ...............................Delete ................................... Ctrl + D E-Inp ............................Erase Input ........................... Ctrl + BkSp Ins ................................Insert .................................... Ctrl + I NL................................New Line.............................. Ctrl + N PA1 ............................................................................ Ctrl+F1 PA2 ............................................................................ Ctrl+F2 PA3 ............................................................................ Ctrl+F3 Rst................................Reset..................................... Ctrl + R SysReq.........................System ................................. Ctrl + S Please refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” for further information about Terminal Emulationspecific key functions on the mobile device. 5250 Key Sequences Legend ........................Explanation......................... Key Sequence Attn ..............................Attention............................... Ctrl + A Clr ................................Clear ..................................... Ctrl + C Del ...............................Delete ................................... Ctrl + D Dup ..............................Duplicate .............................. Ctrl + U E-Inp ............................Erase Input ........................... Ctrl + BkSp Field Exit .....................Enter..................................... Enter Fld –.............................Field Minus .......................... Ctrl + M Fld + ............................Field Plus.............................. Ctrl + L Ins ................................Insert .................................... Ctrl + I NL................................New Line.............................. Ctrl + N SysReq.........................System ................................. Ctrl + S Please refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” for further information about Terminal Emulationspecific key functions on the mobile device. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 260 Key Maps Creating Custom Key Maps Prerequisite: Note: LXE SDK CD There may be different SDK kits for Windows CE .NET 4.2 and CE 5.0. Contact your LXE representative to order an LXE SDK CD for your MX3X. Introduction A command-line compiler called KEYCOMP.EXE is provided on the SDK CD. Using this compiler, the System Administrator can convert a sample default key map text file into a custom key map text file which, when loaded onto the mobile device, can be chosen by the user to replace the default mobile device keymap and then switched back when they are finished using the customized keys. This custom key map file can be made to re-define the system return code for each of the 61 keys, key press or key press combinations. All keys, except the power key, can be re-mapped. Custom keymaps for the mobile device are created on a desktop PC using the command line compiler KEYCOMP.EXE. Keycomp processes the input keymap source file and outputs a registry text file. Note: Each VK_code has a numeric value (for example, VK_F20 = hex 83), these are documented in the SDK include file WINUSER.H (from Microsoft). The numeric value is what needs to go into the registry. Whether the value is hex or decimal depends on the registry editor being used - the one in the mobile device requires decimal, but the desktop one used over ActiveSync that a developer may use requires hex. For Example Default values: ScanCodeLeft = hex 83, decimal 131 ScanCodeRight = hex 84, decimal 132 Example: KEYCOMP DEFAULT.KEY Input File (writes KEYCOMP.REG to local directory) Compiler Æ DEFAULT.KEY Text File Æ KEYCOMP.EXE KEYCOMP.REG This output file should be renamed to xxx.REG (the suffix must remain REG), then copied to the mobile device over ActiveSync. Once the file is loaded on the mobile device, double-tap the file from the Windows CE Explorer desktop. This will run the REGLOAD utility to put it into the registry, and save the registry to non-volatile flash. The keymap is now a permanent part of the mobile device, and the REG file is no longer needed unless it is necessary to perform a cold boot; this will return the registry to factory defaults, and it will be necessary to double-tap the REG file again. Once the keymap has been added to the registry, it should appear in the Keyboard control panel as the name given in the MAPNAME field in the key file. To activate the keymap, select the keymap from the popup menu, and close the control panel with the OK button. To return to the default keymap, select 0409 from the keymap popup and tap OK. The compiler has three functional stages: • First, the input file is read and parsed for any syntax errors. The data read is stored in internal tables. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 261 • Second, the data parsed from the input file is validated to see that all of the items required by the keyboard driver for normal operation are present. • Third and finally, the KEYCOMP.REG file is written out in the format required by the REGLOAD utility on the Windows CE device. Programmable Scan Buttons and Custom Key Mapping The Left and Right Scan buttons can be reset using Custom Key Mapping. Custom keymapping changes the placement of the buttons (e.g., F1 can now be Scan Left). The keycode that the Scan Left (or F1) button generates is then determined by the setting in the scanner control panel (See Chapter 3 “System Configuration”, Control Panel”, “Scanner” or Chapter 4 “Scanner”.). Remapping does not allow multiple entries. If the System Administrator uses Custom Key Mapping set a Scan button to ENTER, the original ENTER key must be redefined to something else. However, if the scanner control panel is used to change the Scan button to generate an ENTER, the original ENTER key is maintained as well. Note: Tethered scanners are not activated/affected by the Scan buttons on the mobile device. Keymap Source Format The source file DEFAULT.KEY is supplied with the keymap compiler. This is the commented source for the default keymap 0409. The comments in this file should make the majority of this document redundant. There is a copy of this file at the end of this section, in “Sample Input File”. This section should be read while referring to this sample source, for simplicity. Note: You must change the name of the default key map from 0409 to some other number (i.e. 0509). To do this, change line #13 “MAPNAME=0409” to “MAPNAME=0509”. It is an important limitation that the keymap must have a 4, 5, or 6 digit numeric name; this is a limit of the Microsoft Windows CE layout manager. The format of this file is familiar to anyone who has used .INI files under Windows. There is a section header in square brackets, followed by various values in the form value=data. Lines beginning with a semicolon (;) or empty lines are ignored as comments. Spaces or tabs before or after the information are stripped off and ignored. Case is ignored in section names, value names, and value data. Note: Before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select 0409 from the keymap popup. Tap OK. COLxROWx Format Note: There is no relationship between the physical layout COL/ROW of the keyboard / keypad and the COL/ROW listing in the key map file. The key map file represents the electrical layout not the physical layout. All keys are specified in COLxROWx format. In this format, the first x is the 1 or 2 digit column in the keymap, and the second x is the 1 or 2 digit row in the keymap. All rows and columns are enumerated starting with zero (0). In the MAP section, the COLxROWx is the value name, and the values must be less than the MAPROWS and MAPCOLS specified in the GENERAL section. In the SPECIAL section, the COLxROWx is the value data, and the values given can be outside the normal key map limits. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 262 Key Maps GENERAL Section The first section is the GENERAL section. This contains the keymap name (all numerics), as well as the number of rows and columns in the keymap, and the algorithm for converting rows and columns to a data byte to go into the keymap table. . [General] MAPNAME=0409 MAPCNT=4 . MAPNAME Name of this map. This is what appears in the popup menu in the keyboard control panel. MAPCNT Gives the number of MAP sections (and hence keymap tables) in this source file. MAPCOLS Number of columns in each keymap table. This is defined by the hardware keyboard. MAPROWS Number of rows in each keymap table. This is defined by the hardware keyboard. ALGOR Defines the algorithm for converting row/column to internal scan code. Current values are: MX3X Note: scancode = ((column << 3) + row) You must change the name of the default key map from 0409 to some other number (i.e. 0509). To do this, change line #13 “MAPNAME=0409” to “MAPNAME=0509”. SPECIAL Section . [Special] KEYSHIFT=COL8ROW0 KEYALT=COL9ROW0 . The second section is the SPECIAL section, which contains the row and column definitions for certain modifier keys which must be processed independent of the overall keymap. Currently, these are only modifier keys. The only recognized names are: KEYSHIFT, KEYALT, KEY2ND, and KEYCONTROL, and these specify the row and column of these 4 specific modifier keys, in COLxROWx format. Note the row and column for these keys can be outside the keymap limits specified in the GENERAL section, since these are not loaded as part of the keymap proper. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 263 MAP Section . [Map] MAP=MAP_NORMAL ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL0ROW0=VK_ESCAPE COL0ROW1=VK_F1 . There will be several (4 to 7) MAP sections, each defining the keymap for a given combination of modifier keys. The keyboard driver requires keymaps for normal (no modifiers), SHIFT only, 2ND only, and 2ND-SHIFT combined. The CTRL modifier and ALT modifier do not have individual keymaps; the keystrokes are passed to the operating system, which is allowed to parse these keys according to Microsoft specifications (for example, ALT-keys are defined to only pulldown menus, with no other function). The only recognized value names are MAP and COLxROWx (defining a key code). The only valid values for MAP are: MAP_NORMAL no modifier keys MAP_2ND 2nd modifier only MAP_SHIFT shift modifier only MAP_2NDSHF (or) MAP_2NDSHIFT 2nd and shift modifiers together In addition, certain keymaps are used for special adjustment functions within the keyboard driver, via the CHANGE+mapname specification: MAP_VOLUM (or) MAP_VOLUME special keymap for volume adjustment MAP_CONTR (or) MAP_CONTRAST special keymap for contrast adjustment MAP_BRITE (or) MAP_BRIGHT special keymap for brightness adjustment When these maps are selected, the keyboard driver handles the up arrow and down arrow as adjusting the particular parameter up and down, and any other key exits the adjustment state. Keys in these modes are handled completely inside the keyboard driver, and are not propagated to the operating system. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 264 Key Maps Key codes are defined by COLxROWx=scancode. Scancode has a number of options, as follows: VK_code any valid Windows VK code (see below for valid codes) 'x' a single ASCII character ('A','b','1','@',' ', etc.) SHIFT+VK_code for a shifted VK code (see below for valid codes) SHIFT+'x' for a shifted ASCII character (should not be needed) ACTION+code special function key (valid codes listed below) CHANGE+mapname for modifier keys, change keymaps to mapname, as specified above OPEN an unused key position, does nothing when pressed Valid ACTION codes are as follows: SCAN1 Scan key 1 (left side of screen on mobile device) SCAN2 Scan key 2 (right side of screen on mobile device) SCAN3 Handle trigger button (unused on mobile device, but specified) POWER power button BACKLIGHT backlight on/off function Note that specifying the power button in a different location will affect suspend/resume functions. The "15-second hold to force reboot" function is controlled by hardware, and will only work with the default power button. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 265 Keycomp Error Messages Most error messages will specify the line within the keymap source file where the error occurred. Duplicate key A COLxROWx code was found in a MAP table, but that COL/ROW already has a value assigned. GENERAL section must come before MAP The GENERAL section must come first, or at least before any MAP sections. The GENERAL section defines parameters which are needed to process Maps Header line missing close bracket The section header line must have square brackets before and after the section name Header line missing open bracket The section header line must have square brackets before and after the section name Invalid ACTION code %s The key scan code is specified as ACTION+code, but the ACTION code parsed is not recognized. The following values are valid: SCAN1, SCAN2, SCAN3, POWER, or BACKLIGHT. Invalid keycode %s The keycode parsed is not recognized. The following values are valid: • VK code from the VK code table (below) • 'x' where x is an ASCII code (e.g. 'A' or '#'). • OPEN for unused entries (will not do anything when pressed) Invalid MAP value %s The MAP value parsed is not one the following list: MAP_NORMAL, MAP_2ND, MAP_SHIFT, MAP_2NDSHF, MAP_2NDSHIFT, MAP_VOLUM, MAP_VOLUME, MAP_CONTR, MAP_CONTRAST, MAP_BRITE, or MAP_BRIGHT. Invalid MAPCNT (1-%d valid) The specified MAPCNT exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler. Invalid MAPCOLS (1-%d valid) The specified MAPCOLS exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler. Invalid MAPROWS (1-%d valid) The specified MAPROWS exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler. Invalid ROWCOL format A COLxROWx was expected, but the format was not correct. The only valid formats are: COLxROWx, COLxxROWx, COLxROWxx, or COLxxROWxx, where xx are decimal numeric digits (0-9). E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 266 Key Maps Invalid scan code The scan code parsed is not recognized. The scan code can take one of the following formats: • • • • • • • VK_code 'x' SHIFT+VK_code SHIFT+'x' ACTION+code CHANGE+mapname OPEN Invalid section name %s The section name parsed is invalid. The only recognized names are: GENERAL, SPECIAL, or MAP Invalid SHIFT code %s The key scan code is specified as SHIFT+code, but the SHIFT code parsed is not recognized. The following values are valid: • VK code from the VK code table (below) • 'x' where x is an ASCII code (e.g. 'A', '3', or '#'). Invalid value %s in GENERAL section The value name parsed is invalid for the GENERAL section. The recognized names are: MAPNAME, MAPCNT, MAPCOLS, MAPROWS, or ALGOR Invalid value %s in MAP section The value name parsed is not expected in the SPECIAL section. The only recognized names are: MAP and COLxxx. Invalid value %s in SPECIAL section The value name parsed is not expected in the SPECIAL section. The only recognized names are: KEYSHIFT, KEYALT, KEY2ND, and KEYCONTROL. Invalid VK_ code %s The VK code parsed is not recognized. See the VK Code Table (below) for valid values. Map ended without MAP value The MAP section must contain a MAP value, so the data fields can be parsed. MAPNAME must be all numerics Because of limitations in Microsoft Layout Manager, the map name must be all numeric (4, 5, or 6 digits). The name parsed did not fit this limitation. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 267 No definition for map MAP_2ND There is no 2nd keymap defined. The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for map MAP_2NDSHIFT There is no 2nd-SHIFT keymap defined. The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for map MAP_NORMAL There is no Normal keymap defined. The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for map MAP_SHIFT There is no SHIFT keymap defined. The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.key2nd No 2ND modifier key definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keyalt No ALT modifier key definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keycontrol No CTRL modifier key definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keydnarrow No down arrow definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keypower No power key definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keyscan1 No Scan Key 1 definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 268 Key Maps No definition for MapHead.keyscan2 No Scan Key 2 definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keyscan3 No Trigger Button definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keyshift No SHIFT modifier key definition was found. The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No definition for MapHead.keyuparrow No up arrow definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. No equal in value line A value line must be of the form value=data. A value line was expected, but there was no equal in it. (or) A comment line did not begin with a semicolon (;). No MAPNAME defined There is no map name defined. The keyboard driver requires this name to be able to load the keymap tables. This message comes from the post-parse validation, so no line # is specified. Scan code algorithm required A COLxROWx data value was found before any ALGOR statement. ALGOR algorithm is parsed to decide how to encode COLxROWx into a keymap value. Too many maps for specified MAPCNT There are more MAP sections defined that the MAPCNT field specified. Unknown scan code algorithm The ALGOR algorithm specified is not one that KEYCOMP understands. Unrecognized scancode algorithm %s The ALGOR algorithm specified is not one that KEYCOMP understands. Value outside of section A value (defined as value=data) is only valid within a section (defined as [section]). A value line was found when a section header line was expected. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 269 Sample Input File ;;---------------------------------------------------;; keymap file for MX3X default keyboard ;;---------------------------------------------------;;---------------------------------------------------;; general parms give the size of arrays ;; all numeric values are decimal ;; these numbers are validated with the data below ;; at compile time ;; MAPNAME must be all numerics ;;---------------------------------------------------[General] MAPNAME=0409 MAPCNT=4 MAPCOLS=8 MAPROWS=8 ALGOR=MX3X ;;---------------------------------------------------;; special keys are accessed outside the map ;; this specifies the row and column ;; these should not need to change, but... ;;---------------------------------------------------[Special] KEYSHIFT=COL8ROW0 KEYALT=COL9ROW0 KEY2ND=COL10ROW0 KEYCONTROL=COL11ROW0 ;;---------------------------------------------------;; the name of this key doesn't matter ;; the important part is the MAP value ;; codes are defined in docs ;; this is the map for keys with no modifier ;;---------------------------------------------------[Map] MAP=MAP_NORMAL ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL0ROW0=VK_ESCAPE COL0ROW1=VK_F1 COL0ROW2=ACTION+POWER COL0ROW3=VK_F2 COL0ROW4=VK_F5 COL0ROW5=VK_F7 COL0ROW6='8' COL0ROW7=ACTION+SCAN1 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL1ROW0='Q' COL1ROW1='9' COL1ROW2=ACTION+SCAN3 COL1ROW3='T' COL1ROW4='U' COL1ROW5='4' COL1ROW6='O' E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 270 Key Maps COL1ROW7=ACTION+SCAN2 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL2ROW0='A' COL2ROW1=open COL2ROW2='D' COL2ROW3='G' COL2ROW4='J' COL2ROW5='1' COL2ROW6='L' COL2ROW7='3' ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL3ROW0=' ' COL3ROW1=open COL3ROW2='X' COL3ROW3='V' COL3ROW4='N' COL3ROW5='0' COL3ROW6=VK_LEFT COL3ROW7=VK_TAB ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL4ROW0=VK_F9 COL4ROW1='S' COL4ROW2=VK_RIGHT COL4ROW3='F' COL4ROW4='H' COL4ROW5='K' COL4ROW6='2' COL4ROW7=VK_UP ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL5ROW0='6' COL5ROW1='Z' COL5ROW2=VK_BACK COL5ROW3='C' COL5ROW4='B' COL5ROW5='M' COL5ROW6=VK_PERIOD COL5ROW7=VK_DOWN ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL6ROW0=VK_F10 COL6ROW1='W' COL6ROW2=VK_RETURN COL6ROW3='R' COL6ROW4='Y' COL6ROW5='I' COL6ROW6='5' COL6ROW7='P' ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL7ROW0='E' COL7ROW1=open COL7ROW2=VK_F3 COL7ROW3=VK_F4 COL7ROW4=VK_F6 COL7ROW5='7' COL7ROW6=VK_F8 COL7ROW7=open ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 271 ;;---------------------------------------------------;; the name of this key doesn't matter ;; the important part is the MAP value ;; codes are defined in docs ;; this is the map for keys with only 2ND ;;---------------------------------------------------[Map] MAP=MAP_2ND ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL0ROW0=open COL0ROW1=VK_CAPITAL COL0ROW2=ACTION+POWER COL0ROW3=SHIFT+VK_PAUSE COL0ROW4=open COL0ROW5=open COL0ROW6=VK_HYPHEN COL0ROW7=ACTION+SCAN1 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL1ROW0=SHIFT+'1' COL1ROW1=SHIFT+VK_EQUAL COL1ROW2=ACTION+SCAN3 COL1ROW3=SHIFT+'5' COL1ROW4=SHIFT+'7' COL1ROW5=VK_EQUAL COL1ROW6=SHIFT+'9' COL1ROW7=ACTION+SCAN2 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL2ROW0=SHIFT+VK_BACKSLASH COL2ROW1=open COL2ROW2=SHIFT+VK_SEMICOLON COL2ROW3=SHIFT+VK_APOSTROPHE COL2ROW4=VK_COMMA COL2ROW5=VK_LBRACKET COL2ROW6=SHIFT+VK_SLASH COL2ROW7=SHIFT+VK_PERIOD ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL3ROW0=open COL3ROW1=open COL3ROW2=open COL3ROW3=open COL3ROW4=VK_BACKQUOTE COL3ROW5=SHIFT+VK_COMMA COL3ROW6=VK_HOME COL3ROW7=SHIFT+VK_TAB ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL4ROW0=open COL4ROW1=VK_BACKSLASH COL4ROW2=VK_END COL4ROW3=VK_SEMICOLON COL4ROW4=VK_APOSTROPHE COL4ROW5=VK_PERIOD COL4ROW6=VK_RBRACKET COL4ROW7=VK_PRIOR ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL5ROW0=SHIFT+VK_RBRACKET COL5ROW1=open E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 272 Key Maps COL5ROW2=VK_INSERT COL5ROW3=open COL5ROW4=SHIFT+VK_BACKQUOTE COL5ROW5=SHIFT+VK_HYPHEN COL5ROW6=VK_DELETE COL5ROW7=VK_NEXT ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL6ROW0=ACTION+BACKLIGHT COL6ROW1=SHIFT+'2' COL6ROW2=open COL6ROW3=SHIFT+'4' COL6ROW4=SHIFT+'6' COL6ROW5=SHIFT+'8' COL6ROW6=SHIFT+VK_LBRACKET COL6ROW7=SHIFT+'0' ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL7ROW0=SHIFT+'3' COL7ROW1=open COL7ROW2=open COL7ROW3=open COL7ROW4=CHANGE+MAP_CONTRAST COL7ROW5=VK_SLASH COL7ROW6=CHANGE+MAP_VOLUME COL7ROW7=open ;;---------------------------------------------------;; the name of this key doesn't matter ;; the important part is the MAP value ;; codes are defined in docs ;; this is the map for keys with 2ND and SHIFT ;;---------------------------------------------------[Map] MAP=MAP_2NDSHIFT ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL0ROW0=open COL0ROW1=VK_F11 COL0ROW2=ACTION+POWER COL0ROW3=VK_F12 COL0ROW4=open COL0ROW5=open COL0ROW6='8' COL0ROW7=ACTION+SCAN1 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL1ROW0=open COL1ROW1='9' COL1ROW2=ACTION+SCAN3 COL1ROW3=open COL1ROW4=open COL1ROW5='4' COL1ROW6=open COL1ROW7=ACTION+SCAN2 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL2ROW0=open COL2ROW1=open COL2ROW2=open COL2ROW3=open COL2ROW4=open MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 273 COL2ROW5='1' COL2ROW6=open COL2ROW7='3' ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL3ROW0=open COL3ROW1=open COL3ROW2=open COL3ROW3=open COL3ROW4=open COL3ROW5='0' COL3ROW6=open COL3ROW7=open ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL4ROW0=open COL4ROW1=open COL4ROW2=open COL4ROW3=open COL4ROW4=open COL4ROW5=open COL4ROW6='2' COL4ROW7=open ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL5ROW0='6' COL5ROW1=open COL5ROW2=open COL5ROW3=open COL5ROW4=open COL5ROW5=open COL5ROW6=open COL5ROW7=open ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL6ROW0=open COL6ROW1=open COL6ROW2=open COL6ROW3=open COL6ROW4=open COL6ROW5=open COL6ROW6='5' COL6ROW7=open ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL7ROW0=open COL7ROW1=open COL7ROW2=VK_PAUSE COL7ROW3=VK_SCROLL COL7ROW4=VK_SNAPSHOT COL7ROW5='7' COL7ROW6=open COL7ROW7=open ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 274 Key Maps ;;---------------------------------------------------;; the name of this key doesn't matter ;; the important part is the MAP value ;; codes are defined in docs ;; this is the map for keys with only SHIFT ;;---------------------------------------------------[Map] MAP=MAP_SHIFT ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL0ROW0=SHIFT+VK_ESCAPE COL0ROW1=SHIFT+VK_F1 COL0ROW2=ACTION+POWER COL0ROW3=SHIFT+VK_F2 COL0ROW4=SHIFT+VK_F5 COL0ROW5=SHIFT+VK_F7 COL0ROW6=SHIFT+'8' COL0ROW7=ACTION+SCAN1 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL1ROW0=SHIFT+'Q' COL1ROW1=SHIFT+'9' COL1ROW2=ACTION+SCAN3 COL1ROW3=SHIFT+'T' COL1ROW4=SHIFT+'U' COL1ROW5=SHIFT+'4' COL1ROW6=SHIFT+'O' COL1ROW7=ACTION+SCAN2 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL2ROW0=SHIFT+'A' COL2ROW1=open COL2ROW2=SHIFT+'D' COL2ROW3=SHIFT+'G' COL2ROW4=SHIFT+'J' COL2ROW5=SHIFT+'1' COL2ROW6=SHIFT+'L' COL2ROW7=SHIFT+'3' ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL3ROW0=SHIFT+' ' COL3ROW1=open COL3ROW2=SHIFT+'X' COL3ROW3=SHIFT+'V' COL3ROW4=SHIFT+'N' COL3ROW5=SHIFT+'0' COL3ROW6=SHIFT+VK_LEFT COL3ROW7=SHIFT+VK_TAB ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL4ROW0=SHIFT+VK_F9 COL4ROW1=SHIFT+'S' COL4ROW2=SHIFT+VK_RIGHT COL4ROW3=SHIFT+'F' COL4ROW4=SHIFT+'H' COL4ROW5=SHIFT+'K' COL4ROW6=SHIFT+'2' COL4ROW7=SHIFT+VK_UP ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL5ROW0=SHIFT+'6' COL5ROW1=SHIFT+'Z' MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 275 COL5ROW2=SHIFT+VK_BACK COL5ROW3=SHIFT+'C' COL5ROW4=SHIFT+'B' COL5ROW5=SHIFT+'M' COL5ROW6=SHIFT+VK_PERIOD COL5ROW7=SHIFT+VK_DOWN ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL6ROW0=SHIFT+VK_F10 COL6ROW1=SHIFT+'W' COL6ROW2=SHIFT+VK_RETURN COL6ROW3=SHIFT+'R' COL6ROW4=SHIFT+'Y' COL6ROW5=SHIFT+'I' COL6ROW6=SHIFT+'5' COL6ROW7=SHIFT+'P' ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; COL7ROW0=SHIFT+'E' COL7ROW1=open COL7ROW2=SHIFT+VK_F3 COL7ROW3=SHIFT+VK_F4 COL7ROW4=SHIFT+VK_F6 COL7ROW5=SHIFT+'7' COL7ROW6=SHIFT+VK_F8 COL7ROW7=open E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 276 Key Maps Sample Output File [HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Keyboard Layout\0409] ;; header limits and special keys ;; MAPCNT ;; MAPCOLS ;; MAPROWS ;; # of keys in each map ;; (unused) ;; (unused) ;; scancode value for power key ;; scancode value for up arrow ;; scancode value for down arrow ;; scancode value for scan key 1 ;; scancode value for scan key 2 ;; scancode value for trigger button ;; scancode value for SHIFT ;; scancode value for ALT ;; scancode value for 2ND ;; scancode value for CTRL key "Head"=hex: 04,08,08,40,00,00,02,27,2F,07,0F,0A,40,48,50,58 ;; Map0 is the scancode values for the NORMAL key map "Map0"=hex:\ 1B,70,DF,71,74,76,38,87,51,39,89,54,55,34,4F,88,\ 41,00,44,47,4A,31,4C,33,20,00,58,56,4E,30,25,09,\ 78,53,27,46,48,4B,32,26,36,5A,08,43,42,4D,BE,28,\ 79,57,0D,52,59,49,35,50,45,00,72,73,75,37,77,00 ;; Flag0 is the shift codes for the NORMAL key map "Flag0"=hex:\ 00,00,A0,00,00,00,00,A0,00,00,A0,00,00,00,00,A0,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00 ;; Map1 is the scancode values for the 2ND key map "Map1"=hex:\ 00,14,DF,13,00,00,BD,87,31,BB,89,35,37,BB,39,88,\ DC,00,BA,DE,BC,DB,BF,BE,00,00,00,00,C0,BC,24,09,\ 00,DC,23,BA,DE,BE,DD,21,DD,00,2D,00,C0,BD,2E,22,\ 8A,32,00,34,36,38,DB,30,33,00,00,00,00,BF,00,00 ;; Flag1 is the shift codes for the 2ND key map "Flag1"=hex:\ 00,00,A0,10,00,86,00,A0,10,10,A0,10,10,00,10,A0,\ 10,00,10,10,00,00,10,10,00,00,00,00,00,10,00,10,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,10,00,00,00,10,10,00,00,\ A0,10,00,10,10,10,10,10,10,00,00,00,85,00,84,00 ;; Map2 is the scancode values for the 2ND-SHIFT key map "Map2"=hex:\ 00,7A,DF,7B,00,00,38,87,00,39,89,00,00,34,00,88,\ 00,00,00,00,00,31,00,33,00,00,00,00,00,30,00,00,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,32,00,36,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\ MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Key Maps 277 00,00,00,00,00,00,35,00,00,00,13,91,2C,37,00,00 ;; Flag2 is the shift codes for the 2ND-SHIFT key map "Flag2"=hex:\ 00,00,A0,00,00,00,00,A0,00,00,A0,00,00,00,00,A0,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\ 00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00 ;; Map3 is the scancode values for the SHIFT key map "Map3"=hex:\ 1B,70,DF,71,74,76,38,87,51,39,89,54,55,34,4F,88,\ 41,00,44,47,4A,31,4C,33,20,00,58,56,4E,30,25,09,\ 78,53,27,46,48,4B,32,26,36,5A,08,43,42,4D,BE,28,\ 79,57,0D,52,59,49,35,50,45,00,72,73,75,37,77,00 ;; Flag3 is the shift codes for the SHIFT key map "Flag3"=hex:\ 10,10,A0,10,10,10,10,A0,10,10,A0,10,10,10,10,A0,\ 10,00,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,00,10,10,10,10,10,10,\ 10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,\ 10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,00,10,10,10,10,10,00 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 278 Key Maps List of Valid VK Codes for CE .NET and CE This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler. Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further clarification of the meaning of these key codes. Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under Windows CE .NET and CE. Note: There may be different VK Codes for Windows CE .NET 4.2 and CE 5.0. Check with your LXE representative before using VK Codes for your MX3X. VK_ADD VK_APOSTROPHE VK_APPS VK_ATTN VK_BACK VK_BACKQUOTE VK_BACKSLASH VK_BROWSER_BACK VK_BROWSER_FAVORITES VK_BROWSER_FORWARD VK_BROWSER_HOME VK_BROWSER_REFRESH VK_BROWSER_SEARCH VK_BROWSER_STOP VK_CANCEL VK_CAPITAL VK_CLEAR VK_COMMA VK_CONTROL VK_CONVERT VK_CRSEL VK_DECIMAL VK_DELETE VK_DIVIDE VK_DOWN VK_END VK_EQUAL VK_EREOF VK_ESCAPE VK_EXECUTE VK_EXSEL VK_F1 VK_F10 VK_F11 VK_F12 VK_F13 VK_F14 VK_F15 VK_F16 VK_F17 VK_F18 VK_F19 VK_F2 VK_F20 VK_F21 VK_F22 VK_F23 VK_F24 MX3X Reference Guide VK_F3 VK_F4 VK_F5 VK_F6 VK_F7 VK_F8 VK_F9 VK_FINAL VK_HANGUL VK_HANJA VK_HELP VK_HOME VK_HYPHEN VK_INSERT VK_JUNJA VK_KANA VK_KANJI VK_LAUNCH_APP1 VK_LAUNCH_APP2 VK_LAUNCH_MAIL VK_LAUNCH_MEDIA_SELECT VK_LBRACKET VK_LBUTTON VK_LCONTROL VK_LEFT VK_LMENU VK_LSHIFT VK_LWIN VK_MBUTTON VK_MEDIA_NEXT_TRACK VK_MEDIA_PLAY_PAUSE VK_MEDIA_PREV_TRACK VK_MEDIA_STOP VK_MENU VK_MULTIPLY VK_NEXT VK_NOCONVERT VK_NONAME VK_NUMLOCK VK_NUMPAD0 VK_NUMPAD1 VK_NUMPAD2 VK_NUMPAD3 VK_NUMPAD4 VK_NUMPAD5 VK_NUMPAD6 VK_NUMPAD7 VK_NUMPAD8 VK_NUMPAD9 VK_OEM_CLEAR VK_OFF VK_PA1 VK_PAUSE VK_PERIOD VK_PLAY VK_PRINT VK_PRIOR VK_RBRACKET VK_RBUTTON VK_RCONTROL VK_RETURN VK_RIGHT VK_RMENU VK_RSHIFT VK_RWIN VK_SCROLL VK_SELECT VK_SEMICOLON VK_SEPARATOR VK_SHIFT VK_SLASH VK_SLEEP VK_SNAPSHOT VK_SPACE VK_SUBTRACT VK_TAB VK_UP VK_VOLUME_DOWN VK_VOLUME_MUTE VK_VOLUME_UP VK_ZOOM E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Appendix B Technical Specifications Physical Specifications Features Specifications Comments CPU Xscale PXA255 CPU operating at 400 MHz. Turbo mode switching is supported. 32 bit CPU (with on-chip cache) Compact Flash (Internal) Supports an ATA interface only. 3.3v ATA flash card. Inaccessible by customer. Memory ROM 64 MB Flash RAM 64 or 128MB of SDRAM System Memory LCD Monochrome Transflective Transflective LCD with touchscreen. Transmissive Color Customer Configurable Backlighting SRAM or Flash PCMCIA Type I or II PC Cards (Various Sizes) Compact Flash Card Bootable SRAM PC Card, ATA Flash PC Card, or ATA Hard Drive PC Card PCMCIA Interface Slot 0 accepts Type I and II Slot 1 accepts Type I and II CF+ Compatible with the PCMCIA version 2.1 standard. Weights Unit with radio, battery and scanner endcap Less than 30 oz <850g Battery 5.6 oz 157g Network Card - 2.4GHz Type II 1.0 oz 1.6 oz 28g 45g SRAM Card 1 oz 28g IrDA Connector (COM 2) bidirectional half-duplex Supports 115k baud Endcap - Dual Serial, DA-9 or DB-9 Connector (COM 1 and COM 3) 9 Pin “D” (male) Connector. Provides connection to external devices such as a printer. Endcap - incl Scanner (COM 3), DA-9 or DB-9 Connector (COM 1) 9 Pin “D” (male) Connector. Provides connection to external devices such as a printer. Endcap – incl Scanner (COM 3), DA-9 (COM 1) Scanner – SE923 or SE955 Symbol engine 8.5V - 15 VDC Input Power External Battery Charger Contacts 10.8 - 16VDC Input Power Power Jack Display Mass Storage Removable PC Card External Connectors/Interface USB Host / Client Ports Power Connector E-EQ-MX3XRG-H (Customer Installable) MX3X Reference Guide 280 Technical Specifications Features Specifications Audio Connector Dimensions w/Endcap Batteries Comments Audio Jack Length 6” 15 cm Width 8” 20 cm Depth (No RFID) 1.44” 3.66 cm Depth (With RFID Module) 1.88” 4.77 cm Main 1900 mAh 10.8V, 3 cell, Li-Ion battery pack In-Unit Chargeable or Externally Chargeable Backup (CMOS) Internal Nickel-Cadmium (NiCd) 5.7V max. Automatically charges from main battery during normal operation Memory operational for 5 minutes when main battery is depleted Display Specifications Type LCD - Transflective Monochrome, Transmissive Color Electroluminescent Backlighting Resolution 640x240 pixels Size ½ VGA landscape Diagonal Viewing Area 5.92 in (150.4mm) Dot Pitch 0.22mm Dot Size 0.20mm x 0.20mm Color Scale Monochrome - 16 Shades of Gray Transmissive – 256 colors MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Technical Specifications 281 Cable Specifications Caution: Do Not Use this Port for Cables with USB Plugs/Receptacles: Caution: Do Not Use these Labeled Ports for Tethered Scanners: Cable Ends Receptacle Plug Receptacle Plug USB A USB A RS232 RS232 USB B USB B Cable Pinouts and Diagrams MX3X068CBLD9USBHOST – CBL, USB D9F to USB Type A Receptacle ActiveSync: Connect from mobile device USB-C port to USB Type A Host. E.g. laptop/desktop PC. MX3XA069CBLD9USBCLNT – CBL, USB D9F to USB Type B Plug Connect from MX3X USB-H port to USB Type B device. e.g. Hub, camera, other client device, etc. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Mobile Device Client End Goes To USB Type A Plug End 1......................... Host Detect ........................ 1 2......................... Not Used 3......................... D+ .................................... 3 4......................... Not Used 5......................... GND ................................ 4 6......................... Not Used 7......................... D- ..................................... 2 8......................... Not Used 9 Not Used Mobile Device Host port End Goes To USB Type B Plug End 1......................... Not Used 2......................... Not Used 3......................... D+ .................................... 3 4......................... Not Used 5......................... GND ................................ 4 6......................... Not Used 7......................... D- ..................................... 2 8......................... Not Used 9......................... PWR .................................. 1 MX3X Reference Guide 282 MX3XA070CBLD9RS232AS - Cable, RS232 (D9F) / RS232 (D9F) MX3XA068CBLD9USBHOST – CBL, USB D9F to USB Type A Plug Connect from mobile device USB-H to a USB device with a cable that has a Type A plug end. e.g. USB mouse, USB keyboard, etc. Technical Specifications ActiveSync: Connect from desk cradle male serial port to a D9 male serial port on a PC / Laptop. Cable used for serial ActiveSync. Mobile Device Host port End Tethered Scanner: Connect to MX3X powered Cradle D9F Serial port. USB Type A Receptacle End 1......................... Not Used 2......................... Not Used 3......................... D+ .................................... 3 4......................... Not Used 5......................... GND ................................ 4 6......................... Not Used 7......................... D- ..................................... 2 8......................... Not Used 9......................... PWR .................................. 1 D9 Female 9000A054CBL6D9D9 - Cable, RS232 (D9F) / RS232 (D9F) Goes To D9 Female 1....................................... 7 2....................................... 3 3....................................... 2 4....................................... 6,8 5....................................... 5 6,8.................................... 4 7....................................... 1 9....................................... Not Used RS232 Tethered Scanner Serial Port on Cradle Do Not Use these Endcap Labeled Ports for Tethered Scanners: MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Technical Specifications 283 Environmental Specifications Mobile Device and Endcaps Operating Temperature -4°F to 122°F (-20°C to 50°C) monochrome 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) color Storage Temperature -22°F to 158°F (-30°C to 70°C) Water and Dust IEC IP66 Operating Humidity Up to 90% non-condensing at 104°F (40°C) Ambient Light – ranging from total darkness to direct sunlight Display readable (with backlight on) for <= two hours Contamination Resistant to exposure to skin oil and other lubricants. Vibration Based on MIL Std 810F ESD 8 KV air, 4kV direct contact Shock, MX3X Multiple 4 foot drops to concrete. 6 foot with protective cover/boot Keypad readable (after previous exposure to a 60W bulb for 30 minutes) for <= 15 minutes. Power Supplies US AC Wall Adapter Input Power Switch None Power "ON" Indicator None Input Fusing Thermal Fuse Input Voltage 108VAC min - 132VAC max Input Frequency 47 - 63 Hz Input Connector North American wall plug, no ground Output Connector Barrel connector, female, 5.5 x 2.5 x 11.5mm, Center Positive Output Voltage +12VDC, unregulated Output Current 0 Amps min, 1.5 A max Operating Temperature 32° F to 104° F / 0° C to 40° C Storage Temperature -13° F to 158° F / -25° C to 70° C Humidity Operates in a relative humidity of 5 – 95% (non-condensing) E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 284 Technical Specifications International AC Adapter Operating Temperature 32°F to 104°F (-0°C to 40°C) Storage Temperature -13°F to 158°F (-25°C to 70°C) Operating Humidity Up to 90% non-condensing at 104°F (40°C) Input Power Switch None Power "ON" Indicator None Input Voltage 108VAC min - 264VAC max Input Frequency 47 - 63 Hz Input Connector Customer supplied Output Connector Barrel connector, female, 5.5 x 2.5 x 11mm, Center Positive Output Voltage +12VDC, regulated Output Voltage Regulation +/- 5% Output Current 0 Amps min, 1.00 Amps max MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Technical Specifications 285 Network Device Specifications Summit Client in PCMCIA Adapter 2.4GHz Bus Interface: Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter Network Frequencies: 2.4 - 2.4897 GHz IEEE 802.11b 802.11g DSSS OFDM RF Data Rates: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps RF Power Level: 18 dBm 64mW Max Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 13 Japan Operating Temperature see MX3X Environmental Specs Storage Temperature see MX3X Environmental Specs Connectivity: Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI PCMCIA Cisco Client 2.4GHz Type II Bus Interface PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot Network Frequencies 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS RF Data Rates 11 Mbps RF Power Level 100 mW max. Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 14 Japan Operating Temperature see MX3X Environmental Specs Storage Temperature see MX3X Environmental Specs Connectivity Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI Antenna Internal PCMCIA Symbol Client 11Mb 2.4GHz Type II Bus Interface: PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot Network Frequencies: 2.4 - 2.5 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS RF Data Rates: 11 Mbps maximum RF Power Level: 100 mW Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan Operating Temperature see MX3X Environmental Specs Storage Temperature see MX3X Environmental Specs Connectivity: TCP/IP, Ethernet, NDSI E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 286 Technical Specifications Hat Encoding The MX3X supports only 7-bit hat encoding which means only ^@ through ^_ (underscore) are supported. Desired ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 (XON) DC2 DC3 (XOFF) DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US IND NEL SSA ® ¯ ° ± ² ³ Hex Value Hat Encoded Desired ASCII 0X00 0X01 0X02 0X03 0X04 0X05 0X06 0X07 0X08 0X09 0X0A 0X0B 0X0C 0X0D 0X0E 0X0F 0X10 0X11 0X12 0X13 0X14 0X15 0X16 0X17 0X18 0X19 0X1A 0X1B 0X1C 0X1D 0X1E 0X1F 0X7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 ^@ ^A ^B ^C ^D ^E ^F ^G ^H ^I ^J ^K ^L ^M ^N ^O ^P ^Q ^R ^S ^T ^U ^V ^W ^X ^Y ^Z ^[ ^\\ ^] ^^ ^_ (Underscore) ^? ~^@ ~^A ~^B ~^C ~^D ~^E ~^F ~. (Period) ~/ ~0 (Zero) ~1 ~2 ~3 ESA HTS HTJ VTS PLD PLU RI SS2 SS3 DCS PU1 PU2 STS CCH MW SPA EPA MX3X Reference Guide Hex Value Hat Encoded CSI ST OSC PM APC (no-break space) ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 ~^G ~^H ~^I ~^J ~^K ~^L ~^M ~^N ~^O ~^P ~^Q ~^R ~^S ~^T ~^U ~^V ~^W ~^X ~^Y ~^Z ~^[ ~^\\ ~^] ~^^ ~^_ (Underscore) ~ (Tilde and Space) ~! ~” ~# ~$ ~% ~& § ¨ © ª « ¬ (soft hyphen) × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC ~’ ~( ~) ~* ~+ ~, ~- (Dash) ~W ~X ~Y ~Z ~[ ~\\ E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Technical Specifications 287 Desired ASCII Hex Value Hat Encoded Desired ASCII Hex Value ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿ À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 ~9 ~: ~; ~< ~= ~> ~? ~@ ~A ~B ~C ~D ~E ~F ~G ~H ~I ~J ~K ~L ~M ~N ~O ~P ~Q ~R ~S ~T ~U ~V Ý Þ ß à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Hat Encoded ~] ~\^ ~_ (Underscore) ~` ~a ~b ~c ~d ~e ~f ~g ~h ~i ~j ~k ~l ~m ~n ~o ~p ~q ~r ~s ~t ~u ~v ~w ~x ~y ~z ~{ ~| ~} ~~ ~^? MX3X Reference Guide 288 Technical Specifications Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart 0 1 2 0x00 0x01 0x02 40 41 42 8 0x28 0x29 0x2A 80 81 82 0x50 0x51 0x52 120 121 122 0x78 0x79 0x7A 3 4 5 0x03 0x04 0x05 43 44 45 0x2B 0x2C 0x2D 83 84 85 0x53 0x54 0x55 123 124 125 0x7B 0x7C 0x7D 6 7 8 9 10 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 46 47 48 49 50 0x2E 0x2F 0x30 0x31 0x32 86 87 88 89 90 0x56 0x57 0x58 0x59 0x5A 126 127 128 129 130 0x7E 0x7F 0x80 0x81 0x82 11 12 13 14 15 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 51 52 53 54 55 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 91 92 93 94 95 0x5B 0x5C 0x5D 0x5E 0x5F 131 132 133 134 135 0x83 0x84 0x85 0x86 0x87 16 17 18 19 20 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 56 57 58 59 60 0x38 0x39 0x3A 0x3B 0x3C 96 97 98 99 100 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 136 137 138 139 140 0x88 0x89 0x8A 0x8B 0x8C 21 22 23 24 25 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 61 62 63 64 65 0x3D 0x3E 0x3F 0x40 0x41 101 102 103 104 105 0x65 0x66 0x67 0x68 0x69 141 142 143 144 145 0x8D 0x8E 0x8F 0x90 0x91 26 27 28 29 30 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 66 67 68 69 70 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 106 107 108 109 110 0x6A 0x6B 0x6C 0x6D 0x6E 146 147 148 149 150 0x92 0x93 0x94 0x95 0x96 31 32 33 34 35 0x1F 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 71 72 73 74 75 0x47 0x48 0x49 0x4A 0x4B 111 112 113 114 115 0x6F 0x70 0x71 0x72 0x73 151 152 153 154 155 0x97 0x98 0x99 0x9A 0x9B 36 37 38 39 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 76 77 78 79 0x4C 0x4D 0x4E 0x4F 116 117 118 119 0x74 0x75 0x76 0x77 156 157 158 159 0x9C 0x9D 0x9E 0x9F Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (0 to 159 Decimal) 8 The answer to Life, the Universe and Everything. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Technical Specifications 289 160 161 162 163 164 165 0xA0 0xA1 0xA2 0xA3 0xA4 0xA5 200 201 202 203 204 205 0xC8 0xC9 0xCA 0xCB 0xCC 0xCD 240 241 242 243 244 245 0xF0 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4 0xF5 166 167 168 169 170 0xA6 0xA7 0xA8 0xA9 0xAA 206 207 208 209 210 0xCE 0xCF 0xD0 0xD1 0xD2 246 247 248 249 250 0xF6 0xF7 0xF8 0xF9 0xFA 171 172 173 174 175 0xAB 0xAC 0xAD 0xAE 0xAF 211 212 213 214 215 0xD3 0xD4 0xD5 0xD6 0xD7 251 252 253 254 255 0xFB 0xFC 0xFD 0xFE 0xFF 176 177 178 179 180 0xB0 0xB1 0xB2 0xB3 0xB4 216 217 218 219 220 0xD8 0xD9 0xDA 0xDB 0xDC 181 182 183 184 185 0xB5 0xB6 0xB7 0xB8 0xB9 221 222 223 224 225 0xDD 0xDE 0xDF 0xE0 0xE1 186 187 188 189 190 0xBA 0xBB 0xBC 0xBD 0xBE 226 227 228 229 230 0xE2 0xE3 0xE4 0xE5 0xE6 191 192 193 194 195 0xBF 0xC0 0xC1 0xC2 0xC3 231 232 233 234 235 0xE7 0xE8 0xE9 0xEA 0xEB 196 197 198 199 0xC4 0xC5 0xC6 0xC7 236 237 238 239 0xEC 0xED 0xEE 0xEF Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (160 to 255 Decimal) E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 290 Technical Specifications Revision History Revision G, November 2006 Notices Updated trademark statements. Chapter 1 – Introduction Updated “Overview” description. Added Wavelink Avalanche Enabler to “Features/Options of the MX3X Family”. Updated “Related Manuals” section. Updated RoHS Accessories. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Added contents of Chapter 3 “Power Supply” to Chapter 2. Chapter 3 – Power Supply Deleted. Contents added to Chapter 2. Chapter 3 – System Configuration Renumbered from Chapter 4. Chapter 4 – Scanner New. Chapter 5 – MX3-RFID Deleted. Refer to the “MX3-RFID User’s Guide” and the “MX3-RFID Reference Guide”. Moved “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” sections to Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Renumbered from Chapter 7 to Chapter 5. Chapter 6 – AppLock No change. Appendix B – Technical Specifications Added “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” from the deleted Chapter 3 “MX3-RFID” chapter. Added “ASCII Control Codes” chart. Entire Manual Removed MX3-RFID specific information and instruction. Placed in “MX3-RFID User’s Guide” and “MX3-RFID Reference Guide”; released for publication September 2006. Changed “radio” to “wireless” or “client” in context, if suitable. Changed Chapter cross-references to match Chapter number changes. Updated “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Option)”. Added “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration”. Changed “radio” to “wireless” or “client” in context, if suitable. Updated default value for Display Backlight Idle Timer from 30 seconds to 3 seconds. Added “Sign-on Screen for LEAP, PEAP/MS-CHAP, PEAP/GTC”. Added configuration instruction for PEAP/GTC on Summit devices. Updated parameters and options based on Summit version 1.2.10 differences. Revision F, August 2006 Notices Chapter 1 – Introduction Added WEEE statement. Added trademarks for RAM mounting products and Summit radio. Added caution for battery well vent location “Battery Well Vent Aperture”. Added key sequence to use if the touchscreen is not accepting taps or needs recalibration to “Getting Started | Troubleshooting”. Expanded instruction when using audio cable and headsets. Added voice accessories to “Accessories”. Added ROHS marker to Accessories. Removed USB A and USB B cable photos. Changed MX3-RFID IP rating from “dust and water protection enclosure rating of IEC 60529 compliant to IP55” to “...IP65”. Added “Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key”. MX3P: Added “Features/Options for the MX3X Family”. Added “RFID and MX3P Devices and the MX3 Cradles”. Replaced “RFID Device and LXE Cradles” and “The MX3-RFID Device and Cradles” with “The Passive Vehicle Cradle”. MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Technical Specifications 291 Added new section titled “Connect External Power Supply to the MX3P”. Added information and Accessories for the MX3P mobile device. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Added “RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port”. Chapter 3 – Power Supply Corrected the following statement: “The MX3X is designed to achieve 8+ hours of continuous operation.” The statement is now correct. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Added intro information for JAVA option, RFTerm option, AppLock option and Wavelink Avalanche option to “Installed Software”. Added Summit radio to “Start Menu Program Options”. Added note to “Bluetooth Manager” and “Scanner/Main”: “Bluetooth Manager, Bluetooth service or options are not available for all MX3X devices or in all MX3X software releases.” Revised “About” section to include pre-installed font information. Revised “Date/Time” section. Revised “Password” section. Revised “Scanner” sections for new features. Added new sections to Utilities: “Enabling GrabTime”, “Configuring CapsLock Behavior”, “Configuring IPv6”, “Configuring Touch Panel Behavior”. Revised “LAUNCH.EXE” section for Summit radio and new features. Expanded “Reflash the Mobile Device” section to include Reflash TAG file process. Chapter 5 – MX3-RFID Removed Scanner tab explanations. Referred reader to Chapter 4, section titled “Scanner” for explanation and instruction. Changed MX3-RFID IP rating from IP55 to IP65. Chapter 6 – AppLock Added Multi Application AppLock instruction. Chapter 7 – Wireless Network Configuration Added Summit Client Utility. Separated chapter into four sections: Summit, Cisco, Symbol, and Certificates. Appendix B – Technical Specifications Added “Revision History”. Removed USB A and USB B cable photos from “Cable Specifications”. Added Summit radio technical specifications. Changed MX3-RFID IP rating from “dust and water protection enclosure rating of IEC 60529 compliant to IP55” to “...IP65”. Entire Manual Clarified differences between MX3X, MX3P and MX3-RFID mobile devices, cradles, batteries and chargers. Noted the replacement of SE923 scanner with SE955 scanner (July 2006) where applicable. Updated Figures to display LXE 2005 logo. Changed part numbers for cradles from 2381A002DESKCRADLE to MX3RA002DESKCRADLE and 2381A003VMCRADLE to MX3RA003VMCRADLE where applicable. Revision E, November 2005 Chaper 1 – Introduction Added Scanner Clip Strap (85XX scanners only) to “Accessories.” Deleted obsolete tethered scanners. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Updated Date/Time figure and instruction to explain Sync button function. Updated “LAUNCH.EXE” in section titled “Utilities”. Added “2.4GHz Radio Configuration” section and “Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages.” Removed “Cisco – Aironet Configuration Utility (ACU)” and “Symbol” sections. This information is now included in Chapter 7. Chapter 7 – Wireless Network Configuration Added new chapter containing ACU and Symbol sections removed from Chapter 4. Added MX3X WPA information and instruction. Revision D, April 2005 Front Page Updated LXE Logo for 2005. Added “Microsoft Windows CE .NET Equipped” on cover page to separate this device from similar MX3 mobile devices. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Deleted “LXE RFID Config” from Start Menu. Added “RFID Configuration Utility” to Control Panel section. Added Avalanche “persist” keys to “Utilities” section “LAUNCH.EXE”. E-EQ-MX3XRG-H MX3X Reference Guide 292 Technical Specifications Chapter 5 – MX3-RFID Updated RFID Configuration Utility: • Added Filter, Firmware, and Format tabs to RFID Configuration Utility Panel. • 96 bit Class 1 tag support added. • EPC Tag Data Formatting added. • Added robust Read support. Revision C, December 2004 Entire Manual Noted differences between MX3X standard and the MX3-RFID device. Chapter 1 – Introduction Consolidated ActiveSync information and instructions. Corrected part numbers for MX3-RFID accessories. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Updated LAUNCH persistent storage information. Added Administration to control panel. Chapter 5 – MX3-RFID Added chapter specifically for the MX3X with an RFID module. Chapter 6 – AppLock Added chapter specifically for AppLock on MX3X and MX3-RFID devices. Revision B, August 2004 Chapter 1 – Introduction Corrected Accessories section “Cables for Cradle and MX3X Serial Ports”. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Updated “USB Host/Client Port” section. Added cable part number to “Storage Cradles”. Updated “Storage Cradles” and “Tethered Scanners” sections. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Updated Scanner Key graphic to show Field Exit option to Programmable Scan Keys for 5250 devices only. Appendix B – Technical Specifications Added section titled “Cable Specifications”. Revision A, First Release, June 2004 MX3X Reference Guide E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Index 2 2nd key function.....................................................58 A About software, hardware, version, network IP.............82 Accessibility settings ............................................84 Accessories Electrostatic Discharge .........................................8 Install ....................................................................8 Activation Key....................................................235 Activation Key, AppLock Multiple Applications.18 ActiveSync............................................................34 Backup Data Files ...............................................34 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection........35 Configure ............................................................31 Connect .........................................................33, 34 Create Comm Option ..........................................93 Explore................................................................33 IR port transmission ............................................30 Prerequisites........................................................34 Troubleshooting ..................................................36 Use this cable ......................................................54 ActiveSync Help...................................................30 ActiveSync Options ..............................................36 ActiveSync Setup Wizard.....................................30 ActiveSync version 3.7 .........................................30 ACU....................................................................192 Add new Symbol connection..............................214 Add prefix and suffix control..............................148 Adding Codes to the Match List for EAN128 Barcodes .........................................................167 Admin Hotkey AppLock ...................................................232, 241 Administration AppLock from Control Panel..............................84 Administrator Summit client utility..........................................173 Advanced Add Prefix.........................................................158 Add Suffix.........................................................158 Code Enable ......................................................164 COM port settings tab ...............................156, 157 Keys tab ............................................................156 Scanner Control Characters Tab .......................163 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Strip Leading and Strip Trailing ...............158, 159 Strip Leading, Strip Trailing .............................160 Translate control codes .............................158, 163 Advanced tab Barcode processing ...........................................154 Send Key Messages and Wedge .......................155 Wedge ...............................................................155 Allow Connection.................................................96 Alt key function ....................................................59 API calls .............................................................117 Appearance Scheme................................................................89 Application Panel................................................234 AppLock EUIE .................................................................235 Hotkey for Administrator..................................232 AppLock ...............................................................73 Setup .................................................................229 AppLock End-user mode ..................................................232 AppLock Passwords..........................................................233 AppLock Activation Key......................................18 AppLock registry settings...................................254 Approved stylus ....................................................62 At Power On .........................................................95 Audio Cable Install ..................................................................28 Audio Jack, connect..............................................16 Audio Volume settings .........................................22 Authenticate using the EAP-TLS protocol, Cisco208 Auto hide taskbar..................................................80 Avalanche Enabler installation ...........................118 Avalanche Enabler update ..................................123 B Background and Window colors...........................89 Backlight Timer ....................................................20 Backlight timers....................................................89 Backup Battery Maintenance........................................................67 Replacement........................................................67 Time Limit ..........................................................66 Backup Data Files.................................................34 Barcode Enable or Disable ..............................................141 Symbology Settings ..........................................143 Barcode data MX3X Reference Guide 294 edit buttons........................................................146 Barcode manipulation .........................................136 Barcode match list ..............................................146 Barcode processing overview .............................136 Barcode Scanner Integrated ............................................................53 Tethered ..............................................................53 Barcode Tab........................................................141 Barrel connector, MX3P power jack ....................13 Barrel connector, power jack ................................12 Battery Backup ................................................................67 Charge New ..........................................................8 Charge or Discharge buttons for backup battery maintenance ....................................................85 Charging..............................................................44 Handling Safely ..................................................66 Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) ...........................................44 Nickel Cadmium (NiCad) ...................................44 Battery Auto Turn Off ..........................................89 Battery Chargers ...................................................68 Battery Compartment..............................................9 Battery Life Approximate .......................................................66 Battery pack label location ...................................69 Battery tab.............................................................98 Battery voltage and status display.........................85 Battery Well Vent Aperture....................................6 Battery, charge before using ...................................9 Baud Rate ...................................................101, 135 Bluetooth ..............................................................85 C Cable ends, identified .........................................281 Cable Pinouts and Diagrams...............................281 Cable Specifications ...........................................281 Calibration ..........................................................107 Caps mode function ..............................................59 CapsLock Configuring .......................................................116 Caution Fused Circuit Connection....................................13 Certificates............................................................86 Root CA ............................................................217 User...................................................................221 Certificates are date sensitive .....169, 194, 217, 221 Chapter reference....................................................7 Character Recognition Touch screen .......................................................79 Charger, battery ....................................................68 Charging Battery Time Required ....................................................44 Check battery status..........................................9, 65 Checking for Cisco PEAP supplicant .................195 Cisco MX3X Reference Guide Index PEAP Supplicant...............................................195 Cisco Client ........................................................192 Cisco client Setup ...............................................192 Cisco profile parameters .....................................193 Cisco wireless configuration...............................196 Cisco WPA System Requirements........................................194 CISCO.CAB .......................................................195 CISCOMSCHAP.CAB.......................................195 CISCOPEAP.CAB..............................................195 Cleaning................................................................63 Clear Contents of Document Folder .....................80 Clear persistent memory .....................................134 Code ID transmission setting..............................142 COLDBOOT.EXE..............................................117 Color Codes ..........................................................15 Color displays .................................................44, 62 Color displays and backlight timers......................20 Color screen Backlight.............................................................89 COM port settings tab.................................105, 140 COM Port Switching ............................................52 COM ports ............................................................51 COM Ports..................................................101, 135 Command line utilities........................................117 Command Prompt.................................................78 Commit button Config ...............................................................174 Global Settings..................................................179 Communication connect option ............................77 Communications ...................................................77 compact flash memor............................................43 Components Back ......................................................................4 Endcap ..................................................................5 Config buttons ....................................................174 Config parameters Summit..............................................................175 Configuration AppLock ...........................................................234 Single User AppLock........................................241 Configuring IPv6 for Symbol .............................213 Connect ActiveSync..........................................................77 Connect Using ......................................................96 Control characters.......................................149, 163 Control Panel Single User AppLock........................................241 Control Panel options ...........................................81 Controls, Physical .................................................50 Copied on startup..................................................75 Copyrights ..........................................................110 Core Logic ............................................................44 CPU ......................................................................43 Cradle Manual ..................................................................3 Cradle for MX3-RFID and MX3P........................39 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Index Cradles, function...................................................37 Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection ..........93 Creating Custom Keymaps ...................................60 Critical Suspend....................................................66 what happens when .............................................67 Critical Suspend mode ..........................................49 Critical Suspend state ...........................................67 Ctrl Char Mapping......................................141, 149 Ctrl key function ...................................................58 Cumulative mode timers.......................................98 Current Time.........................................................87 Custom ID parameters .........................................................151 Custom identifiers...............................................150 Custom Identifiers ..............................................141 Custom Key Mapping.........................................260 and programmable scan buttons........................261 Custom Key Maps ................................................60 D Data Bits .....................................................101, 135 Data entry .............................................................26 Daylight Savings...................................................87 DB9-DB9 Serial Cable Tech Specs ..........................................................54 Decimal - Hexadecimal Equivalent 0 - 159 ...............................................................288 160 - 255 ...........................................................289 DEFAULT.KEY.................................................261 Delay.....................................................................92 Desktop.................................................................74 Desktop cradle ......................................................38 Power connection................................................38 RS-232 connection..............................................38 Status Indicator ...................................................37 Device Name and description .............................110 Device status power levels displayed ........................................99 DHCP ...................................................................93 Diags buttons ......................................................178 Diags tab Summit..............................................................178 Dialup properties for dial up access......................88 Digital certificates Date and Time.....................................................86 Disable slot now ...................................................97 Display adjust contrast .....................................................20 Features...............................................................62 Pixels...................................................................62 Display and scanner aperture cleaning .................63 Display Backlight Timer.......................................62 Display Backlighting and the Touchscreen............................................62 Display brightness and contrast ............................20 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H 295 Display Contrast ...................................................20 Display Specifications ........................................280 Display Timer .......................................................62 Document Conventions ..........................................7 Dual Serial Port endcap ........................................51 E EAP-FAST Authentication, Summit ..................186 EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration, Cisco .208 Edit the button parameters ....................................57 Electrostatic Discharge .........................................45 Enable Code ID...........................................142, 150 Enable Code ID drop-down box .........................141 Enable internal scanner sound ............................138 Enable or Disable specific symbology................141 Enabler Adapter options .................................................130 and Summit clients............................................131 communication..................................................121 Configuration ....................................................121 Connection ........................................................124 Execution ..........................................................125 File Menu ..........................................................122 Global options...................................................132 Icon on taskbar..................................................130 Network adapter status, link speed....................132 Passwords..........................................................122 Scan Configuration ...........................................128 Server Contact...................................................126 Settings Menu ...................................................123 Shortcuts ...........................................................129 Startup and shutdown options ...........................127 Window options ................................................128 Enabler installation .............................................118 Enabler Uninstall Process ...................................118 End user switching Hotkey...............................................................239 Touch ................................................................239 Endcap Combinations ...........................................52 Endcaps and COM Ports.......................................51 Enter key function.................................................58 Entering Data ........................................................26 Environmental Specifications .............................283 Error Messages AppLock ...........................................................245 Examples Barcode processing ...........................................153 Control Code replacement ................................152 raw scanner data and resulting data...................153 Expand Control Panel ...........................................80 External Auto Turn Off.........................................89 External Power Supplies.......................................12 MX3X Reference Guide 296 Index F I Factory Default, reset registry to ........................134 Failure Battery Pack ........................................................67 Features...................................................................2 Field Exit ............................................................156 Field Exit key function .........................................57 FLASH..................................................................43 FTP Server, start and stop.....................................77 Function 2nd Key ................................................................58 Alt Key................................................................59 Caps Mode ..........................................................59 Ctrl Key...............................................................58 Enter Key ............................................................58 Field Exit Key .....................................................57 Scan Key .............................................................58 Shft Key ..............................................................59 Spc Key...............................................................59 Icons Explorer, Internet ................................................74 My Computer ......................................................74 My Documents....................................................74 Recycle Bin.........................................................74 Idle Time...............................................................89 IEC IP66, MX3X ................................................283 Inbox Outlook ...............................................................78 InfraRed Port ........................................................64 Input Panel......................................................26, 90 Insert battery pack into charging pocket ...............68 Insert Main Battery .................................................9 Installing Cisco client drivers .............................194 Internet Explorer AppLock ...........................................................235 Single User AppLock........................................242 Internet Explorer Network card and ISP required ...........................78 Internet Options CE 5.0 .................................................................91 CE NET 4.2.........................................................90 IP Address DHCP..................................................................93 Static ...................................................................93 IPv6 Broadcast Messages ...................................213 IPv6 configuration ..............................................116 IR operating envelope...........................................64 IR Port...................................................................64 G Getting Started ........................................................8 Global Delay.......................................................235 Global Key..........................................................235 Global parameters Summit..............................................................179 GrabTime utility .................................................115 H Handling Batteries ................................................66 Handstrap, installation ..........................................10 Hardware Configuration ......................................................43 Hardware Specifications .....................................279 Hat Encoding and RFID .....................................286 Headset .................................................................64 Headset data entry.................................................29 Headset, Install and Adjust ...................................28 Hexadecimal - Decimal Equivalent 0x00 to 0x9F .....................................................288 0xA0 to 0xFF ....................................................289 Hip-Flip, Assembly...............................................11 Host Connection prerequisites ..............................23 Hot Swapping Main Battery .................................66 Hotkey AppLock ...........................................................236 Single User AppLock........................................242 HyperTerminal......................................................36 MX3X Reference Guide J JEM-CE ................................................................72 K Keyboard Onscreen only .....................................................90 Keyboard 0409......................................................92 KEYCOMP.EXE ................................................260 Keymaps .............................................................255 Keypad and entering data .....................................26 Keypad Shortcuts............................................17, 59 Keys tab ..............................................................104 L Language and fonts...............................................83 LAUNCH.EXE...................................................112 LEAP without WPA Authentication, Summit ....185 LEDs 2nd function..........................................................61 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Index ALT function ......................................................61 BATT B function ................................................61 BATT M function ...............................................61 CAPS function ....................................................61 CHGR function ...................................................61 CTRL function ....................................................61 on keypads,location.............................................61 SCNR function....................................................61 SHFT function ....................................................61 STAT function ....................................................61 Levels, Logging Single User AppLock........................................244 Li-Ion battery life....................................................9 List configured ActiveSync connections ..............96 Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion).............................................65 Location, Components ............................................4 Location, Ports........................................................5 Logging AppLock ...........................................................238 Loss of Host Re-connection..................................35 Low Battery Warning ...........................................66 LXE Security Primer ..........................................169 LXE_MX3X ...........................................................73 LXEAPI.LIB.......................................................117 M MAC Address .......................................................83 Main....................................................................101 Main Battery and Critical Suspend state ...................................66 Hot Swapping......................................................66 Main Battery Pack ................................................66 Main Battery Power Failure..................................67 Main tab Summit..............................................................172 Maintenance, required Backup Battery....................................................67 Manuals ................................................................40 Match list ............................................................146 rules...................................................................147 Match List rules ..................................................147 Media Player.........................................................78 Memory allocate for programs or storage........................109 Memory installed ................................................109 Menu Options Start.....................................................................76 Microphone adjustment ........................................28 mode Block.........................................................161, 162 Key Message.............................................161, 162 Mode Key Functions.............................................59 Modes AppLock ...........................................................232 Modify the Registr................................................83 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H 297 Multi AppLock .....................................................18 Multi AppLock Activation key.............................18 Multi-Application AppLock ...............................230 MX3P description.............................................................1 MX3P Power Jack, attach power supply ..............13 MX3-RFID description.............................................................1 Manuals.................................................................3 MX3-RFID, MX3P and Cradles .....................29, 39 MX3X Manuals.................................................................3 My Computer Folders ................................................................75 N NETWLAN1 Properties .....................................215 Network Card MAC Address .....................................................83 Network Specifications Cisco .................................................................285 Summit..............................................................285 Symbol ..............................................................285 New Battery............................................................8 NiCad....................................................................65 NiCAD 50 mAh ...............................................................44 Nickel-Cadmium (NiCad).....................................65 No Security Summit..............................................................183 O Off Mode ..............................................................49 ON Mode characteristics ......................................47 Operating Temperature .......................................283 Optional Software AppLock .............................................................73 JAVA ..................................................................72 RFTerm...............................................................73 WaveLink Avalanche Enabler ............................73 Overview ................................................................1 P Parity...........................................................101, 135 Passive Pen ...........................................................62 Passive vehicle cradle ...........................................37 Password Single User AppLock........................................243 Password...............................................................95 Passwords AppLock ...........................................................233 MX3X Reference Guide 298 AppLock Save As .............................................238 Passwords lost at cold boot.................................117 PC Card.................................................................45 Storage ................................................................25 PC card slots .........................................................24 PCMCIA...............................................................45 Slots 0, 1 and 2....................................................97 PCMCIA Slots ......................................................45 PEAP GTC Authentication Configuration..........202 PEAP MSCHAP Authentication, Summit ..........187 PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration199 PEAP-GTC .........................................................195 PEAP-MSCHAP for WPA .................................187 Pen Stylus .................................................10, 17, 62 Pen Stylus and data entry......................................26 Persist RAM Base Files ......................................108 Persistant Memory Drive IPSM ...................................................................43 Physical Specifications .......................................279 Pin 9 Power.........................................................135 Popup blocker .......................................................91 Power Button ........................................................50 Power button, location ..........................................16 Power Jack, attach power supply ..........................12 Power level used, devices .....................................99 Power Modes diagram ..........................................46 Power Port 1 while asleep...................103, 138, 155 Power Properties...................................................98 Power slot during sleep.........................................97 Power Supply........................................................65 Battery Packs ......................................................44 Power Supply Specifications ..............................283 Power Supply, Cigarette Lighter Adapter.............70 Power Supply, International AC/DC ....................70 Power Supply, US AC/DC....................................70 Prefix and Suffix.........................................159, 161 Pre-loaded Files ....................................................71 Preserved upon reboot ..........................................75 Privacy, Internet....................................................91 Processing order..................................................143 Programmable keys Setup .................................................104, 139, 156 Prompt Command............................................................78 Protective Film for Touchscreen...........................63 PrtScrn.exe..........................................................117 Q Quick Start Instructions ..........................................8 QWERTY keypad.................................................58 R Rate.......................................................................92 MX3X Reference Guide Index Recalibrate ............................................................19 Recalibration.......................................................107 Reflash directions...........................................................134 keypress directions............................................133 with REFLASH.TAG........................................134 REFLASH.TAG .................................................134 REGEDIT.EXE ..................................................115 REGLOAD.EXE ................................................115 Remote desktop connection ..................................79 Remove user installed programs.........................100 Repeat ...................................................................92 Replacement .......................................................149 REPLLOG.EXE....................................................36 Restart, reboot.......................................................16 Revision History MX3X Reference Guide ...................................291 Revision Level Cisco .................................................................194 Summit..............................................................170 RFID Module........................................................51 RFTerm.................................................................73 Root CA Certificates Generating.........................................................217 Installing on mobile device ...............................219 RS-232 Pinouts ...............................................53, 55 Rules match list...........................................................147 Match list ..........................................................147 S Scan Good and Bad Scan sounds...............................111 Scan buttons and tethered scanners ....................................29, 56 Scan Buttons .........................................................57 Scan buttons and tethered scanners.....103, 139, 155 Scan buttons and the SCNR LED .........................57 Scan key function .................................................58 Scan Keys Left and Right ...................................................135 SCANBAD.WAV...............................................111 ScanCodeLeft and ScanCodeRight.....105, 139, 156 SCANGOOD.WAV............................................111 Scanner Manual ..................................................................3 Scanner configuration update and the Scan LED101 Scanner Control Characters Tab .........................149 Scanner Control Menu ........................................135 Scanner Keys tab ................................................139 Scanner LED, functioning ....................................27 Scanner, factory defaults.....................................101 Scanning and data entry........................................27 Schemes tab ....................................................98, 99 Screwdriver E-EQ-MX3XRG-H Index Phillips, for handstrap .........................................10 SE923 scan engine................................................27 Security Single User AppLock........................................242 Security options, supported.................................169 Security Panel AppLock ...........................................................236 Security Password AppLock ...........................................................237 Security, Internet...................................................91 Send Key Messages and Wedge .................103, 138 Serial Cable for ActiveSync ....................................................54 Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps......93 Settings Menu .....................................................123 Adapters tab ......................................................130 Connection tab ..................................................124 Display tab ........................................................128 Execution tab ....................................................125 Scan Config tab.................................................128 Server Contact tab.............................................126 Shortcuts tab......................................................129 Startup Shutdown tab ........................................127 Status tab...........................................................132 Setup AppLock ...........................................................229 Shift key function .................................................59 Show Clock...........................................................80 Shutdown time limits ............................................66 Single Application AppLock ..............................231 Soft Keyboard.......................................................90 Software and Files ................................................71 Software Load.......................................................72 Software version ...................................................83 Sounds ................................................................111 Space key function................................................59 Speaker .................................................................64 SSID ...................................................................175 Standard Range Scanner .......................................51 Start Menu ............................................................76 Shutdown ............................................................74 Start Menu program options .................................76 Static IP Address...................................................93 Status Single User AppLock........................................244 Status Panel AppLock ...........................................................237 Stop Bits .....................................................101, 135 Stop the Enabler Service.....................................119 Storage Manager devices ..............................................................106 Storage Temperature...........................................283 Stored certificates .................................................86 Storing PC Cards ..................................................25 Strip Code ID......................................................150 Strip leading and trailing.....................................145 Strip Leading and Trailing..................................135 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H 299 Strip Leading, Strip Trailing...............................161 Stylus ..............................................................17, 62 Stylus and data entry.............................................26 Stylus Clip ............................................................10 Stylus properties .................................................107 Stylus sensitivity.................................................107 Suffix and Prefix.........................................159, 161 Summit Client configuration ..........................................170 EAP-FAST Authentication ...............................186 LEAP without WPA Authentication .................185 No Security .......................................................183 PEAP MSCHAP Authentication.......................187 WEP keys..........................................................184 WPA LEAP Authentication ..............................189 WPA PSK Authentication.................................190 Summit client utility ...........................................170 Summit client utility (SCU) Config tab..........................................................174 Diags tab ...........................................................178 Global Settings tab ............................................179 Status tab...........................................................177 Suspend button......................................................74 Suspend Timer ......................................................21 Switching COM ports ..........................................................51 Symbol ID and EV-15 Imager.............................................142 Symbol profile parameters..................................213 Symbol Wireless Information.............................214 Symbology setting parameters............................144 Symbology Settings ............................................141 Synchronize desktop computer with the MX3X ActiveSync..........................................................30 System General..............................................................109 Memory.............................................................109 System Configuration ...........................................71 System Hardware Configuration...........................43 System Idle Timer.................................................21 System Requirements, Cisco WPA.....................194 T Taskbar .................................................................80 TCP/IPv6 information ........................................213 Terminal Emulator, connect .................................23 Tethered Scanner and a Cradle .............................39 Tile........................................................................89 Time Zone.............................................................87 Timers User, System, Suspend........................................21 Touch Screen ............................................10, 17, 62 Touch Screen and data entry.................................26 Touch Screen and Keypad Shortcuts ..............17, 59 Touch screen calibration.......................................19 MX3X Reference Guide 300 TouchDisable......................................................116 Touchscreen..........................................................62 Transcriber............................................................79 Transflective Display............................................44 Translate All ...............................................149, 163 Translate control codes .......................................149 Transmissive Display......................................44, 62 Troubleshooting AppLock Password ...........................................233 Multi-Application AppLock..............................240 Troubleshooting ActiveSync..........................................................36 Startup...................................................................8 Touchscreen ......................................................116 Unsuccessful scan ...............................................27 U User Certificate on the MX3X............................226 User Certificates Generating.........................................................221 User Idle Timer.....................................................21 User-specific application version information......82 Utilities ...............................................................112 Regedit ..............................................................115 V Vehicle 12VDC Power Cable ...............................15 Vehicle 24/72VDC Power Supply ........................14 Vehicle cradle RS-232 connection..............................................38 Vehicle mount cradle Components ........................................................38 Power connection................................................38 Video Subsystem Display Characteristics .......................................44 View Display ................................................................62 Virtual Key, change ....................................105, 156 MX3X Reference Guide Index Virtual Key, changing.........................................139 Virtual Keyboard ..................................................90 VK_Code List.....................................................278 Volume adjust audio volume ............................................22 Volume and Sounds............................................111 W Wake the device from Suspend.............................74 Wake up action for display backlight .............47, 48 WARMBOOT.EXE............................................115 Warning Low Battery beeps ..............................................66 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler ...............................73 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation...........118 WAVPLAY.EXE................................................115 Wedge.........................................................103, 138 Wedge, Barcode..................................................135 WEP Keys Cisco .................................................................193 Summit..............................................................184 Windows CE on-line Help...................................115 Windows CE. NET on-line Help ....................71, 74 Windows Explorer ................................................79 Windows version ................................................109 Wireless Network Configuration ........................169 Wireless Network Connection screen.................197 Wireless Security Summit Client ...................................................182 Wiring Color Codes..............................................15 WPA LEAP Cisco .................................................................205 WPA LEAP Authentication, Summit .................189 WPA PSK Authentication, Summit....................190 WPA PSK Configuration, Cisco.........................212 Z Zero Config Utility, Microsoft............................196 E-EQ-MX3XRG-H
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Create Date : 2007:02:08 08:26:56-05:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0.7 for Word Modify Date : 2007:05:15 11:08:58-04:00 Metadata Date : 2007:05:15 11:08:58-04:00 Format : application/pdf Title : MX3X Reference Guide Creator : LXE / EMS Document ID : uuid:3e6c6f56-73af-4250-9420-b85845c932d4 Instance ID : uuid:5eb961ac-69c8-45bc-9ee3-b10513a59044 Company : LXE Has XFA : No Page Count : 316 Page Layout : OneColumn Author : LXE / EMSEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools